Lennox-VRF EHB VRF Three-Phase

INSTALLATION / OPERATION
INSTRUCTIONS / EHB
©2019 Lennox Industries Inc.
VEP Heat Pump
Dallas, Texas, USA VRF SYSTEMS
OUTDOOR UNITS
Pub #
03/2017
! WARNING
Do not change the settings of any protection
devices installed in the outdoor unit. If the
pressure switch, thermal switch, or other
protection device is shorted or forcibly operated,
fire or explosion may occur.
Do not use parts other than those specified by
Lennox or fire or explosion may occur.
! CAUTION
As with any mechanical equipment, personal
THIS MANUAL MUST BE LEFT WITH THE injury can result from contact with sharp sheet
OWNER FOR FUTURE REFERENCE metal edges. Be careful when you handle this
These instructions are intended as a general guide and do
equipment.
not supersede local codes in any way. Consult authorities
having jurisdiction before installation.
IMPORTANT!
! WARNING The Clean Air Act of 1990 bans the intentional
Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, venting of refrigerant (CFCs, HCFCs and HFCs)
service or maintenance can cause property as of July 1, 1992. Approved methods of pump,
damage, personal injury or loss of life. recycling or reclaiming must be followed.
Installation and service must be performed Fines and/or incarceration may be levied for
by a licensed professional HVAC installer (or noncompliance.
equivalent) or service agency. These units must be installed as a part of a
Failure to follow safety warnings and these matched system as specified in the Product
instructions exactly could result in property Specifications (EHB) bulletin.
damage, dangerous operation, serious injury, or
death.
General
Any additions, changes, or conversions required
in order for the appliance to satisfactorily meet The VEP heat pump outdoor units are matched with
the application needs must be made by a licensed up to 63 indoor units to create a VRF (variable refriger-
professional HVAC installer (or equivalent) using ant flow) system that uses HFC-410A refrigerant.
factory-specified parts. Refer to the Product Specification bulletin (EHB) for
Do not use this system if any part has been the proper use of these heat pump units with matching
under water. A flood-damaged appliance is indoor units, branch pipes, line sets and controls.
extremely dangerous. Immediately call a
licensed professional HVAC service technician
(or equivalent) to inspect the system and to Shipping and Packing List
replace all controls and electrical parts that have Check the components for shipping damage. If you
been wet, or to replace the system, if deemed find any damage, immediately contact the last car-
necessary. rier. Package 1 of 1 contains the following:
The State of California has determined that this 1 - Assembled VEP heat pump outdoor unit
product may contain or produce a chemical or 1 - Outdoor unit installation instruction
chemicals, in very low doses, which may cause 1 - Outdoor unit user’s manual
serious illness or death. It may also cause 1 - Piping accessory package
cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm.
Safety Requirements
! WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK, FIRE, OR EXPLOSION HAZARD.
Do not touch the unit or the controller if your hands are wet.
Do not operate appliances with an open flame near the unit.
Do not replace a fuse with a fuse of a different rating. Do not use a jumper wire to replace a fuse. Do not insert
your hands, tools or any other item into the air intake or air outlet at either the indoor or outdoor unit.
Do not allow children to operate the system.
Model Number Identification

V E P 075 N 4 32 K - 1
Brand/Family
V = Lennox Global VRF (Variable
Refrigerant Flow) Unit
Product Revisions
Global 1 = 1st Revision
E = Export VRF
Voltage
Unit Type
K = 208/230V-3 phase-50/60hz
P = Heat Pump Outdoor Unit
Nominal Cooling Capacity - Tons Internal Use Only

075 = 6 Tons
096 = 8 Tons
Refrigerant Type
120 = 10 Tons 4 = R-410A
132 = 12 Tons
Certification Status
150 = 12 Tons
N = Standard
Lennox VRF Engineering Handbook
INTRODUCTION
DC Inverter Multi VRF Engineering Handbook
208/230V ~ 3Ø ~ 60hz
GENERAL INDEX
I. Introduction to Basic Features of Units.........................................1
II. Installation..................................................................................23
III. Commissioning Operation..........................................................67
IV. Maintenance..............................................................................110
V. Engineering Commissioning Software.......................................170

INTRODUCTION
Introduction to Basic Features of Units
CONTENTS
I. Basic Principles of Operation ...........................................................................2
II. Internal Piping Design of the Units ...................................................................2
III. Basic Parameters of Unit..................................................................................5
IV. Electrical Parameters ................................................................. ...................12
V. Optional Accessories ......................................................................................21
VI. Basic Requirement for Pipe Connection ........................................................21
VII. Precautions on Refrigerant Leakage ..............................................................22
VIII. Unit Operating Temperature ...........................................................................22
1
INTRODUCTION
I. Basic Principles of Operation

Outdoor units (ODUs) of Lennox Series VRF air conditioner can be implemented by combining multiple modules in parallel.
Similarly, indoor units (IDUs) consist of multiple units connecting in parallel. The operating principle is as follows: When an IDU is
operating in cooling mode, the ODU can correspondingly enable the outdoor module based on the operating load requirement of
the IDU. The outdoor heat exchanger serves as a system condenser, and the heat exchangers of cooling IDUs are connected in
parallel to serve as a system evaporator. The circulation of air supply and air return of the IDU is performed to adjust the indoor
temperature and humidity. When an IDU is operating in heating mode, all four-way valves in the ODU module are switched into
energized status. The outdoor heat exchange serves as the system evaporator, and the heat exchanger of the IDU serves as the
system condenser. The circulation of air supply and air return of the IDU is performed to adjust the indoor temperature and
humidity.
II. Internal Piping Design of the Units
1. Piping Diagram of VEP075N432K, VEP096N432K, and VEP120N432K
Gas
Gas
Gas
2
INTRODUCTION
2. Piping Diagram of VEP132N432K and VEP150N432K
Gas
Gas
Gas
3
INTRODUCTION
3. Names and Main Functions of Components
No. Name Main Function

1 Compressor Adjusts its own rotational speed based on the actual requirement of the system to implement
capacity control.
2 Compressor crankcase heater Maintains a proper oil temperature in the compressor when the compressor is in standby status,
ensuring the reliability during compressor startup.
3 Compressor casing-top temperature sensor Detects a compressor’s exhaust gas temperature for compressor control and protection.
4 Exhaust gas pipe temperature sensor of compressor Detects a compressor’s exhaust gas temperature for compressor control and protection.
5 High-pressure circuit breaker Protects a compressor by sending feedback signal to stop the system when the compressor’s
discharge temperature exceeds the operating value of high-pressure circuit breaker.
6 Oil extractor Separates the gas and oil in the system to ensure compressor reliability.
7 Oil equalizing device Equalizes the oil for all modules in the case of excess oil in the current module when multiple
modules are arranged in parallel, thus ensuring the system reliability.
8 Crankcase Resistance of oil equalizing device Maintains a proper oil temperature in the compressor when the compressor is in standby status,
ensuring the reliability of compressor startup.
9 One-way valve Prevents high-pressure gas from entering the compressor and fast balances the suction pressure
and discharge pressure in a compressor.
10 High-pressure sensor Detects the high pressure value in the system in real time mode for compressor protection and other
control functions.
11 Four-way valve Used for the switching between the cooling and heating functions of IDUs system.
12 Heat exchanger Used for outdoor heat exchange.
13 Fan Strengthens heat exchanging.
14 Defrosting temperature sensor Used for defrosting detection.
15 Electronic expansion valve for heating Controls refrigerant adjustment in heating mode.
16 One-way valve Controls refrigerant flow direction.
17 Subcooler electronic expansion valve Controls the degree of subcooling of tube refrigerant when the system is running in cooling mode,
and reduces the capacity loss on pipes.
18 Subcooler Controls the degree of subcooling of tube.
19 Liquid outlet temperature sensor of subcooler Detects tube temperature.
20 Inlet temperature sensor of gas-liquid separator Detects the inlet temperature of gas-liquid separator to prevent the system from running when the
refrigerant flows back to the compressor.
21 Gas outlet temperature sensor of subcooler Detects gas temperature of subcooler.
22 Low-pressure sensor Detects system low pressure to avoid extra-low operating pressure.
23 Gas-liquid separator Separate gas and liquid to prevent the system from running when the refrigerant flows back to the
compressor.
24 Outlet temperature sensor of gas-liquid separator Detects internal status of gas-liquid separator to further control the compressor suction performance.
25 Oil equalizing valve 1 Used for oil equalizing control among modules.
26 One-way valve Used for oil equalizing control among modules and avoid reverse flow of oil.
27 Unloading valve Avoids over-high pressure caused by pipeline blind spot.
28 Oil equalizing valve 2 Used for oil equalizing control among modules.
29 Filter Prevents impurities from entering components and parts.
30 Capillary tube Supports flow regulating and pressure reduction.
31 Liquid valve Stop valve, closed when the unit is delivered from the factory and will be opened after installation.
32 Gas valve Stop valve, closed when the unit is delivered from the factory and will be opened after installation.
33 Low-pressure measurement valve Detects the low pressure value or charges refrigerant during system running.
34 Oil balance valve Stop valve, closed when the unit is delivered from the factory and will be opened after installation.
35 Oil check valve Checks the quality of refrigerating machine oil of compressor during maintenance.
36 Unloading valve Avoid over-high pressure caused by pipeline blind spot.
37 Gas by-pass valve Avoids extra-high or low operating pressure.
38 Pressure-balanced valve Ensures success startup of compressor.
4
INTRODUCTION
III. Basic Parameters of Unit
1. Basic Parameters of ODU
Model VEP075N432K VEP096N432K VEP120N432K VEP132N432K VEP150N432K VEP171N432K VEP192N432K VEP216N432K

Refrigeration Capacity HP 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
VEP075N432K VEP096N432K VEP096N432K
Combination Mode — — — — — —
+ VEP096N432K + VEP096N432K + VEP120N432K
Power Supply 208/230V 3~ 60Hz
Rated Cooling kW 22.4 28 33.5 40 45 50.4 56 61.5

Capacity Heating kW 25 31.5 37.5 45 50 56.5 62.5 69
930 × 765 × 1605 930 × 765 × 1605 930 × 765 × 1605
Dimensions (W × D × H) mm 930 × 765 × 1605 930 × 765 × 1605 1340 × 765 × 1605 1340 × 765 × 1605 1340 × 765 × 1605
+ 930 × 765 × 1605 + 930 × 765 × 1605 + 1340 × 765 × 1605
Liquid Pipe mm Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ12.7 Φ12.7 Φ12.7 Φ15.9 Φ15.9 Φ15.9
Tubing
Gas Pipe mm Φ19.05 Φ22.2 Φ25.4 Φ25.4 Φ28.6 Φ28.6 Φ28.6 Φ28.6
Dimensions
Balance pipe mm Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52
Weight kg 225 225 285 360 360 225+225 225+225 225+285
Name R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A
Refrigerant Built-in Filling
kg 5.9 6.7 8.2 9.8 10.3 5.9+6.7 6.7+6.7 6.7+8.2
Volume
Model VEP228N432K VEP246N432K VEP270N432K VEP282N432K VEP300N432K VEP324N432K VEP342N432K VEP366N432K

VEP096N432K VEP096N432K VEP096N432K

VEP096N432K VEP096N432K VEP120N432K VEP132N432K VEP150N432K
Combination Mode — + VEP096N432K + VEP096N432K + VEP120N432K
+ VEP132N432K + VEP150N432K + VEP150N432K + VEP150N432K + VEP150N432K
+ VEP132N432K + VEP150N432K + VEP150N432K
Rated Cooling kW 68 73 78.5 85 90 96 101 106.5

Capacity Heating kW 76.5 81.5 87.5 95 100 108 113 119
930 × 765 × 1605 930 × 765 × 1605 930 × 765 × 1605

930 × 765 × 1605 930 × 765 × 1605 1340 × 765 × 1605 1340 × 765 × 1605 1340 × 765 × 1605
Dimensions (W × D × H) mm + 930 × 765 × 1605 + 930 × 765 × 1605 + 1340 × 765 × 1605
+ 1340 × 765 × 1605 + 1340 × 765 × 1605 + 1340 × 765 × 1605 + 1340 × 765 × 1605 + 1340 × 765 × 1605
+ 1340 × 765 × 1605 + 1340 × 765 × 1605 + 1340 × 765 × 1605
Tubing
Dimensions
Balance pipe mm Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52
Weight kg 225+360 225+360 285+360 360+360 360+360 225+225+360 225+225+360 225+285+360
Name R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A

kg 6.7+9.8 6.7+10.3 8.2+10.3 9.8+10.3 10.3+10.3 6.7+6.7+9.8 6.7+6.7+10.3 6.7+8.2+10.3
Volume
5
INTRODUCTION
1. Basic Parameters of ODU
Model VEP378N432K VEP396N432K VEP420N432K VEP432N432K VEP450N432K VEP474N432K VEP492N432K

Refrigeration Capacity HP 40 42 44 46 48 50 52
VEP096N432K VEP096N432K
VEP096N432K VEP096N432K VEP120N432K VEP132N432K VEP150N432K
+ VEP096N432K + VEP096N432K
Combination Mode — + VEP132N432K + + GMV-450WM/B-F + VEP150N432K + VEP150N432K + VEP150N432K
+ VEP132N432K + VEP150N432K
VEP150N432K + VEP150N432K + VEP150N432K + VEP150N432K + VEP150N432K
+ VEP150N432K + VEP150N432K
Rated Cooling kW 113 118 123.5 130 135 141 146
Capacity Heating kW 126.5 131.5 137.5 145 150 158 163
930 × 765 × 1605 930 × 765 × 1605
930 × 765 × 1605 930 × 765 × 1605 1340 × 765 × 1605 1340 × 765 × 1605 1340 × 765 × 1605
+ 930 × 765 × 1605 + 930 × 765 × 1605
Dimensions (W × D × H) mm + 1340 × 765 × 1605 + + 1340 × 765 × 1605 + + 1340 × 765 × 1605 + + 1340 × 765 × 1605 + + 1340 × 765 × 1605
+ 1340 × 765 × 1605 + + 1340 × 765 × 1605 +
1340 × 765 × 1605 1340 × 765 × 1605 1340 × 765 × 1605 1340 × 765 × 1605 + 1340 × 765 × 1605
1340 × 765 × 1605 1340 × 765 × 1605
Liquid Pipe mm Φ19.05 Φ19.05 Φ19.05 Φ19.05 Φ19.05 Φ22.2 Φ22.2
Tubing
Gas Pipe mm Φ38.1 Φ38.1 Φ38.1 Φ38.1 Φ38.1 Φ44.5 Φ44.5
Dimensions
Balance pipe mm Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52
Weight kg 225+360+360 225+360+360 285+360+360 360+360+360 360+360+360 225+225+360+360 225+225+360+360
Name R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A
kg 6.7+9.8+10.3 6.7+10.3+10.3 8.2+10.3+10.3 9.8+10.3+10.3 10.3+10.3+10.3 6.7+6.7+9.8+10.3 6.7+6.7+10.3+10.3
Volume
Model VEP516N432K VEP528N432K VEP546N432K VEP570N432K VEP582N432K VEP600N432K

Refrigeration Capacity HP 54 56 58 60 62 64
VEP096N432K VEP096N432K VEP096N432K VEP120N432K VEP132N432K VEP150N432K
+ VEP120N432K + VEP132N432K + VEP150N432K + VEP150N432K + VEP150N432K + VEP150N432K
Combination Mode —
Rated Cooling kW 151.5 158 163 168.5 175 180
Capacity Heating kW 169 176.5 181.5 187.5 195 200
930 × 765 × 1605 930 × 765 × 1605 930 × 765 × 1605 1340 × 765 × 1605 1340 × 765 × 1605 1340 × 765 × 1605
+ 1340 × 765 × 1605 + 1340 × 765 × 1605 + 1340 × 765 × 1605 + 1340 × 765 × 1605 + 1340 × 765 × 1605 + 1340 × 765 × 1605
Dimensions (W × D × H) mm
+ 1340 × 765 × 1605 + 1340 × 765 × 1605 + 1340 × 765 × 1605 + 1340 × 765 × 1605 + 1340 × 765 × 1605 + 1340 × 765 × 1605
+ 1340 × 765 × 1605 + 1340 × 765 × 1605 + 1340 × 765 × 1605 + 1340 × 765 × 1605 + 1340 × 765 × 1605 + 1340 × 765 × 1605
Liquid Pipe mm Φ22.2 Φ22.2 Φ22.2 Φ22.2 Φ22.2 Φ22.2
Tubing
Gas Pipe mm Φ44.5 Φ44.5 Φ44.5 Φ44.5 Φ44.5 Φ44.5
Dimensions
Balance pipe mm Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52
Weight kg 225+285+360+360 225+360+360+360 225+360+360+360 285+360+360+360 360+360+360+360 360+360+360+360
Name R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A
kg 6.7+8.2+10.3+10.3 6.7+9.8+10.3+10.3 6.7+10.3+10.3+10.3 8.2+10.3+10.3+10.3 9.8+10.3+10.3+10.3 10.3+10.3+10.3+10.3
Volume
6
INTRODUCTION
2. Basic Parameters of IDU
2.1 High-efficiency Low-static-pressure Air-duct-type IDU
Model VELD007N432U VELD008N432U VELD009N432U VELD011N432U VELD012N432U VELD013N432U VELD015N432U VELD018N432U VELD019N432U
Refrigeration Capacity HP 1 1 1 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2 2
Cooling Capacity kW 2.2 2.5 2.8 3.2 3.6 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.6
Heating Capacity kW 2.5 2.8 3.2 3.6 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.6 6.3
Circulating Air Quantity m3/h 450 450 450 550 550 700 700 700 1000
Power Supply 220-240V~50Hz/208-230V~60Hz
Liquid Pipe mm Φ6.35 Φ6.35 Φ6.35 Φ6.35 Φ6.35 Φ6.35 Φ6.35 Φ6.35 Φ9.52
Connective
Pipe
Gas Pipe mm Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ12.7 Φ12.7 Φ12.7 Φ12.7 Φ12.7 Φ15.9
OD × Wall
Drain Pipe mm Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5
Thickness
Unit
W×D×H mm 700 × 615 × 200 700 × 615 × 200 700 × 615 × 200 700 × 615 × 200 700 × 615 × 200 900 × 615 × 200 900 × 615 × 200 900 × 615 × 200 1100 × 615 × 200
Dimensions
Net Weight kg 22 22 22 22 22 27 27 27 31
Model VELD021N432U VELD024N432U VELD027N432U VELD031N432U VELD034N432U VELD038N432U VELD042N432U VELD048N432U
Cooling Capacity kW 6.3 7.1 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.2 12.5 14.0
Heating Capacity kW 7.1 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.2 12.5 14.0 16.0
Circulating Air Quantity m3/h 1000 1000 1100 1500 1500 1700 2000 2000
Power Supply 220-240V~ 50Hz/208-230V~60Hz
Connective
Pipe
OD × Wall
Drain Pipe mm Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5
Thickness
Unit
W×D×H mm 1100 × 615 × 200 1100 × 615 × 200 1200 × 655 × 260 1340 × 655 × 260 1340 × 655 × 260 1340 × 655 × 260 1340 × 655 × 260 1340 × 655 × 260
Dimensions
Net Weight kg 31 31 40 46 46 46 47 47
7
INTRODUCTION
2.2 4-way Cassette Type IDU
Model VE4C009N432U VE4C012N432U VE4C015N432U VE4C017N432U VE4C019N432U VE4C021N432U VE4C024N432U
Refrigeration Capacity HP 1 1.5 2 2 2 3 3
Cooling Capacity kW 2.8 3.6 4.5 5.0 5.6 6.3 7.1
Heating Capacity kW 3.2 4.0 5.0 5.6 6.3 7.1 8.0
Circulating Air Quantity 3

m /h 750 750 750 830 1000 1000 1180
Tubing Liquid Pipe mm Φ9.52 Φ12.7 Φ12.7 Φ12.7 Φ15.9 Φ15.9 Φ15.9
Dimensions Gas Pipe mm Φ6.35 Φ6.35 Φ6.35 Φ6.35 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52
OD × Wall
Drain Pipe mm Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5
Thickness
Main Part
W×D×H mm 840 × 840 × 190 840 × 840 × 190 840 × 840 × 190 840 × 840 × 190 840 × 840 × 240 840 × 840 × 240 840 × 840 × 240
Dimensions
Panel
W×D×H mm 950 × 950 × 65 950 × 950 × 65 950 × 950 × 65 950 × 950 × 65 950 × 950 × 65 950 × 950 × 65 950 × 950 × 65
Dimensions
Main Part kg 25 25 25 25 30 30 30
Net Weight
Panel kg 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Model VE4C027N432U VE4C030N432U VE4C034N432U VE4C038N432U VE4C042N432U VE4C048N432U VE4C055N432U
Refrigeration Capacity HP 3 4 4 4 5 5 5
Cooling Capacity kW 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.2 12.5 14.0 16.0
Heating Capacity kW 9.0 10.0 11.2 12.5 14.0 16.0 17.5
m /h 1180 1500 1500 1700 1860 1860 2100
Tubing Liquid Pipe mm Φ15.9 Φ15.9 Φ15.9 Φ15.9 Φ15.9 Φ15.9 Φ15.9
Dimensions Gas Pipe mm Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52
OD × Wall
Drain Pipe mm Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5
Thickness
Main Part
W×D×H mm 840 × 840 × 240 840 × 840 × 320 840 × 840 × 320 840 × 840 × 320 840 × 840 × 320 840 × 840 × 320 910 × 910 × 293
Dimensions
Panel
W×D×H mm 950 × 950 × 65 950 × 950 × 65 950 × 950 × 65 950 × 950 × 65 950 × 950 × 65 950 × 950 × 65 1040 × 1040 × 65
Dimensions
Main Part kg 30 35 35 35 35 35 45
Net Weight
Panel kg 7 7 7 7 7 7 7.5
8
INTRODUCTION
2.3 1-way Cassette Type IDU
Model VE1C007N432U VE1C009N432U VE1C012N432U VE1C015N432U VE1C017N432U
Refrigeration Capacity HP 1 1 1.5 2 2

Cooling Capacity kW 2.2 2.8 3.6 4.5 5.0
Heating Capacity kW 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 5.6
Circulating Air Quantity m3/h 600 600 600 830 830
Tubing Liquid Pipe mm Φ6.35 Φ6.35 Φ6.35 Φ6.35 Φ6.35

Dimensions Gas Pipe mm Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ12.7 Φ12.7 Φ12.7
OD × Wall
Drain Pipe mm Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5
Thickness
Main Part
W×D×H mm 987 × 385 × 178 987 × 385 × 178 987 × 385 × 178 987 × 385 × 178 987 × 385 × 178
Dimensions
Panel
W×D×H mm 1200 × 460 × 55 1200 × 460 × 55 1200 × 460 × 55 1200 × 460 × 55 1200 × 460 × 55
Dimensions
Main Part kg 20 20 20 21 21
Net Weight
Panel kg 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2
2.4 Floor Ceiling Type IDU
Model VEUM009N432U VEUM012N432U VEUM017N432U VEUM021N432U VEUM024N432U VEUM030N432U VEUM038N432U VEUM042N432U VEUM048N432U
Refrigeration Capacity HP 1 1.5 2 3 3 4 4 5 5
Cooling Capacity kW 2.8 3.6 5.0 6.3 7.1 9.0 11.2 12.5 14.0
Heating Capacity kW 3.2 4.0 5.6 7.1 8.0 10.0 12.5 14.0 16.0

m /h 650 650 950 1400 1400 1600 2000 2000 2000
Power Supply 220-240V~ 50Hz/208-230V~ 60Hz
Liquid Pipe mm Φ6.35 Φ6.35 Φ6.35 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52
Connective
Pipe
Gas Pipe mm Φ12.7 Φ12.7 Φ12.7 Φ15.9 Φ15.9 Φ15.9 Φ15.9 Φ15.9 Φ15.9
OD × Wall
Drain Pipe mm Φ17 × 2.5 Φ17 × 2.5 Φ17 × 2.5 Φ17 × 2.5 Φ17 × 2.5 Φ17 × 2.5 Φ17 × 2.5 Φ17 × 2.5 Φ17 × 2.5
Thickness
Unit
W×D×H mm 1220 × 700 × 225 1220 × 700 × 225 1220 × 700 × 225 1420 × 700 × 245 1420 × 700 × 245 1700 × 700 × 245 1700 × 700 × 245 1700 × 700 × 245 1700 × 700 × 245
Dimensions
Net Weight kg 40 40 40 50 50 50 60 60 60
9
INTRODUCTION
2.5 High Static Pressure Duct Type IDU
Model VEHD019N432U VEHD021N432U VEHD024N432U VEHD027N432U VEHD031N432U VEHD034N432U
Refrigeration Capacity HP 2 2 3 3 4 4
Cooling Capacity kW 5.6 6.3 7.1 8.0 9.0 10.0
Heating Capacity kW 6.3 7.1 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.2

m /h 1000 1000 1100 1100 1700 1700
Power Supply 220-240V~ 50Hz/208-230V~ 60Hz

Connective
Pipe
OD × Wall
Drain Pipe mm Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5
Thickness
Unit
W×D×H mm 1271 × 558 × 268 1271 × 558 × 268 1271 × 558 × 268 1271 × 558 × 268 1229 × 775 × 290 1229 × 775 × 290
Dimensions
Net Weight kg 35 35 35 35 47 47
Model VEHD038N432U VEHD043N432U VEHD048N432U VEGD076N432U VEGD095N432U
Refrigeration Capacity HP 4 5 5 8 10
Heating Capacity kW 12.5 14.0 16.0 25.0 4800

m /h 1700 2000 2000 4000 4800
Liquid Pipe mm Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52

Connective
Pipe Φ15.9 Φ15.9 Φ15.9 Φ19.05 Φ22.2
Gas Pipe mm
OD × Wall
Drain Pipe mm Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ30 × 1.5 Φ30 × 1.5
Thickness
Unit
W×D×H mm 1229 × 775 × 290 1229 × 775 × 290 1229 × 775 × 290 1483 × 791 × 385 1628 × 869 × 454
Dimensions
Net Weight kg 47 47 47 80 115
2.6 Wall mounted type IDU
Model VEHW007N432P VEHW009N432P VEHW012N432P VEHW015N432P VEHW017N432P VEHW019N432P VEHW021N432P VEHW024N432P
Refrigeration Capacity HP 1 1 1.5 2 2 2 3 3
Cooling Capacity kW 2.2 2.8 3.6 4.5 5.0 5.6 6.3 7.1
Heating Capacity kW 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 5.8 6.3 7.0 7.5
Circulating Air Quantity m3/h 500 500 630 630 630 750 750 750
Power Supply 208-230V~60Hz 208-230V~60Hz 208-230V~60Hz 208-230V~60Hz 208-230V~60Hz 208-230V~60Hz 220-240V~50Hz 220-240V~50Hz
Connective
Pipe
OD × Wall
Drain Pipe mm Φ17 × 1.5 Φ17 × 1.5 Φ17 × 1.5 Φ17 × 1.5 Φ17 × 1.5 Φ17 × 1.5 Φ17 × 1.5 Φ17 × 1.5
Thickness
Unit
W×D×H mm 843 × 180 × 275 843 × 180 × 275 940 × 200 × 298 940 × 200 × 298 940 × 200 × 298 1008 × 221 × 319 1008 × 221 × 319 1008 × 221 × 319
Dimensions
Net Weight kg 10.0 10.0 12.5 12.5 12.5 15.0 15.0 15.0
10
INTRODUCTION
2.7 Concealed Duct Type Air Conditioner
Model VESD007N432U VESD008N432U VESD009N432U VESD011N432U VESD012N432U VESD013N432U

Cooling Capacity kW 2.2 2.5 2.8 3.2 3.6 4.0
Heating Capacity kW 2.5 2.8 3.2 3.6 4.0 4.5
Circulating Air Quantity m3/h 450 450 450 550 550 750
Noise (H) dB(A) 30 30 30 31 31 33
Power Supply 220~240V-50Hz / 208~230V-60Hz
Fan Motor Input Power kW 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.03 0.03 0.035
Connective
Pipe
Connecting Mode Through bellmouth
Drain Pipe
mm Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5
(OD × Wall Thickness)
Dimensions (W × D × H) mm 710 × 450 × 200 710 × 450 × 200 710 × 450 × 200 710 × 450 × 200 710 × 450 × 200 1010 × 450 × 200
Net Weight kg 18.5 18.5 18.5 19.5 19.5 23.5
2
mm ×
Recommended Power Cable 1.0 × 3
piece
Model VESD015N432U VESD017N432U VESD019N432U VESD021N432U VESD024N432U
Heating Capacity kW 5.0 5.6 6.3 7.0 8.0
Circulating Air Quantity m3/h 750 750 850 850 1100
Unit EFternal Static Pressure dB(A) 33 33 35 35 37
Power Supply 220~240V-50Hz / 208~230V-60Hz
Fan Motor Input Power kW 0.035 0.035 0.045 0.045 0.05
Gas Pipe mm Φ12.7 Φ12.7 Φ15.9 Φ15.9 Φ15.9

Connective
Liquid Pipe mm Φ6.35 Φ6.35 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52
Pipe
Connecting Mode Through bellmouth
Drain Pipe (OD × Wall
mm Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5 Φ25 × 2.5
Thickness)
Dimensions (W × D × H) mm 1010 × 450 × 200 1010 × 450 × 200 1010 × 450 × 200 1010 × 450 × 200 1310 × 450 × 200
Net Weight kg 23.5 23.5 24.5 24.5 30.5

2
mm ×
Recommended Power Cable 1.0 × 3
piece
11
INTRODUCTION
IV. Electrical Parameters Table B: The breaker capacity and power cable specifications
1. Power Cable Wire Gauge and Circuit Breaker Selection when a circuit breaker is installed on each indoor unit
independently. Note that the circuit breaker of the indoor unit
1.1 Outdoor unit is used only for short-circuit protection and abnormal overload
of the corresponding indoor unit. Usually, the circuit breaker is
Minimum Circuit
Maximum off. All circuit breaker terminals must be connected to one main
Power Supply Fuse Capacity Overcurrent power switch, which is used to cut off the power of all indoor
Outdoor umits Ampacity
Protection
units.
V/Ph/Hz A A A
VEP075N432K 208V/230V 3~ 60Hz 3.15 20.1 30.9 Minimum Minimum

Breaker
IDU Sectional Area of Sectional Area of
Capacity (A)
VEP096N432K 208V/230V 3~ 60Hz 3.15 27.0 43.4 Power Cable (mm2) Grounding Cable (mm2)
VEP120N432K 208V/230V 3~ 60Hz 3.15 32.4 47.9 Low-static-pressure

6 1.0 1.0
Air-duct-type Air Conditioner
VEP132N432K 208V/230V 3~ 60Hz 3.15 41.1 46.8
All-dimensional Ceiling
VEP150N432K 208V/230V 3~ 60Hz 3.15 48.9 60.8 6 1.0 1.0
Cassette Type Air Conditioner
For information about the leakage circuit breaker for an indoor Single-side Air Outlet Ceiling
6 1.0 1.0
Cassette Type Air Conditioner
unit, refer to the following table. The circuit breaker capacities
listed in the following table indicate the circuit breaker Floor Ceiling Split Unit 6 1.0 1.0
capacities when all indoor units in the same system are
connecting connected to the main power. High-static-pressure
6 1.0 1.0
Air-duct-type Air Conditioner
Total capacity of Capacity of circuit Min. sectional area of Min. sectional area of Wall mounted type Air Conditioner 6 1.0 1.0
indoor units breaker (A) power cord (mm2) grounding wire (mm2)
Static-pressure Air-duct-type
6 1.0 1.0
Air Conditioner
<10A 10 1.0 1.0
16~10A 16 1.5 1.5

Note:
20~16A 20 2.5 2.5
1. The circuit breaker and power cable specifications are
32~20A 32 4.0 4.0 selected based on the maximum power (maximum current)
of the units.
40~32A 40 6.0 6.0
2. The power cable specifications are obtained under the
50~40A 50 10.0 10.0 conditions that the ambient temperature is 40°C, the working
63~50A 63 16.0 16.0
temperature of multi-core copper cable (for example, YJV
cable) is 90°C, and the cable is exposed in cable troughs
80~63A 80 25.0 16.0 (GB/T 16895.15). In different applications, adjust the
specifications based on national standards.
100~80A 100 35.0 16.0
3. Only copper conductor cable can be used.
125~100A 125 50.0 25.0
4. The sectional area of a wire is applicable for a distance
range of up to 15 m. If the distance is greater than 15 m,
increase the sectional area of the wire correspondingly to
prevent the wire from being burned due to overload current
and to avoid fire.
5. The circuit breaker specifications are obtained under the
conditions that the ambient temperature is 40°C when the
circuit breaker is working. In different applications, adjust the
specifications based on the circuit breaker manual.
6. The circuit breaker must support magnetic release and
thermal release at the same time to protect the system from
short circuit and overload.
12
INTRODUCTION
2. Circuit Diagram
2.1 Circuit Diagram of ODU
2.1.1 Circuit diagram of VEP075N432K and VEP096N432K
POWER XT1
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
RD WH RD BK BU
G BU BK RD W4 W5 W7 W8 W9
W3 W2 W1
G
AC-L1 AC-L2 AC-L3

W13
AP2 GND
H1 CN63 YEGN
XT2 L1-OUT L2-OUT L3-OUT
IDU/ODU D1 W31
G
communic- D2 CN3 W39 4
ation CN11
W32
Centralized G1 W33 W23 W24 W27 W28

control G2 CN7 T1 A1
network KM1
W34 YV1 W15 W16 W17 T1 A1
CN21 L1 A2
1 W25 KM2
W21 W22
RT1 50K 2 CN54 L1 A2 W30
W26
W29
1
YV2
RT4 20K 2 CN27
3 KM1-1 KM2-1 KM1-2 KM2-2
RT5 20K 4 CN56
5 CN502 CN503
RT6 20K 6 L1 L2 L3
YV3 Rectifier Bridge W35
CN28
N(-) P(+) CN102 W36 CN101
1
RT7 20K 2 AP6
3 CN57 AP1 G1 G2 P1 P2 4 W44
YV4 CN303 CN302
RT8 20K 4 CN23 CN302
AP4 W46
1 CN501 W47 CN503
RT9 15K 2 CN52 5
CN17 EKV1
L1-1 L1-2 L2-1 L2-2 U V W X500 X501 X502
5
50K 6 CN55 5 W55 W56 W57
RT10
CN18 EKV2 W58 W59 W60
L
BU YE RD
CN58
SP1 CN64 X1
EH2
U V W BN BK BU
CN59 CN29 COMP M

SP2 3¡« 3¡«
EH1
G G
CN43 CN42 CN41 W67
G G
HP
W43 W41
P
Code Name Code Name

AP1 Main Board RT5 Defrosting sensor
AP1
AP2 Wave Filter Board RT6 Gas bypass outlet temperture sensor
AP4 Drive board of DC inverter compressor RT7 Gas sub cooling temperature sensor
AP6 Drive board 1 of fan motor RT8 Liquid sub cooling temperature sensor
XT2
COMP Inverter compressor RT9 Ambient temperature sensor XT1 KM1 KM2
EH1 Inverter compressor electric heater belt RT10 Inverter compressor shell top temperature sensor
Upper layer
EH2 Oil separator electric heater belt SP1 Low pressure sensor
EKV1 Heating electric expansion valve SP2 High pressure sensor
EKV2 Sub-cooler electric expansion valve XT1 Wiring board (3 bit) AP4
AP6
HP Inverter compressor high pressure switch XT2 Wiring board (4 bit) Rectifier Bridge
KM1 AC contactor 1 YV1 4-way valve

KM2 AC contactor 2 YV2 Oil balance valve 1
L Electric reactor YV3 Oil balance valve 2 AP2 L
RT1 Ambient temperature sensor YV4 Gas bypass valve

RT4 Gas bypass inlet temperature sensor Down layer
13
INTRODUCTION
2.1.2 Circuit diagram of VEP120N432K

POWER XT1
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
RD WH
BU BK RD
G W4 RD BK BU
W5
W3 W2 W1 W7 W8 W9
G
AC-L1 AC-L2 AC-L3

W13
AP2 GND
YEGN
H1 CN63 L1-OUT L2-OUT L3-OUT
XT2
G
IDU/ODU D1 W31
communic- D2 CN3 W39 4
ation CN11
W32
Centralized G1 W33 W15 W16 W17

W23 W24 W27
control G2 CN7 A1 W28
T1 T1
network KM1 A1
W34 YV1
CN21 L1 KM2
W21 W22 A2
1 L1 A2
W25 W30
RT1 50K 2 CN54 W26 W29
W48
YV2
1 CN27 KM1-1 KM2-1 KM1-2 KM2-2 W49
RT4 20K 2
3 CN503
CN502
RT5 20K 4 CN56
5 L1 L2 L3
YV3 CN103 CN101
RT6 20K 6 CN28 Rectifier Bridge
N(-) P(+) W37
CN504 W38 CN504
1 W35
CN302
RT7 20K 2 AP1 CN102 W36 CN101
YV4 G1 G2 P1 P2
3 CN57 CN23 AP6 AP7
RT8 20K 4
AP4 4 W44
CN303 CN302
4 W45
CN301 CN301
1 5
CN17 EKV1
RT9 15K 2 CN52 W46
CN501 W47 CN503
5 5 L1-1 L1-2 L2-1 L2-2 U V W X500 X501 X502 X500 X501 X502
CN18 EKV2
RT10 50K 6 CN55
W55 W56 W57
W58 W59 W60 W61 W62 W63
L
CN64 BU YE RD
CN58
SP1 EH2
X1 X2
U V BN BK BU BN BK BU
W
CN59 CN29
SP2 COMP M1 M2
EH1 3¡« 3¡« 3¡«
CN41 CN42 CN43
G G G
W67
HP G G G
W42 W43
P
Code Name Code Name

AP1 Main Board RT5 Defrosting sensor
AP1
AP2 Wave Filter Board RT6 Gas bypass outlet temperture sensor
AP4 Drive board of DC inverter compressor RT7 Gas sub cooling temperature sensor
AP6 Drive board 1 of fan motor RT8 Liquid sub cooling temperature sensor KM1 KM2
COMP Inverter compressor RT9 Ambient temperature sensor XT1 XT2

EH1 Inverter compressor electric heater belt RT10 Inverter compressor shell top temperature sensor
EH2 Oil separator electric heater belt SP1 Low pressure sensor Upper layer
EKV1 Heating electric expansion valve SP2 High pressure sensor

AP6
EKV2 Sub-cooler electric expansion valve XT1 Wiring board (3 bit) AP4
HP Inverter compressor high pressure switch XT2 Wiring board (4 bit) Rectifier Bridge
AP7
KM2 AC contactor 2 YV2 Oil balance valve 1
AP2
L Electric reactor YV3 Oil balance valve 2 L
RT1 Ambient temperature sensor YV4 Gas bypass valve

RT4 Gas bypass inlet temperature sensor Down layer
14
INTRODUCTION
2.1.3 Circuit diagram of VEP132N432K and VEP150N432K
POWER XT1
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
W4 W5 W10 W11 W12
G W7 W8 W9
RD WH RD BK BU
W3 W2 W1 RD BK BU
G BU BK RD
AC-L1 AC-L2 AC-L3 AC-L1 AC-L2 AC-L3

XT2 H1 CN63 W13 W14
AP2 GND AP3 GND
IDU/ODU D1 W31 W40 3
CN9 YEGN
communic- D2 CN3 L1-OUT L2-OUT L3-OUT L1-OUT L2-OUT L3-OUT YEGN
ation W32 G
W39 4
CN11
Centralized G1 W33 G
control G2 CN7
network W34
YV1 W23
CN21 W24 A1 W27 W18 W19 W20
T1 W28
1 KM1
W15 W16 W17 A1 W50 W51
RT1 50K 2 L1 T1 A2
3 CN54 W25 KM2
YV2 W21 W22 L1
RT2 50K 4 CN27 A2 W30
W26 W29
1
RT4 20K 2 KM1-1 KM2-1 KM1-2 KM2-2 W48
CN28
YV3
3 W49
RT5 20K 4 CN56
CN503
CN502
5 L1 L2 L3
RT6 20K 6 Rectifier bridge 1
CN23
YV4 N(-) P(+)
CN103 CN101 L1-L2
1 L1 L2 L3
RT7 20K 2 W37 Rectifier bridge 2
CN57 W35 CN504 W38 CN504 G(-) P(+)
3
AP1 YV5 G1 G2 P1 P2
RT8 20K 4 CN25
CN302 CN102 W36
CN101
AP6 AP7 W52 W53
1 5 4 W44
CN17 EKV1 CN303 CN302
RT9 15K 2 CN52 4 W45 G1 G2 P5
CN301 CN301
AP4
W46 COM-OUT3 AP5
5 5 CN501 W47 CN503
CN18 EKV2
RT10 50K 6
7 CN55 L1-1 L1-2 L2-1 L2-2 U V W X500 X501 X502 X500 X501 X502 U V W CN27
RT11 50K 8
CN30 W55 W56 W57 W64 W65 W66
W58 W59 W60 W61 W62 W63
EH3 L2
L1
CN58
SP1 CN64
EH2 X1 X2
AP5
U V W BN BK BU BN BK BU U V W
CN59
CN29
SP2 M1 M2
Rectifier bridge 2
COMP1 COMP2
EH1 3¡« 3¡« 3¡« 3¡«
CN42 CN43 CN41
G G G G
W67 W68
AP3
HP1 HP2 G G G G L2
W41
P P
Left
Code Name Code Name

AP1 Main Board RT2 Inverter compressor 2 discharge temperature sensor
AP2 Wave Filter Board RT4 Gas bypass inlet temperature sensor AP1
AP4 Drive board of DC inverter compressor 1 RT5 Defrosting sensor

AP5 Drive board of DC inverter compressor 2 RT6 Gas bypass outlet temperture sensor
AP6 Drive board 1 of fan motor RT7 Gas sub cooling temperature sensor
AP7 Drive board 2 of fan motor RT8 Liquid sub cooling temperature sensor XT1 KM1 KM2 XT2
EH1 Inverter compressor 1 electric heater belt RT9 Ambient temperature sensor
EH2 Oil separator electric heater belt RT10 Inverter compressor 1 shell top temperature sensor Right upper layer
EH3 Inverter compressor 2 electric heater belt RT11 Inverter compressor 2 shell top temperature sensor
EKV1 Heating electric expansion valve SP1 Low pressure sensor AP6
AP5 AP4
EKV2 Sub-cooler electric expansion valve SP2 High pressure sensor
HP1 Inverter compressor 1 high pressure switch XT1 Wiring board (3 bit) Rectifier bridge 2 Rectifier bridge 1
AP7
HP2 Inverter compressor 2 high pressure switch XT2 Wiring board (4 bit)
KM2 AC contactor 2 YV2 Oil balance valve 1 AP3 AP2
L2 L1
L1 Electric reactor 1 YV3 Oil balance valve 2
L2 Electric reactor 2 YV4 Gas bypass valve
Left Right down layer
RT1 Inverter compressor 1 discharge temperature sensor YV5 Inverter compressor 2 pressure balance valve
15
2.2 Circuit Diagram of IDU
INTRODUCTION
2.2.1 VELD***N432U series Low Static Pressure Duct Type IDU

VELD007N432U~VELD027N432U
VELD031N432U~VELD048N432U
16
2.2.2 VE4C***N432U series 4-way Cassette Type IDU ceiling cassette type air conditioner
INTRODUCTION
VE4C009N432U~VE4C027N432U
VE4C030N432U~VE4C048N432U
17
2.2.3 VE1C***N432U series 1-way Cassette Type IDU
INTRODUCTION
2.2.4 VEHD***N432U series High Static Pressure Duct Type IDU
18
INTRODUCTION
VEHD031N432U~VEHD048N432U
INDOOR UNIT XT1
3RD
L L
N N
19YEGN 2WH 1RD 17BU 18BK 7GN 12BU 4WH
PE
20K Inducto r
5BK6 BU
POWER
PE X1 X2
X1 X2 X3 X5
CN2 CN3 CN35 CN31 YEGN
PE X4
AP2
Communication XT2
13BK
CN6 14WH CN451
Cord Interfac e 8RD 15YE
D1 AP1
16BU PE
9BK CN501
D2
10BN CN12
H1
11OG
H2
CN19
CN25 CN26 CN28 CN20
Wired UVW
Controller M
Interface Fan
RT1 RT4 RT2 Motor
θ θ θ
Wired
Outdoor EKV
Controller 15K 20K 20K
Or Indoor
AP3 Electronic
Environment In Out
Temp. Temp. Temp. Expansio n
Sensor Sensor Sensor Valve
Note 5 -core Electronic expansion valve connect to CN20.

6-core Electronic expansion valve connect to CN19;
2.2.5 VEHW***N432P series Wall Mounted Type IDU
19
2.2.6 VEUM***N432U series floor ceiling split IDU
INTRODUCTION
2.2.5 VEHW***N432P series Wall Mounted Type IDU
20
INTRODUCTION
V. Optional Accessories Note:
Lennox Series VRF units support the following optional 1. Functions of oil check valve: During after-sale maintenance,
accessories: the oil check valve can be used to extract lubricating oil
samples, which are further detected to analyze the oil
Export Model Remark quality in the system. The oil check valve can also serve as
ODU VEBC05 the inlet for lubricating oil charging. Stop the system for at
For model selection, refer to Pipe least 12 hours before the extracting of lubricating oil from
Manifold VEBC01A, VEBC01B, VEBC02A, Selection.
IDU
VEBC03A, and VEBC04A
the system; otherwise, overheat oil may burn the operator.
Remote-control Receiver Board VERDV2C Applicable for air-duct-type IDUs. 2. Functions of low-pressure check valve: It is mainly used
for low pressure detection of the system and refrigerant
Provides the commissioning
charging during after-sale maintenance.
Commissioning Remote Controller VERCL1B functions for function settings of
IDUs. Pipe connection diagram of outdoor modules
Applicable for units that support
Commissioning Software VECS1E CAN bus communication
technology.
Software VEIMS1E
Optoelectronic
VEGDCTR Applicable for units that support
Remote Isolation Converter
Monitoring CAN bus communication
System Modbus Gateway VEMG1F technology.
BACnet Gateway VEBG2F

Gas pipe
Note: Contact local sales company for optional accessories. Oil equalizing pipe Liquid pipe
VI. Basic Requirement for Pipe Connection 2. Each ODU system can be connected to multiple IDUs.
1. Outdoor units adopt the modular combination design of Detailed information about the number of units to be connected
individual cooling system, that is, units are connected by and capacity ranges is shown in the following table:
using pipes in parallel during installation. The tubing system
used among modules includes gas pipes, liquid pipes and Maximum Number of
Capacity Range of Connected IDU (kW)
oil equalizing pipes. Model
Connected IDUs (Piece)
Minimum Capacity Maximum Capacity
VEP075N432K 13 11.2 30.2
VEP096N432K 16 14.0 37.8
VEP120N432K 19 16.8 45.2
VEP132N432K 23 20.0 54.0
VEP150N432K 26 22.5 60.8
VEP171N432K 29 25.2 68.0
VEP192N432K 33 28.0 75.6
VEP216N432K 36 30.8 83.0
VEP228N432K 39 34.0 91.8
VEP246N432K 43 36.5 98.6
VEP270N432K 46 39.3 106.0
VEP282N432K 50 42.5 114.8
VEP300N432K 53 45.0 121.5
VEP324N432K 56 48.0 129.6
VEP342N432K 59 50.5 136.4
VEP366N432K 63 53.5 144.5
21
INTRODUCTION
Method for calculating the maximum concentration of

Capacity Range of Connected IDU (kW)
Maximum Number of refrigerant:
Model
Connected IDUs (Piece)
Minimum Capacity Maximum Capacity 1) Calculate the refrigerant charge quantity of each system.
VEP378N432K 64 56.5 152.6

Charge quantity of an ODU upon delivery (for the system
consisting of multiple modules in parallel, the accumulative
VEP396N432K 64 59.0 159.3 charge quantity of modules upon delivery is used) + Onsite
charge quantity = Total refrigerant charge quantity in the
VEP420N432K 64 62.5 168.8 system (kg)
VEP432N432K 64 65.0 175.5

2) Calculate the volume of maximum air conditioning space
(m³).
VEP450N432K 64 67.5 182.3 Volume of air conditioning space (m³) = Length × Width ×
Height
VEP474N432K 66 70.5 190.4
Note: The length, width and height here refer to the effective
VEP492N432K 69 73.0 197.1 length, width and height of the indoor space.
VEP516N432K 71 75.8 204.5

3) Calculate the maximum refrigerant concentration of the
refrigeration system.
VEP528N432K 74 79.0 213.3 Total refrigerant quantity of the system
VEP546N432K 77 81.5 220.0 ------------------≤ Maximum supported concentration (kg/m³)
Minimum volume of air conditioning space
VEP570N432K 80 85.0 229.5
Note: If the maximum supported refrigerant concentration is
VEP582N432K 80 87.5 236.3 not available in relevant local standard, use 0.3kg /m³ as the
maximum supported refrigerant concentration.
VEP600N432K 80 90.0 243.0
4) If the maximum refrigerant concentration exceeds the
allowed limit, the refrigeration system must be redesigned.
VII. Precautions on Refrigerant Leakage In this case, separate the refrigeration system into multiple
Personnel related to air conditioning engineering design and small-capacity refrigeration systems, or adopt other
installation operators must comply with the local safety ventilation measures, or contact local Lennox VRF sales
requirement for preventing refrigerant leakage specifie d in company.
local laws and regulations. If such safety requirement is VIII. Unit Operating Temperature
unavailable in local documents, the design and operation
must be implemented based on the following principles:
Cooling -5°C~50°C
Lennox series VRF units adopt the R410A refrigerant, which
is nonfl ammable and nontoxic. However, the space for
Heating -20°C~24°C
refrigerant leakage must be suffi cient to ensure that the
refrigerant concentration does not exceed that specifi ed in
the safety requirement; otherwise, people involved can be
suffocated by the refrigerant.
The maximum refrigerant charge and maximum refrigerant
concentration in the system are calculated directly based on
the size of the air conditioning space. The unit of refrigerant
concentration is 1 kg/m³.
(1) Flow direction of refrigerant leakage.

(2) Room for refrigerant leakage. Since the concentration of
refrigerant is greater than that of air, pay attention to the
spaces where the refrigerant may residue, for example, the
basement.
22
Installation
CONTENTS
Part 1 Engineering Installation Provision ............................................................24
I. Installation Safety ...............................................................................................24
INSTALLATION
II. Importance of Installation Engineering ..............................................................24
III. Cooperation Between Different Roles ..............................................................25
IV. Onsite Review of Design Drawing ....................................................................26
V. Construction Organization Process ...................................................................26
Part 2 Material Selection ........................................................................................27
I. Requirement for Selecting Construction Materials .............................................27
II. Requirement for Selecting Major Materials .......................................................27
Part 3 Installation Space Requirement .................................................................28
I. Place Selection for Installing ODU .....................................................................28
II. ODU Dimensions and Installation Hole Size .....................................................28
III. Installation Space Requirement for ODU .........................................................28
IV. Installation Space Requirement for IDU ...........................................................31
V.Position Selection for Manhole and Return Air Intake.........................................36
Part 4 Requirements on Foundation Installation.................................................37
I. ODU Foundation.................................................................................................37
II. ODU Fixing ........................................................................................................38
III. Vibration Reduction for ODU ............................................................................38
Part 5 Piping Connection .......................................................................................38
I. Schematic Diagram of Piping Connection ..........................................................38
II. Schematic Diagram of Piping Sequence ...........................................................39
III. Allowable pipe length and drop height among indoor and outdoor units ..........39
IV. Connection Pipe among Outdoor Modules ......................................................41
V. Fitting pipe between Outdoor Unit and the First Manifold .................................41
Part 6 Pipe Installation and Insulation .................................................................44
I. Pipe Installation for the Cooling System .............................................................44
II.Pipe Installation for the Condensing Water System ...........................................48
III. Insulation System .............................................................................................50
Part 7 Electric and Controller Installation ............................................................51
I. Precautions.........................................................................................................51
II. Installation of the Power Cable ..........................................................................52
III. Installation of the Communication System .......................................................55
Part 8: Refrigerant System Evacuation ................................................................64
I. Air Leak Test .......................................................................................................64
II. Refrigerant System Evacuation .........................................................................64
Part 9: Refrigerant Charge .....................................................................................65
I. Calculation Method for Charging Refrigerant .....................................................65
II. Method for Charging Refrigerant .......................................................................66
23
Part 1 Engineering Installation Provision

I. Installation Safety
Personnel and property safety are highly concerned during the entire installation process. Installation implementation must
comply with, conform to relevant national safety regulations to ensure personnel and property safety.
All personnel involved in the installation must attend safety education courses and pass corresponding safety examinations
before installation. Only qualified personnel can attend the installation. Relevant personnel must be held responsible for any
violation of the regulation.
II. Importance of Installation Engineering
VRF air conditioning systems use refrigerant, instead of other agent, to directly evaporate to carry out the system heat. High
level of pipe cleanness and dryness is required in the system. Since various pipes need to be prepared and laid out onsite,
carelessness or incorrect operation during installation may leave impurities, water, or dust inside refrigerant pipes. If the design
fails to meet the requirement, various problems may occur in the system or even lead to system breakdown.
INSTALLATION
Problems that usually occur during installation are as follows:
No. Installation Problem Possible Consequence

Pipes are more likely to be blocked; air conditioning performance is reduced; increasing or even hinder
1 Dust or impurities enter into the refrigeration system.
the normal operation of the system and burn the compressor.
Nitrogen is not filled into the refrigerant pipe or insufficient Pipes are more likely to be blocked; air conditioning performance is reduced; increasing or even hinder
2
Nitrogen is filled before welding. the normal operation of the system and burn the compressor.
The refrigeration performance is reduced. The system fails to keep normal operation due to frequent
3 The vacuum degree in the refrigerant pipe is insufficient. protection measures. When the problem getting serious, compressor and other major components can
be damaged.
Copper plating may appear on the compressor and reduce the compressor efficiency with abnormal
4 Water enters into the refrigeration system.
noise generated; failures may occur in the system due to ice plug.
Smaller configuration specifications can increase the system pipe resistance and affect the cooling
The refrigerant pipe specifications do not meet the
5 performance; larger configuration specifications are waste of materials and can also reduce the cooling
configuration requirements.
performance.
The cooling performance is reduced; in certain cases, it may cause long-term compressor operating
6 Refrigerant pipe is blocked. under overheat conditions; the lubricating effect can be affected and the compressor may be burnt if
impurities mixe with the lubricating oil.
The loss in pipe is considerable and the unit energy efficiency decreases, which are harmful for long-term
7 Refrigerant pipe exceeds the limit.
running of the system.
The system cannot correctly control the flow allocation; the compressor may be operating under over-
8 Incorrect amount of refrigerant is filled.
heating environment or running when the refrigerant flows back to the compressor..
Insufficient refrigerant circulating in the system decreases the cooling performance of the air conditioner.
9 The refrigerant pipes leak. Long-term operation under such circumstance may cause an overheating compressor or even damage
the compressor.
No water drainage circulating through the condensing water Residual water in IDUs can affect the normal operation of the system. The possible water leakage can
10
pipe damage the IDU's ceiling conditions.
The ratio of slop for condensing water pipe is insufficient or Reverse slop or inconsistent connection of condensing water pipe can hinder the smooth drainage and
11
the condensing water pipe is incorrectly connected. cause leakage of the IDU.
12 The air duct is improperly fixed. The air duct will deform; vibration and noise occur during unit operating.
13 The guide vane of air duct is not reasonably manufactured. Uneven air quantity allocation reduces the overall performance of the air conditioner.
The refrigerant pipe or condensing water pipe does not meet Water can easily condensing and drip to damage the indoor decoration, or even trigger the protection
14
the insulation requirement. mode of system due to overheating operation.
Since there is a lack of space for maintenance and checking, indoor decoration clould be affected during
15 The installation space for IDU is insufficient.
such operation.
The IDU or the location of the air supply outlet or air return The air supply outlet or air return turn inlet may be short-circuited, thus affecting the air conditioning
16
inlet is not designed reasonably. performance.
The ODU is difficult to be maintained; unit exhaust is not smooth, which reduces the heat exchanging
17 The ODU is improperly installed. performance or even prevent the system from normal operation; in addition, the cold and hot air for heat
exchange and the noise may annoy people in surrounding areas.
18 Power cables are incorrectly provided. Unit components may be damaged and potential safety hazard may occur.
Control communication cables are incorrectly provided or
19 The normal communication in the system fails or the control over IDUs and ODUs turns in a mess.
improperly connected.
The communication cables are short-circuited or disconnected, and the unit cannot be started up due to
20 Control communication cables are not properly protected.
communication failure.
24
Understand the special requirement (if any) for unit

Construction Air Conditioning
installation before implementation to ensure installation
quality. Qualified installers must have corresponding
engineering construction qualifications.
Specific technicians involved in the engineering Engineering allocation
implementation, such as welders, electricians, and
refrigeration mechanics must be licensed and qualified
with his/her corresponding certification. Engineering cooperation meeting
III. Cooperation Between Different Roles

A good installation of air conditioning depends on Engineering meeting about
socket installation and insertion
careful organization and close cooperation between
different areas such as architecture, structure, electric,
INSTALLATION
water supply and drainage, fire-fighting, and decoration.
Pipes must be laid in places away from any sprinkler
Working drawing
head for fire-fighting, and must be reasonably arranged preparation
to ensure that the pipes fit the electric, luminaries, and
decoration. Iron frame socket installation
Pipe laying
(1), Requirements for cooperation with civil engineering:
1). The riser should be installed in the air conditioning
tube well, and the horizontal pipe should be Indoor unit installation
placed in the ceiling, if possible.
2). A place should be reserved for the ODU base to Frame reinforcement
prevent the waterproof layer or insulating layer Refrigerant piping
on the roof from being damaged in later phase of
installation.
Water drainage piping
3). At places on walls or floors where pipes need to
go through, holes or casing should be preserved.
If the pipe needs to go through a bearing beam, a
steel casing must be prepared. Piping
(2). Requirements for cooperation with decoration

engineering:
Installation
The air conditioning installation should not damage
the bearing structure or the decorative style. Air
conditioning pipes should be laid out along the bottom Electric
of the beam as possible. If pipes meet one another at
the same elevation, proceed based on the following
principles: Outdoor Unit
foundation
1). Drain pipes require the highest priority. Air ducts
Ceiling Preparation
and pressure pipes should leave places for gravity
Outdoor unit
drain pipes. installation
2). Air ducts and small pipes should leave places for
any other major pipes.
Concrete engineering on the Leakage test
(3). Requirements for cooperation with electric: roof
After the capacity of air conditioning unit is determined,

Vacuum
check the following aspects with relevant electric design dehumidification
personnel:
1). Whether the electrical load is designed based on
Refrigerant charging
the requirement of the air conditioning unit; Indoor and outdoor spaces
cleaning
2). Whether the power cable and circuit breaker meet
the unit requirement and comply with relevant Decorative board
installation
national safety regulations;
3). Whether the local power supply quality (including
voltage fluctuation and interference noise) meet
the international requirement. Pilot run after power-
on
Any nonconformity must be resolved through
coordination.
User manual delivery
25
IV. Onsite Review of Design V. Construction Organization Process

Drawing
Installation staff must carefully read
and understand the design scheme
and drawings provided by engineering
designers, and prepare detailed and
feasible construction organization design
after reviewing the onsite status.
The following aspects of working drawing
must be reviewed:
(1). The loads of indoor and ODUs must
match. The gross rated capacity of the
INSTALLATION
IDU should be set to a value that is 50%

to 135% of the rated capacity of the
ODU. In real conditions, if the capacity
of concurrently operating IDUs exceeds
100% of the rated capacity of the ODU,
the air conditioning system fails to meet
the requirement. Note: Configuration in
excess of the capacity of the IDUs can
affect the comfort for users. The more
the excess is, the lower the adjustment
capacity of an air conditioning unit will
be. When the capacity exceeds 135%
of the configured value, the system
reliability can be affected. Therefore,
relevant regulations on capacity limit
must be strictly followed.
(2). The difference of level between an
ODU and an IDU, and that between
IDUs must be set within the
designed range defined by Lennox.
(3). Pipe bend for trapped oil is required
for gas pipe riser in the unit to ensure
normal circulation in the unit
lubricating system.
(4). The pipe diameter and manifold
type in the cooling system must meet
relevant technical specifications.
(5). The drainage method of unit
condensing water must be reasonable;
the pipeline slope must follow the
design requirement of unit.
(6). The air duct direction and air flow are
reasonably organized.
(7). The configuration specifications, type,
and control method of power cables
should meet the design requirement of
unit.
(8). The arrangement, total length, and
control method of control line should
meet the design requirement of unit.
Note: Engineering construction personnel
must strictly comply with the design
drawings. If any design cannot be
implemented during construction and
needs to be modified, contact the designer
first for approval and prepare a written
document, that is, the design modification
record.
26
Part 2 Material Selection Water supplying UPVC pipe: Φ32mm×2mm, Φ40mm×2mm,

I. Requirement for Selecting Construction Materials Φ50mm×2.5mm;
The materials, equipment and instruments used during air HDG steel pipe: Φ25mm×3.25mm, Φ32mm×3.25mm,
conditioning engineering construction must have certifications Φ40mm×3.5mm, Φ50mm×3.5mm.
and test reports. (3). Insulation material
Products with fireproof requirements must be provided with 1). Rubber foam insulation material;
fireproof inspection certificates and must meet national and
2). Flame retardancy level: B1 or higher;
relevant mandatory, required standards.
3). Refractoriness: at least 120°C;
If environmentally-friendly materials are to be used as
required by customers, all such materials must meet national 4). The insulation thickness of condensing water pipe: at
environmental protection requirement and be provided with least 10 mm;
relevant certificates.
INSTALLATION
5). When the diameter of copper pipe is equal to or greater
II. Requirement for Selecting Major Materials than Φ15.9 mm, the thickness of insulation material
(1). Copper pipe should be at least 20 mm; when the diameter of copper
pipe is less than 15.9 mm, the thickness of insulation
1). Material requirement: Hard copper or soft copper pipe material should be at least 15 mm.
according to pressure requirements for AC systems.
Check local code. (4). Communication cable and control cable
2). Appearance requirement: The inner and outer surface Note: For air conditioning units installed in places with strong
of pipe should be smooth without pinhole, crack, peeling, electromagnetic interference, shielded wire must be used as
blister, inclusion, copper powder, carbon deposition, rust, the communication cables of the IDU and wired controller, and
dirt or severe oxide film, and without obvious scratch, pit, shielded twisted pairs must be used as the communication
spot and other defects. cables between IDUs and between the IDU and ODU.
3). Test report: Certifications and quality test reports must be Selection for the communication cables of outdoor unit and
provided. indoor unit
4). The tensile strength must be at least 240 kgf/mm². Total Length L (m) of Number of
Communication Cable Wires × Wire Wire Material
5). Specifications requirement Material Type
between Indoor Unit and Diameter Standard
Remarks
Indoor (Outdoor) Unit (mm2)
R410A Refrigerant System
1. If the wire diameter is
OD (mm/inch) Wall Thickness (mm) Model enlarged to 2 ×
Φ6.35 (1/4) ≥0.8 0 1 mm2, the total
Light/Ordinary
communication length
Φ9.52 (3/8) ≥0.8 0 polyvinyl chloride
can reach 1500 m.
sheathed cord. L≤1000 ≥2×0.75 IEC 60227-5:2007
Φ12.70 (1/2) ≥0.8 0 2. If the unit is installed
(60227 IEC 52
Φ15.9 (5/8) ≥1.0 0 in places with strong
/60227 IEC 53)
electromagnetic
Φ19.05 (3/4) ≥1.0 0
interference, shielded
Φ22.2 (7/8) ≥1.2 1/2H wire must be used
Φ25.40 (1/1) ≥1.2 1/2H
Φ28.60 (9/8) ≥1.2 1/2H Selection for the communication cable between the indoor unit
Φ31.80 (5/4) ≥1.3 1/2H
and wired controller
Φ34.90 (11/8) ≥1.3 1/2H Total Length L (m) of Number of
Φ38.10 (12/8) ≥1.5 1/2H Communication Cable Wires × Wire Wire Material
Material Type Remarks
between Indoor Unit and Diameter Standard
Φ41.30 (13/8) ≥1.5 1/2H Wired Controller (mm2)
Φ44.5 (7/4) ≥1.5 1/2H 1. Total length of
Φ51.4 (7/4) ≥1.5 1/2H communication line can't
exceed 250m.
Φ54.1 (17/8) ≥1.5 1/2H
Light/Ordinary 2. The cord shall be Circular
polyvinyl chloride cord (the cores shall be
6). After the inner part of the copper pipe is cleaned and sheathed cord. L≤250 ≥2×0.75 IEC 60227-5:2007 twisted together).
dried, the inlet and outlet must be sealed tightly by using (60227 IEC 52 3. If the unit is installed
pipe caps, plugs or adhesive tapes. /60227 IEC 53) in places with strong
electromagnetic
(2). Condensing water pipe
interference, shielded
1). Pipes that can be used for air conditioner drainage wire must be used
include: water supplying UPVC pipe, PP-R pipe, PP-C
pipe, and HDG steel pipe. (5). Power cable
2). All relevant certificates and quality test reports are Only copper conductors can be used as power cables. The
provided. copper conductors must meet relevant national standard and
3). Requirements for specifications and wall thickness satisfy the carrying capacity of unit.
27
Part 3 Installation Space Requirement III. Installation Space Requirement for ODU
I. Place Selection for Installing ODU (1). If all sides of the ODU (including the top) are surrounded
The widely-used VRF units are applicable for various by walls, process according to the following requirements for
scenarios. In residential areas, especially in rooms where installation space:
elderly and infants live, a higher refrigerating performance and Installation space requirement for single-module unit
noise control is required. Therefore, the ODU with the right
capacity and low noise is preferred; in addition, ODU should be
installed in outdoor spaces instead of in bedrooms, studies or
˚3000
meeting rooms. In commercial areas, ODU should be installed
˚1000
far away from offices.
II. ODU Dimensions and Installation Hole Size
Outline and physical dimention of VEP075N432K and ˚1000 ˚1000
INSTALLATION
VEP096N432K unit.

˚1200
Installation hole Electric box, pipes
go out of the electric
box from this side.
22
729
15 Installation space requirement for dual-module unit
792
˚3000
˚1000
˚200
˚1000 ˚1000
˚200
˚1200
Electric box, pipes
box from this side.
1605
Installation space requirement for triple-module unit
＞3000
930 765
＞200 ＞200
Outline and Physical Dimention of VEP120N432K,

VEP132N432K and VEP150N432K unit.

Installation hole
22
729
15
1200
＞1000
＞1000 ＞1000
＞200 ＞200
1605
＞1200
Electric box, pipes

box from this side.
Figure 5
1340 765
28
Installation space requirement for quad-module unit Installation space requirement for multiple ODUs
To ensure smooth ventilation, the top of the unit must be open
spaces without obstacles.
＞3000
＞200 ＞200 ＞200 If the front and left (or right) sides of the ODU are open spaces,
the units should be installed along the same or reverse
direction.
There is no limitation to the height of wall.
INSTALLATION
＞1000
˚

˚
˚

˚
˚
＞1000 ＞1000
£ 1000
＞200 ＞200 ＞200 Electric box, pipes
＞1200

box from this side. Rear
Figure 6
Front
£ 1200
(2). In principle, if a crown wall (obstacles for keeping out
the wind) exists over the machine, a distance of at least Rear
3000 mm should be left between the top of the machine
and the crown wall. If the front, rear, left and right sides of
the machine are open spaces, the distance between the Front
£ 200 £ 200 £ 1000
top of the machine and the crown wall should be at least
1500 mm, as shown in Figure 7. If the requirement for the
minimum 1500 mm cannot be met, or the spaces around
A maximum of four machines placed in parallel.
the machine are not open, a fresh air intake needs to be
connected to maintain smooth ventilation, as shown in
There is no limitation to the height of wall.
Figure 8.
Figure 7 Figure 8 Rear
Front
Rear
Front
A maximum of four machines placed in parallel.
29
(3). Monsoons must be considered during ODU installation. c. Based on the unit dimensions and the size of steel-
Correct Incorrect
plate ventilating duct, prepare materials such as
canvas casing, tin foil, steel bar and tapping screw, as
Monsoon
Monsoon direction direction
well as tools such as hand-operated electric drill,
Protective cover pneumatic screw driver and screwdriver.
Suction air One side 3). Basic operation of connecting an ODU to static pressure
Suction air (rear side)
ventilating duct
Suction air
(rear side)
(rear side)
Two methods are available to connect an ODU to static

pressure ventilating duct.
Suction air Method 1: Reserve the unit top case. Detailed operations
(rear side)
In this case, the defrosting are as follows:
time will be prolonged.
a. Install the ODU (2) and steel-plate ventilating duct (1).
INSTALLATION
(4). Snow must be considered during ODU installation. Use an pneumatic screw driver or screwdriver to
unfasten the tapping screws that fixing the top case
Correct Incorrect component (3), and then remove the top case
Protective shield of
exhaust air duct
component. Take out the grille from the top of the top
(provided onsite) case component and leave the top case.
Monsoon Monsoon b. Put the canvas casing inside out (4). Cover one end of
the canvas casing over the unit downward until the
canvas end face is aligned with the unit or a bit higher
than the top of the unit. Then, put the top case back (3)
Protective shield of and tightly press the canvas casing (4). Use tapping
suction intake
(provided onsite) screws to fi x the top case onto the unit (3).
c. Pull up the canvas casing reversely (4) and use the
The height of snow must be steel bar (5) to press the canvas casing tightly onto the
considered when selecting
the height of base. counter fl ange of the steel-plate ventilating duct
(1). Use a hand-operated electric drill to drill holes and
(5). During the installation of the ODU, air discharge and wind/ fasten the parts by using tapping screws.
snow protection ducts must be connected. In addition, the
d. Use the tin foil to seal the joints and check the joints’
aperture opening rate of shutters must be at least 80%, and
reliability.
the angle between the shutters and the horizontal plane
should be less than 20°. Requirements for installing exhaust
air duct are as follows:

1). Basic requirement for connecting an ODU to static
pressure ventilating duct
When an ODU needs to be connected to the static pressure
ventilating duct, the ventilating duct must be reasonably
designed. The pressure loss caused by the ventilating duct
must be calculated. In addition, a proper type of ventilating
duct is necessary. To connect he static pressure ventilating
duct to the ODU, three basic parts are required:
1. ODU;
2. canvas; and
3. steel-plate ventilating duct. Step 1 Step 2
The ODU must be interconnected with the ventilating duct
through canvas to prevent abnormal vibration and noise
generated by the steel-plate ventilating duct. The joint part
must be tightly sealed with tin foil to avoid air leakage.
2). Preparations for connecting an ODU to static pressure
ventilating duct

a. The ODU is installed properly based on the unit

installation requirement.
b. The steel-plate ventilating duct is designed based on

the unit and engineering requirement, and is installed
properly according to the engineering standards.
Step 3 Step 4
30

INSTALLATION
Step 5 Step 6 Step 3 Step 4
Method 2: Remove the unit top case. Detailed operations (6). When the effective area of air intake is less than 70% of
are as follows: the total air intake area of all ODUs, an induced draft fan is
also required. The total air input of induced draft fan should
a. Install the ODU (2) and steel-plate ventilating duct
be no less than 80% of the total supply air rate.
(1). Take out the grille from the top of the top case
component. Use the prepared canvas casing inside IV. Installation Space Requirement for IDU
out (4) to cover the surroundings over the top of the (1). Precautions on the IDU design
unit. Keep the top of canvas casing (4) 30 to 50 mm
higher over the top of the unit. Pay attention to the following issues when selecting places for
IDUs:
b. Use a steel bar to press tightly the canvas casing (4)
around the top case of the unit. Use a hand-operated 1). Ensure the optimum air flow organization of air
electric drill to drill holes and fasten the canvas casing conditioning in the practice and the most even distribution
onto the unit through steel bar by using tapping of temperature;
screws. 2). Avoid air interaction among different air conditioning
c. Pull up the canvas casing reversely and use the steel areas;
bar to press the canvas casing tightly onto the counter 3). Adopt the air back return method when air-duct-type all-
flange of the steel-plate ventilating duct. Use a hand- blast IDU is used. This can further reduce the unit noise
operated electric drill to drill holes and fasten the parts generated due to air return.
by using tapping screws.
d. Use the tin foil to seal the joints and check the joints’
reliability.
Note: Remove the grille on the top case when connecting
an ODU to static pressure ventilating duct; otherwise, the
air volume, especially the unit operating performance will be Air supply
affected. For method 2, since drills are required on the top
case, the powder coated protective layer on the top case will Maintenance grille
be damaged. As a result, the anti-corrosion performance of the
Air return
unit top case will be reduced.
Data setter

4). Ensure that the air return of the unit is not affected when
selecting places. In particular, for air-duct-type all-blast
IDU, the air return vent of the unit must be at least 300
mm away from the rear wall or other obstacles (in air
back return mode).
5). If the unit adopts the air back return method and the
ceiling requires air return under the unit, ensure that the
distance between the unit bottom and the ceiling is at
least 50 mm, and ensure that the effective circulation
area between the unit bottom and the ceiling is not less
than the air return vent area of the unit. For example,
Step 1 Step 2
31
The following table lists the detailed dimensions.
Item
A B C D E F G H I
A Model
VELD007N432U
Return air intake

Return air intake
Air outlet
VELD008N432U
Indoor unit VELD009N432U 742 491 700 615 200 121 528 161 580
D
VELD011N432U
VELD012N432U
VELD013N432U
VELD015N432U 942 491 900 615 200 121 728 161 780
VELD018N432U
VELD019N432U
1142 491 1100 615 200 121 928 161 980
INSTALLATION
VELD021N432U
The following diagram is applicable for units with the cooling

The distance
(H) cannot be capacity ranging from 7.1 to 14.0 kW.
E
less than 50
mm. Electric heater
(unavailable for pure heat pump) Electric box Liquid pipe Gas pipe
F
E
H
The distance between the air
return vent and the rear wall
C Air back return Drain pipe
must be at least 300 mm.
Air down return
D
Unit air return area S1: = D x E A J
I
Perimeter of ceiling return air intake: L = 2 x (A + B) ᮄ亢ܹষ
Effective air return area on the ceiling: S2 = L x H

S2 should not be less than S1; the distance between the
B
ceiling and unit (H) should not be less than 50 mm.
6). Ensure that no obstacle is placed near the air intake or
air outlet of the IDU (they can block ventilation). Install
the IDU at places 2.3 m higher than the floor. G
7). For IDUs of which the rated cooling capacity is greater The following table lists the detailed dimensions.
than 5.6 kW, air duct needs to be installed. Supply and
return air ducts can reduce the noise. Item
A B C D E F G H I J
8). Reserve sufficient space for future maintenance. Model
(2). Different installation space requirements for various IDUs VELD024N432U
1236 565 1200 655 260 222 1016 220 1050 695
VELD027N432U
1. Air-duct-type unit series
VELD031N432U
1.1 Dimensions VELD034N432U 1379 565 1340 655 260 207 1153 220 1188 716
VELD038N432U
1.1.1 Low Static Pressure Duct Type IDU
VELD042N432U
The following diagram is applicable for units with the cooling 1379 565 1340 655 260 207 1153 220 1188 716
VELD048N432U
capacity ranging from 2.2 to 6.3 kW.
Electric heater
(unavailable for pure heat pump) Electric box Liquid pipe Gas pipe
1.1.2 High Static Pressure Duct Type IDU
Air back return
capacity ranging from 5.6 to 14.0 kW.
F
H
E
C Drain pipe Gas pipe Liquid pipe
Air down return D

A
I
Drain pipe Electric box

B
32
Item 1.2 Installation and maintenance space for air duct type unit
A B C D E F G H I J
Model 1.2.1 Low Static Pressure Duct Type VELD***N432U
series and Concealed Duct Type VESD***N432U
VEHD019N432U 1101 517 820 1159 1271 558 1002 160 235 268
series
VEHD021N432U 1101 517 820 1159 1271 558 1002 160 235 268
VEHD024N432U 1101 517 820 1159 1271 558 1002 160 235 268
VEHD027N432U 1101 517 820 1159 1271 558 1002 160 235 268
VEHD031N432U 1011 748 820 1115 1229 775 979 160 231 290
Flange
VEHD034N432U 1011 748 820 1115 1229 775 979 160 231 290
VEHD038N432U 1011 748 820 1115 1229 775 979 160 231 290 Spring
cushion
VEHD043N432U 1011 748 820 1115 1229 775 979 160 231 290 of nut
INSTALLATION
VEHD048N432U 1011 748 820 1115 1229 775 979 160 231 290

capacity ranging from 22.4 to 28.0kW.
C E 1.2.2 High Static Pressure Duct Type GMV-ND—PHS/A-T
series
F
Air Return
D
＞2500mm
＞250mm ＞250mm
A
Item
A B C D E F
Model
VEGD076N432U 1353 632 992 1150 192 327
1.3 Air duct installation
VEGD095N432U 1563 706 992 1350 192 402
(1). Rectangular air duct installation
1.1.3 Concealed Duct Type IDU
C D
Ceiling
Air return Air supply

B
E
F
A
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Air-duct-type
Name Hanger rod Air return duct Return air intake Supply Air duct Air outlet
IDU
Item
A B C D E F
Model The proceeding figure shows the installation of air return duct.
VESD007N432U~VESD012N432U 760 415 710 200 450 475 In practice, the down return mode can also be implemented.
The installation method is similar to that of back return mode.
VESD013N432U~VESD021N432U 1060 415 1010 200 450 475
The air duct is rectangular, connecting to the air intake of the
VESD024N432U 1360 415 1310 200 450 475 IDU. At least one air outlet must keep opening.
33
Air supply and return ducts are connected with canvas • Connect the air return duct to the air return grille of the
(insulation type canvas). If static pressure and low noise are IDU by using rivets. The other side of the air return duct
required, a plenum chamber should be connected between the is connected to the return air intake. Prepare a section of
outlet and air supply duct. The dimensions of air intake of the canvas air duct for flexible adjustment of height. Use 8#
plenum chamber are consistent with that of the air outlet. The iron wire to strengthen the canvas air duct and make the
plenum chamber and air outlet are connected with canvas. air duct folded.
Back return air configuration is adopted. Spaces should be Use the back air return configuration or air down return method
reserved within the ceiling air-duct-type IDU for installing the based on the installation and maintenance spaces. The
air return duct. Larger dimensions of a return air intake with a installation of air return duct is shown in the following figure.
slower wind speed are better.
(2). Round air duct installation
INSTALLATION
3 4 5 6 7
No. Name No. Name
Return air intake
1 4 Indoor unit
(with filter screen)
2 Canvas air duct 5 Air duct
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 Air return duct 6 Maintenance grille
Air Return Air-duct-type Transient
Name Hanger rod Air duct Air outlet
return duct air intake IDU air duct
Note:
1. Since the down air return configuration will generate
Note: larger noise than the air back return method, the air down
1. The maximum length of air duct refers to the sum of the total return method is usually not recommended.
length of the air duct at the farthest air outlet and the total 2. The air down return method is typically applicable for
length of the air return duct at the farthest return air intake. small installation places.
2. For the unit with auxiliary electric heating, if the round 3. High static pressure series units do not support the air
air duct is going to be connected, the linear length of the down return method.
transient air duct should be at least 200 mm.
1.5 Installation of fresh air intake duct
• Installation procedure of round air duct:
• To connect the fresh air intake duct, remove a part of the
1). Preset the round air outlet on the transient air duct and fresh air board, as shown in the following figure (left). If
fix the round air outlet with tapping screws. the fresh air intake is not required, keep the cover block.
2). Cover the transient air duct on the air outlet of unit, and • Install the round flange to which the fresh air duct will be
connecting them with rivets. connected, as shown in the following figure (right).
3). Cover the air duct on the round air outlet and fasten the • The air duct and round flange must be tightly sealed and
connection. Until now, the round air duct is successfully can provide well insulation functions.
connected to the unit. Other steps are not described here.
• Fresh air refers to the filtered air.
1.4 Installation of air return duct
• A unit adopts the back return air configuration before it is
delivered from the factory. The air return cover is located
at the unit bottom, as shown in the following figure.
• To implement back air return, switch positions of the
square flange and the air return cover.
Square flange Remove
Round air duct
Fresh air cover
Remove
Note:
Back air return
1. Insulation layers must be wrapped over the air duct and
air return duct to prevent heat leakage or condensation.
2. The air duct and air return duct must be supported by iron
supports and fixed onto the precast slab. Air duct joints
must be tightly sealed with glue to prevent air leakage.
Down air return
3. The design and construction of air duct must comply with
Air return cover relevant national engineering standards.
34
4. The edge of air return duct must be at least 150 mm away 3. 1-way Cassette Type IDU
from the wall. A filter must be installed on the return air Dimensions and requirement for installation and maintenance
intake. spaces
5. Noise reduction and shock absorber must be considered • Spare space
during air duct design and construction.
2. 4-way Cassette Type IDU Floor
Dimensions and requirement for installation and maintenance
>20
spaces
178
141
Wall
Wall
D (Distance between lifting screws)
23
Refrigerant
pipes
INSTALLATION
ı1500 ı1500
A (Decoration panel)
B (Ceiling aperture)
C (Indoor units)
ı1800
Unit:mm
Lifting screw
Ground
D (Distance between lifting screws)

• Distance between screws
C (Indoor units) 1200 (Decoration panel)
B (Ceiling aperture) 1115 (Ceiling aperture)
A (Decoration panel) 1027 (Distance between lifting screws)
987 (Main part)
Floor
261 (Distance between lifting screws)
456 (Decoration panel)
415 (Ceiling aperture)
˚20
385 (Main part)

H
Wall
Wall
ı1500
ı1500
Unit:mm
ı1800
Unit:mm
Ground
Model A B C D E G H
VE4C009N432U
VE4C012N432U
950 890 840 680 780 65 210
VE4C015N432U
VE4C017N432U
VE4C019N432U
VE4C021N432U
950 890 840 680 780 65 260
VE4C024N432U
VE4C027N432U
VE4C030N432U
VE4C034N432U
VE4C038N432U 950 890 840 680 780 65 340
VE4C042N432U
VE4C048N432U
VE4C055N432U 1040 975 910 787 840 65 315
35
4. Floor Ceiling Type IDU 5. Wall Mounted Type IDU

4.1 Dimensions 5.1 Dimensions
W D
H
A B
INSTALLATION
Model W H D
D
VEHW007N432P
843 275 180
VEHW009N432P
VEHW012N432P
VEHW015N432P 940 298 200
C
VEHW017N432P
VEHW019N432P
Model A B C D H VEHW021N432P 1008 221 319
VEHW024N432P
VEUM009N432U
VEUM012N432U 1220 225 1158 280 700
VEUM017N432U
5.2 Installation and maintenance spaces
VEUM024N432U Floor Floor
1420 245 1354 280 700
VEUM030N432U
>150
VEUM038N432U
>150 >150
VEUM042N432U 1700 245 1634 280 700 >3000
Wall
VEUM048N432U
4.2 Installation and maintenance spaces

>2500
Floor type
＞1500
Ground Ground
＞600 ＞600
＞1000 V. Position Selection for Manhole and Return Air Intake
During the place selection for unit, the locating of manhole is also
important except for the reserve of sufficient spaces for
＞300
maintenance. Improper position selection of manhole can bring

Ceiling type Unit: mm about difficulties for future maintenance.
The manhole should be the size of an adult’s shoulder, with not
＞200
＞600 ＞600
＞1500 ＞300 less than 450 mm x 450 mm. For air-duct-type all-blast IDU, the
manhole is usually located at the side of the unit electric box, and
the distance between the manhole and the electric box ranges
＞2300
from 50 mm to 100 mm. The place of the manhole should also be

convenient for the maintenance of pipes. For ceiling cassette type
IDU, the place for pipes installation and maintenance is the
primary consideration. Therefore, keep the distance between one
side of the manhole to the connecting tube between 200 and 250
mm. The diagram is as follows.
36
Ceiling
Refrigerant pipes
A
Air outlet
Return air intake

Indoor
ᅸ‫ݙ‬ᴎ unit ಲ
Manhole 亢
D
Distance: 50 to 100 mm ষ
INSTALLATION
Electric box
Return air intake
Air outlet
Indoor unit
Part 4 Requirements on Foundation Installation

I. ODU Foundation
The concrete foundation of the ODU must be strong enough.
Ensure that the drainage is smooth and that the ground
drainage or floor drainage is not affected.
Requirements on the concrete foundation are as follows:
For air-duct-type all-blast IDU, the place of return air intake
also needs to be considered. The return air intake is mainly (1). The concrete foundation must be flat and have enough
used for the air return of unit, as well as the maintenance of rigidity and strength to undertake the unit’s weight during
fan motor and filter screen of the IDU. Therefore, except for running. The height of the foundation is 200 mm to 300 mm,
the proceeding air return design requirements, the place of which is determined based on the size of the unit.
return air intake must support convenient replacing of motor (2). The proportion of the cement, sand, and stone for the
and filter screen. concrete is 1:2:4. Place 10 reinforced steel bars (φ10 mm)
(1). The return air intake of unit should be far away from a with a space between of 30 mm.
door, bathroom, or kitchen; otherwise, it could generate (3). Use the mortar to flatten the surface of the foundation.
condensation and bad odors. Sharp edges must be chamfered.
(2). The length of return air intake must be equal to or larger (4). When the foundation is built on a concrete floor, crushed
than 2/3 of the unit’s return air intake. stones are not required. But the foundation surface must be
(3). If the return air intake is located at the right rear of the unit, roughened.
the distance between the return air intake and the unit (5). Clear the oil stains, crushed stones, dirt, and water in the
cannot be larger than 300 mm. reserved bolt hole of the foundation and install a temporary
The width of return air intake cannot be less than 200 mm. cover before installing bolts.
(4). In the case when the return air intake serves also as the (6). Build a drainage ditch around the foundation to discharge
manhole for electric box, a maintenance place should also the condensing water.
be reserved on the side of the electric box based on the (7). If the air conditioner is installed on the roof, check the
proceeding principles. Meanwhile, make sure that the air intensity of the building and take waterproof measures.
return location has the minimum clearance to replace the
fan motor and air filter. On the premise that the return air (8). If a u-steel foundation is adopted, the structure must be
intake meets the air quantity design requirement, enlarge designed with sufficient rigidity and strength.
the circulation area to 1.5 to 2 times of the original based Anchor bolt with a nominal
on actual status. The diagram is as follows. diameter of 12 mm Drain tank: 100 mm×20 mm
Minimum width: 100 mm Proportion of the cement, sand,
and stone for the concrete is 1:2:4.
200 mm~300 mm
PP
This distance is determined based on the actual size of the unit.
Cement foundation diagram
37
II. ODU Fixing

Fix the ODU to the foundation with four M12 bolts securely to reduce vibration and noise.
III. Vibration Reduction for ODU
The ODU must be fixed securely. Apply a thick rubber sheet or corrugated damping rubber pad with thickness of 200 mm or more
and width of 100 mm or more between the ODU and the foundation, as shown in the following figures.
ıPP ıPP
INSTALLATION
ıPP ıPP
Part 5 Piping Connection

I. Schematic Diagram of Piping Connection
Module Module Module Module

No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 Manifold between
outdoor units
Gas pipe
Liquid pipe
Oil balance pipe
Connection pipe between outdoor
Outdoor manifold and the first indoor manifold
connection pipes
Connection pipe between indoor
Connection pipes between manifold and indoor units
outdoor manifolds
Indoor unit 1
Manifold between
indoor units Connection pipe between
indoor manifolds
manifold and indoor units
Indoor unit 2
Connection pipe between

indoor manifolds

manifold and indoor units
Indoor unit 3
Connection pipe between

indoor manifolds
38
II. Schematic Diagram of Piping Sequence

VEP075N432K and VEP096N432K VEP120N432K, VEP132N432K and VEP150N432K
Liquid pipe Gas pipe
Oil checking valve
Oil checking valve
INSTALLATION
Low pressure Low pressure
check valve
check valve
Oil balance pipe
Oil balance pipe
III. Allowable pipe length and drop height among indoor and outdoor units
Y type branch joint is adopted to connect indoor and outdoor units. Connecting method is shown in the figure below.
Remark: Equivalent length of one Y-type manifold is about 0.5m.
L10: Length from the first branch to the farthest IDU;

L11: Length from the first branch to the nearest IDU;
Outdoor unit Equivalent length of branch of IDU is 0.5m
Height difference between indoor unit and outdoor unit: H
L1
L2 L3 L4 L5
L11
a b c d e
The 1st
branch section
Indoor unit
30m
L6 between outdoor unit and the farthest indoor unit

Height difference
L10
L7 L8 L9
f g h i j
Indoor unit
39
Allowable Outdoor Model Gas pipe size(mm) Liquid pipe size(mm)

R410A Refrigerant System Fitting Pipe
Value
VEP075N432K No need to enlarge pipe size No need to enlarge pipe size
Total length (actual length) of fitting pipe 1000 L1+L2+L3+L4+…+L9+a+b+…+i+j
VEP096N432K No need to enlarge pipe size Φ12.7
Length of Actual length 165 VEP120N432K Φ28.6 Φ15.9
farthest fitting L1+L6+L7+L8+L9+j
pipe(m) Equivalent length 190 VEP132N432K Φ31.8 Φ15.9
VEP150N432K Φ31.8 Φ15.9

Difference between the pipe length
from the first branch of IDU to the VEP171N432K Φ34.9 Φ19.05
farthest IDU and the pipe length 40 L10-L11 VEP192N432K Φ34.9 Φ19.05
from the first branch of IDU to the
nearest IDU VEP216N432K Φ34.9 Φ19.05
INSTALLATION

Equivalent length from the first branch
40 L6+L7+L8+L9+j
to the furthest piping (1) VEP246N432K Φ38.1 Φ22.2
VEP270N432K Φ38.1 Φ22.2

Height Outdoor unit
90 ——
difference at upper VEP282N432K Φ38.1 Φ22.2
between
outdoor unit Outdoor unit VEP300N432K Φ38.1 Φ22.2
90 ——
and indoor unit at lower VEP324N432K Φ41.3 Φ22.2
Height difference between VEP342N432K Φ44.5 Φ22.2
30 ——
indoor units (m)
VEP366N432K Φ44.5 Φ22.2
Maximum length of Main pipe(2) 90 L1
VEP378N432K Φ44.5 Φ22.2
From IDU to its nearest branch (3) 10 a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,i,j VEP396N432K Φ44.5 Φ22.2
VEP420N432K Φ44.5 Φ22.2

Note:
VEP432N432K Φ44.5 Φ22.2
1. Normally, the pipe length from the first branch of IDU to the
VEP450N432K Φ44.5 Φ22.2
farthest IDU is 40m. Under the following conditions, the
length can reach 90m. VEP474N432K No need to enlarge pipe size Φ25.4
a. Actual length of pipe in total: L1+L2x2+L3x2+L4x2+… VEP492N432K No need to enlarge pipe size Φ25.4
+L9x2+a+b+…+i+j≤1000m; VEP516N432K No need to enlarge pipe size Φ25.4
b. Length between each IDU and its nearest branch a, b, c, VEP528N432K No need to enlarge pipe size Φ25.4
d, e, f, g, h, i, j≤40m;
c. Difference between the pipe length from the first branch
of IDU to the farthest IDU and the pipe length from the VEP570N432K No need to enlarge pipe size Φ25.4
first branch of IDU to the nearest IDU: L10-L11≤40m. VEP582N432K No need to enlarge pipe size Φ25.4
2. When the maximum length of the main pipe from ODU to VEP600N432K No need to enlarge pipe size Φ25.4
the first branch of IDU is≥90m, then adjust the pipe size of
the gas pipe and liquid pipe of main pipe according to the 3. If the length between an IDU and its nearest branch is above
following table. 10m, then double the size of the liquid pipe of IDU (only for
the pipe size that is≤6.35mm).
40
IV. Connection Pipe among Outdoor Modules V. Fitting pipe between Outdoor Unit and the First
Manifold
Outdoor
(1). For single module system, pipe size (between outdoor unit
unit and the first manifold)is determined by that of outdoor unit.
Outdoor Outdoor
unit unit Outdoor unit
H＞0m
h There should be no height
drop among outdoor units.
The 1st
INSTALLATION
branch section
ıP
Outdoor
unit
Fitting pipe between outdoor unit
and the first indoor manifold
Outdoor Outdoor
unit unit Pipe size of basic outdoor module is shown as follows:
H=0m
Pipe between ODU and the first branch of IDU
B Basic Module
Gas Pipe(mm) Liquid Pipe(mm)
ı0.25m
VEP075N432K Φ19.05 Φ9.52
İ2m
VEP096N432K Φ22.2 Φ9.52
A
VEP120N432K Φ25.4 Φ12.7
Note: When the distance between outdoor units exceeds 2m,
VEP132N432K Φ25.4 Φ12.7
U-type oil trap should be added at low-pressure gas pipe.
A+B ≤ 10m. VEP150N432K Φ28.6 Φ12.7
Pipe connection among ODUs must meet the following
requirements: (2). For multi-module unit, select appropriate manifold
connected to oudoor module as per the pipe size of basic
module. Pipe size of basic outdoor module is shown as
follows:
Module pipe connector
Piping between modules

Piping between modules is at the same Outdoor unit1 Outdoor unit2 Outdoor unit3
level with the module pipe connector. Piping between modules is under the module
pipe connector and inclines upwards with an
angle of 0 to 25 degree.
Piping between modules is under the module
Fitting pipe between module

and outdoor manifold
Outdoor manifold
Pipe between module and branch of ODU

Basic Module
Piping between modules is above the VEP075N432K Φ19.05 Φ9.52
module pipe connector.
VEP096N432K Φ22.2 Φ9.52
VEP120N432K Φ25.4 Φ12.7
VEP132N432K Φ25.4 Φ12.7
VEP150N432K Φ28.6 Φ12.7
Piping between modules is above the Select the branch of outdoor module
d l i t Module’s capacity (C) Model
Select the branch of outdoor

504≤C VEBC05
module
41
(3). Fitting pipe between two manifolds from basic modules For multiple modules, the piping from ODU to the first branch
of IDU is based on the total rated capacity of outdoor modules.
Pipe size (between two manifolds from basic modules)is
based on the total capacity of upstream modules.
Outdoor unit1 Outdoor unit2 Outdoor unit3
The 1st
branch section

and the first indoor manifold
INSTALLATION
Fitting pipe between outdoor manifolds
Total rated capacity of outdoor Pipe between ODU and the first branch of IDU
Pipe size between manifolds modules (multi-modular
Total capacity of upstream
system) Gas Pipe(mm) Liquid Pipe(mm)
modules Q(kW)
VEP171N432K Φ28.6 Φ15.9
22.4 Q Φ19.05 Φ9.52
VEP192N432K Ф28.6 Ф15.9
28.0 Q 22.4 Φ22.2 Φ9.52
VEP216N432K Ф28.6 Ф15.9
40.0 Q 28.0 Φ25.4 Φ12.7
VEP228N432K Ф28.6 Ф15.9
45.0 Q 40.0 Φ28.6 Φ12.7
VEP246N432K Ф31.8 Ф19.05
68.0 Q 45.0 Φ28.6 Φ15.9
VEP270N432K Ф31.8 Ф19.05
96.0 Q 68.0 Φ31.8 Φ19.05
VEP282N432K Ф31.8 Ф19.05
135.0 Q 96.0 Φ38.1 Φ19.05
VEP300N432K Ф31.8 Ф19.05
Q 135.0 Φ44.5 Φ22.2
VEP324N432K Ф31.8 Ф19.05
(4). Fitting pipe between the first manifold from indoor unit and
VEP342N432K Ф38.1 Ф19.05
the end manifold from outdoor unit
Single module unit VEP366N432K Ф38.1 Ф19.05
VEP378N432K Ф38.1 Ф19.05
VEP396N432K Ф38.1 Ф19.05

Outdoor unit
VEP420N432K Ф38.1 Ф19.05
VEP432N432K Ф38.1 Ф19.05
VEP450N432K Ф38.1 Ф19.05
VEP474N432K Ф44.5 Ф22.2

The 1st
VEP492N432K Ф44.5 Ф22.2
branch section
VEP516N432K Ф44.5 Ф22.2
VEP528N432K Ф44.5 Ф22.2

and the first indoor manifold VEP546N432K Ф44.5 Ф22.2
VEP570N432K Ф44.5 Ф22.2

Pipe between ODU and the first branch of IDU
Basic Module(single module) VEP582N432K Ф44.5 Ф22.2
VEP600N432K Ф44.5 Ф22.2
VEP075N432K Φ19.05 Φ9.52
VEP096N432K Φ22.2 Φ9.52
VEP120N432K Φ25.4 Φ12.7
VEP132N432K Φ25.4 Φ12.7
VEP150N432K Φ28.6 Φ12.7
42
(5). Manifold at indoor unit side (7). Fitting pipe between indoor unit and manifold
Manifold at indoor unit side can be selected as per total Manifold should be matched with fitting pipe of indoor unit.
capacity of downstream indoor unit(s). Refer to the following
table.
Indoor manifold
Indoor manifold
Fitting pipe between indoor manifold and indoor units
INSTALLATION
Total capacity of downstream Pipe between indoor branch and IDU
Rated capacity of indoor unit
R410A Refrigerant System Model
indoor unit(s) C (kW) C(kW)
C 20.0 VEBC01A C 2.8 Φ9.52 Φ6.35
20.0 C 30.0 VEBC01B 2.8 C 5.0 Φ12.7 Φ6.35
Y-type Manifold 30.0 C 70.0 VEBC02A 5.0 C 14.0 Φ15.9 Φ9.52
70.0 C 135.0 VEBC03A 14.0 C 16.0 Φ19.05 Φ9.52
135.0 C VEBC04A 16.0 C 28.0 Φ22.2 Φ9.52
(6). Fitting pipe between manifolds

Pipe size (between two manifolds at indoor unit side) is based
on the total capacity of upstream indoor unit(s).
Fitting pipe between

indoor manifolds
Size of Pipes between Manifolds at IDU Side

Total Rated Capacity X of
Downstream Indoor units (kW)
Gas Pipe (mm) Liquid Pipe (mm)
X ≤ 5.6 Φ12.7 Φ6.35

5.6 < X ≤ 14.2 Φ15.9 Φ9.52
14.2 < X ≤ 22.4 Φ19.05 Φ9.52
22.4 < X ≤ 28.0 Φ22.2 Φ9.52
28.0 < X ≤ 40.0 Φ25.4 Φ12.7
40.0 < X ≤ 45.0 Φ28.6 Φ12.7
45.0 < X ≤ 68.0 Φ28.6 Φ15.9
68.0 < X ≤ 96.0 Φ31.8 Φ19.05
96.0 < X ≤ 135.0 Φ38.1 Φ19.05
135.0 < X Φ44.5 Φ22.2
43
Part 6 Pipe Installation and Insulation 2. Processing to Refrigerant Pipes

I. Pipe Installation for the Cooling System 2.1 Cut-off and Burring
1. Precautions on Pipe Direction Design Use a special-purpose pipe cutter to cut copper pipes instead
Refrigerant pipe layout must be designed in accordance with of using a hacksaw.
the following principles: Cut the pipes gently to ensure that the copper pipe does not
(1). The air conditioning installation should not damage the deform.
bearing structure or the decorative style. Air conditioning After cutting the pipes, use a sandpaper or steel wool to soften
pipes should be laid out along the bottom of beam as the edge of the pipe with the pipe opening inclined downwards
possible. If pipes meet one another at the same elevation, so that the metal burrs do not fall into the pipe.
process based on the following principles:
Allowable deviation: Skewness of the cross section cannot
Drain pipes require the highest priority. Air ducts and exceed 1% of the copper pipe gauge.
pressure pipes should leave room for gravity drain pipes.
INSTALLATION
If the copper pipe is not used immediately after cut-off, cover it

Air ducts and small pipes should leave room for any other with a sealing cap or adhesive tape.
major pipes.
2.2 Pipe Cleaning
(2). The refrigerant pipe layout must be optimal in actual
Cleaning with a piece of silk cloth: Wrap a thin steel wire with
engineering with minimum pipe length and bends. In this
a piece of clean silk cloth. Crumple the cloth into a lump with
way, the performance of the unit can be maximized.
diameter larger than the pipe calibre. Apply several drops of
(3). The refrigerant pipe cannot affect air discharge and chlorylene to the cloth. Push the cloth in from one end of the
return of internal units. The minimum distance between the pipe and pull out from the other end. Every time the cloth is
refrigerant pipe with an insulation layer and the air return pulled out, remove the dust and sundries with chlorylene.
box is 300 mm. If the air return or manhole is at the right Wash repeatedly until the pipe is clean. This method applies to
lower part of the unit, the minimum distance is 150 mm. straight pipes.
When the refrigerant pipe needs to be laid at the air outlet
Cleaning with nitrogen: Blow off all dust and sundries in the
side, avoid laying the pipe at the front of the air outlet. The
pipe with nitrogen. This method applies to coils.
refrigerant pipe cannot connect to any part of the unit except
the joint points. If the preceding principles are not followed, After cleaning, cover the both ends of the pipe with a sealing
performance of the unit will be affected and running noises cap or adhesive tape.
will be increased. 2.3 Pipe Bending
The distance cannot be • Processing methods:
less than 300 mm. Manual bending: applies to thin copper pipes (Φ6.35 mm to
Φ12.7 mm)
Mechanical bending: applicable range (Φ6.35mm to
Φ54.1mm)
Refrigerant pipe or other pipes
• Requirements:
Air outlet Return air intake The radius of the bending pipe must exceed 3.5D. The ratio
of the short diameter after bending to the original diameter
must exceed 2/3.
• Precautions:
During bending, there must be no corrugation or
Indoor unit deformation inside the pipe.
The welding point of the pipe should not be at the bending
part. The distance between the nozzle welding joint and the
bending part should be less than 100 mm.
2.4 Pipe Expanding
Pipe expanding is used to provide a welding point for pipe
connection. Requirements on pipe expanding are as follows:
(1). All burrs and some other waste inside the pipe must be
cleared after cut-off.
(4). The refrigerant pipe must be laid away from the manhole
of the unit so that sufficient space can be reserved for (2). Before pipe expanding, apply appropriate amount of
maintenance. lubricant on the surface of the pipe. (The lubricant must
meet the refrigerant system’s requirements.)
(5). The riser should be installed in the air conditioning tube
well, and the horizontal pipe should be placed in the ceiling, (3). Pipe expanding length must be in accordance with the
if possible. insertion depth of the caliber.
44
(4). To avoid leakage due to straight lines at the expanding (4). Operation Sequence
point, turn round the copper pipe and then make corrections.
Drawing of Installing
(5). During pipe expanding avoid any unnecessary force that built-in metal Making ink lines built-in metal
could cause crack the pipe. fittings fittings
2.5 Flaring
If possible, make ink lines on the ground and project them to
Another mode of pipe connection is flare opening connection, the top of the building.
which requires pipe flaring before connection. Before pipe
flaring, apply appropriate amount of lubricant on the surface (5). Installing Built-in Metal Fittings
of the opening to ensure smooth pass of flaring nuts and Select built-in metal fittings in accordance with local
avoid pipe distortion. (The lubricant must meet the refrigerant regulations.
system’s requirements.) The concentricity must be ensured
after pipe flaring. The sealing face must be intact without any (6). Installing Expansion Bolts
INSTALLATION
burr, crack, or wrinkle. Use expansion bolts when built-in metal fittings are
• Requirements on pipe flaring are as follows: unavailable due to design change.
(1). End faces of the copper pipe are smooth. (7). Installing Expansion Bolts
(2). Burrs and turnups inside the pipe opening must be cleared. If the foot pedal is 2 m or more from the ground, there must
be three points of support.
(3). Install flaring nuts in the pipe before pipe flaring.
The foot pedal must be tightened securely with the ladder.
(4). The flared opening must be concentric with the main pipe.
No eccentricity is allowed. Do not perform operations on the top of the ladder.
(5). Put the pipe into the root of the pipe expander. 3.3 Shaping and Fixing of Pipes
Longitudinal cracks cannot be generated. When installing refrigerant pipes, ensure that the directions
and branches are correct with minimum length. Use minimum
3. Installation of Refrigerant Pipes number of braze welding junctions and elbows. Alignment and
3.1 Operation Sequence insulation after installation cannot affect the pipe location and
elevation. There shall not be flat bending or corrugation on the
The sequence for installing the refrigerant pipe is as follows: pipe after piping.
- Preparing and installing the support, hanger and bracket Use angle steel support, bracket, round steel hanger, U-type
- Piping according to the drawing pipe clip, or flat steel to fix pipes outside the insulation layer.
- Cleaning the pipe It is better that the insulation materials be not compressed to
- Processing the pipe ensure good insulation.
- Adding an insulation sleeve
- Connecting the pipe The style and workmanship of supports, hangers, and brackets
- Fixing the pipe must follow the standard T616 HVAC Systems Design
- Blowing contaminants in the pipe system Handbook.
- Performing a air-tightness test The minimum distance between supports, hangers, and
- Performing insulation brackets is listed in the table below:
3.2 Construction of Built-in Metal Fittings
(1). Construction of supports, hangers, and brackets for pipes: External Diameter of the Pipe (mm) ф≤16 40>ф≥19.05 ф≥40
These parts must be fixed securely in reasonable type and
style without any tilt. The surface is clean without any dirt. Distance between Horizontal Pipes (mm) 1000 1500 2000
The parts embedded into the wall or floor cannot be painted
or coated and must be free from grease stains. Distance between Vertical Pipes (mm) 1500 2000 2500
(2). Construction of fixing bolts for devices: Ensure sufficient

rigidity for the devices. Take anticorrosive measures for The pipe led through a wall or beam must be fixed by a
exposed part of built-in fittings. If the foundation must be support, hanger, or bracket on both ends at the position 300
waterproof, takes waterproof measures. mm away from the hole.
(3). Construction of steel casings: Equip a steel casing for all 3.4 Pipe Connection
pipes which are led through the wall or floor. Pipe welding
3.4.1 Flaring Connection
joints cannot be placed inside the sleeve. The steel casing
must be parallel with the bottom of the wall or floor but be The refrigerant pipes and IDUs are connected by using the
20 mm or more above the bottom. The diameter of the steel flare opening. Therefore, the quality of flaring connection must
casing must be determined based on the thickness of the be ensured. The flaring depth of the bell mouth cannot be
insulation layer and the inclination degree of the condensing smaller than the caliber. The flaring direction must face towards
water pipe. Fill the gap between the pipe and the sleeve the direction of medium flow. Use two torque wrenches to
with flexible and non-flammable materials. The sleeve fasten the connection.
cannot be used as a support point of the pipe.
45
3.4.2 Socket Welding 3.6 Requirements on Manifold Installation

The gap between socket components should be proper to Manifolds are used to divert refrigerant. Requirements on
ensure that the connection will not loose from the friction manifold installation are as follows:
surface. The flaring direction of the socket component must
A. Ensure that the manifold is close to the IDU to reduce
face towards the direction of medium flow. During pipe
impact on refrigerant assignment by IDU branches.
connect, protect the braze welding part according the
length specifi ed below: B. The manifold must be that specified by the manufacture and
match with the devices.
B C. Ensure that the manifold model is correct.
D. Manifolds can be laid in the following ways:
D1. Horizontal installation: The three ports must be on the
same level. The shaping size and assembly angle cannot be
D
A
INSTALLATION
changed.
D2. Vertical installation: The direction can be upwards or
downwards. Three ports must be on the same elevation
A: External Diameter B: Minimum Insertion D-A: Gap between without inclination.
of the Pipe (mm) Depth (mm) Pipes (mm)
ф6.35 6
ф9.52 0.05-0.21
7
ф12.7
ф15.8 8
ф19.05 0.05-0.27
ф22.2 10 B
ф25.4
A
Within ±7.5°
Within ±15°
ф28.6,
12 0.05-0.30
ф31.8
ф38.1
19 0.15-0.35
ф44.5
ф54.1 24 0.15-0.35
Diagram for direction A Diagram for direction B

3.4.3 Bell Socket Welding
The bell socket welding is another form of socket welding. D3. The length of a straight pipe between two manifolds cannot
It uses the sleeve or pipe in a larger size for welding. The be less than 500 mm.
insertion depth cannot be smaller than that required by socket D4. The length of a straight pipe before the main pipe port of
welding. the manifold cannot be less than 500 mm.
3.4.4 Flange Connection D5. The length of a straight pipe between the branch of the
The pipes with large gauge and the devices are always manifold and the IDU cannot be less than 500 mm.
connected by using a flange, which must be clean and intact.
Before installation, apply lubricant on the surface of the flange.
Two flanges must be symmetrical. Fasten with screws at the
diagonal direction to avoid inclination. ı500mm
3.5 Welding Protection
Aerate with nitrogen before and during welding and keep ı500mm
aerating for 30 s after the welding is finished.
Equip a pressure regulator valve to the nitrogen cylinder.
The nitrogen flow is above 4-6 L/min (pressure of 0.02 to 0.05 ı500mm ı500mm
Mpa/3 to 5 psig) and must be regulated based on the pipe
gauge.
46
E. Fixing of manifolds. 3.7 Pipe Cleaning by Nitrogen

There must be three fixing point for both horizontal and Before connecting the flare opening of the pipe to the IDU,
vertical installation of the Y-type manifold. connect the pressure regulator valve on the nitrogen cylinder
Fixing point 1: 100 mm on the main intake manifold from to the liquid pipe in the outdoor pipe system. Regulate the
the welding point nitrogen pressure to about 5 kgf/cm² (70 psig) and blow
nitrogen into the pipe for 1 minute. Repeat this operation for
Fixing point 2: 200 mm on the main branched pipe from the three times till the dirt and water are discharged. After cleaning
welding point the liquid pipe, perform the same operation to clean the gas
Fixing point 3: 250 mm on the branched pipe from the pipe.
Leave the pipe
welding poin disconnected from the
Leave the pipe indoor unit temporarily.
250mm disconnected from the
indoor unit temporarily.
Fixing point 3
INSTALLATION
Indoor unit
hanger rod Fixing point 1
Indoor unit
Fixing point 2 hanger rod
hanger rod Welding point 3
100mm Gas pipe Nitrogen
Welding point 2
Liquid pipe
Welding point 1 Perform an air-tightness test and a vacuum test to the entire
200mm
refrigerant pipe system after the construction is finished.
Branches of a manifold must be laid parallel and cannot be There must be a secure distance between pipes. Pipes in
wrapped in superimposed mode. different types must be fixed separately.
F. The liquid pipe and gas pipe must have the same length and 3.8 Regard for Refrigerant Pipe Installation
be laid in the same route. During refrigerant pipe installation, ensure a distance above
G. The Y-type manifold has an attached pipe used to adjust 500 mm between the pipe and the electric box of the unit for
the diameter of different pipes. If the pipe size on site does maintenance. In a case when the space is not enough, the final
not match the size of the manifold junction, use the pipe piping way must be determined by the technical personnel.
cutter to cut at the middle of the pipe and remove burrs. The distance cannot be
Then insert the copper pipe to proper depth. A concave bag less than 500 mm. Ceiling
for positioning is available to the manifold purchased from
Lennox.
Air pipe indoor unit

Manhole
Cut off from middle

Gas pipe
Copper pipe Branch of the manifold
Liquid pipe
Use a special-purpose pipe cutter to cut it off.
H. Because the manifold structure is complex, perform with

care to ensure tight insulation.
47
II. Pipe Installation for the Condensing Water
System 3. Other Requirements
1. Pipes (1). Ensure an inclination degree of more than 1% when
connecting the drain pipe to the IDU.
Generally, U-PVC water supply pipes bonded with special glue
are adopted as condensiug water pipes. PP-R, PP-C, and hot (mm)
galvanized steel pipes can also be adopted. Aluminium plastic
compound pipes cannot be used. 1000-1500mm
2. Requirements on Installation
Inclination degree
(1). Determine the direction and elevation of a condensing of more than 1/100
water pipe before installing it. Avoid overlapping it with other
Correct connection Incorrect connection
pipes to ensure straight inclination. The clamp of the pipe
hanger is fixed outside the insulation layer. The height of the (2). When connecting the drain pipe to that of the IDU, fix the
clamp can be adjusted. pipes with the bands provided upon delivery instead of using
INSTALLATION
(2). Distance between Hangers the glue to facilitate further maintenance.

(3). When connecting the drain pipe branches to the main pipe,
External Diameter of
Φ≤25 32>Φ≥25 Φ≥32 lead through from the above part of the main pipe.
the Pipe (mm)
Distance between Horizontal (4). If the air volume of the IDUs is high and outdoor air
800 1000 1500
Pipes (mm) resorption may be caused by negative suction pressure,
Distance between Vertical provide a u-type drain trap at the water outlet side of each
1500 2000 IDU, as shown in the following figure.
Pipes (mm)
There are at least two hangers for each vertical pipe.

(3). The inclination degree of the condensing water pipe must
Indoor unit
be above 1% and that of the main pipe cannot be lower than
0.3%. No steep slopes allowed.
H
(4). When connecting three-way pipes, the two-way straight
pipes must be laid on the same slope, as shown in the
following figures.
H/2
• Install drain trap connectors as shown in the following figure.
Incorrect connection Correct connection • Install a drain trap connector for each unit.
(5). The condensing water pipe cannot be tied with the • The drain trap connector shall be installed in a way that
refrigerant pipe. facilitates trap cleaning.
(6). A ventilation hole must be provided on the top of the drain Connector
pipe to ensure smoother discharge of condensing water. Indoor unitI ndoor unit
(7). After pipes are connected, perform a test with some water
and another test with full water in the pipe to check whether
drainage is smooth and whether water leakage exists in the Connector
pipe system.
(8). Equip a steel casing for all pipes which are led through the
wall or floor. Pipe bonding joints cannot be placed inside the
sleeve. The steel casing must be parallel with the bottom
(5). During condensing water pipe installation, ensure a
of the floor or wall. There must be a height drop of 20 mm
distance above 500 mm between the pipe and the electric
from the ground when the pipe is lead through the floor. The
box of the unit for maintenance. In a case when the space is
sleeve cannot affect the inclination degree of the pipe. Fill
not enough, the final piping way must be determined by the
the gap between the pipe and the sleeve with flexible and
technical personnel.
non-flammable materials. The sleeve cannot be used as a
support point of the pipe.
(9). Bond the insulation material joints with special glue and
then wrap them with plastic adhesive tape. The width of the
adhesive tape must be 5 cm or more to prevent dewing.
48
4. Requirements on Installation of Drain Pipes for Different 4.2 Drain Pipe Installation for IDU
Types of IDUs (1). Use pipe clips instead of applying glue to connect the
4.1 Drain Pipe Installation for Hidden Air-duct-type IDU for Air hoses provided upon delivery and plastic pipes on the
Supply device. Connect the other end of the joint to the elbow. The
height from the suction intake of the discharge pump is
(1). Ensure an inclination degree of greater than 1% when
about 200 to 500 mm. Ensure a proper inclination degree
connecting the drain pipe to the IDU.
while connecting to the main drain pipe.
(2). When connecting the drain pipe to that of the IDU, fix the
(2). The lifting pipe for drainage must be provided as shown in
pipes with the bands instead of using the glue to facilitate
the following figure.
further maintenance.
(3). There is a condensing water outlet on both sides of the Roof
IDU. After one condensing water outlet is determined,
Hanger bracket
use the rubber stopper to block the other outlet. Tie it 1-1.5m
INSTALLATION
with threads and strap with insulation materials to prevent Within 300 mm
leakage.
Drain hose (accessory)
(4). The connection between the drain pipe and that of the IDU
Less than 1000 mm

is shown in the following figure. Raising pipe for
drainage
Bands PVC pipe for the unit
CeilingC gClip (accessory)
(3). The drain pump shall be fixed securely. Otherwise,

abnormal noises will be generated.
5. Requirements on Independent Drainage for each IDU
Drain hose Requirements on independent drainage design for each IDU

Drain pipe for the unit are as follows:
(1). There must be a proper inclination for the drain pipe.
(5). Apply insulation materials to the condensing water pipe
joints to prevent dewing. d. Insulation for connection (2). The drain pipe must be installed to facilitate drainage to the
between the drain pipe and that of the IDU is shown in the largest extent and be as short as possible.
following figure. (3). If the water is discharged to the outdoor side, it cannot
Insulation layer for the drop to the outdoor ground directly.
condensing water pipe 6. Requirements on Centralized Drainage for IDUs
(1). When there are multiple IDUs in the same building,
centralized drainage is adopted.
(2). When a header pipe is used, the drain pipe of each IDU
must be higher than the header pipe.
(3). The diameter of the header pipe must be determined on
the number and capacity of IDUs.
(4). When installing pipe, start from the highest point of
the pipe and follow the specifi ed inclination to
smoothly discharge condensing water.
(5). Connect branches to the main pipe from the upper part or
Pipe cover
side instead of lower part of the main pipe.
(6). Insulate all condensing water pipes, especially for joints at
elbows.
49
III. Insulation System 2. Insulation for the Condensing Water Pipe System
1. Insulation for the Refrigerant Pipe System (1). Insulation Materials
1.1 Insulation Materials Use closed-cell foam insulation materials with retardant
Use closed-cell foam insulation materials with flame retardant grade of B1.
grade of B1. The heat conductivity is not greater than 0.035 W/m.°K
The heat conductivity is not greater than 0.035 W/m.°K when when the average temperature is 0°C.
the average temperature is 0°C. (2). Thickness of the Insulation Layer
1.2 Thickness of the Insulation Layer Thickness of the insulation layer for the condensing water
pipe must be greater than 10 mm.
External Diameter of
the Pipe (mm)
≤ 12.7 ≥ 15.88 (3). Bond the insulation material joints with special glue and
then wrap them with plastic adhesive. The width of the
INSTALLATION
Thickness of the Insulation

Layer (mm)
≥ 15 ≥ 20 adhesive must be greater than 5 cm to prevent dewing.
(4). Insulation is not required for the outdoor part of
Use extreme ambient temperature conditions, and non-cracking condensing water pipes.
insulation materials for outdoor pipes. 3. Insulation for Air Ducts
1.3 Procedure of Insulation (1). Insulation for air duct components and devices must be
(1). Select insulation materials based on design requirements. performed after the air leakage test is performed or after
quality check.
(2). Wear the insulation sleeve before connecting refrigerant
pipes. Users cannot cut the insulation material apart and (2). Use centrifugal glass wool or rubber and plastic materials
then wrap up with ties after connecting the pipes by welding. for insulation or use novel insulation air ducts.
(3). Specifications of the insulation sleeve must match with that (3). The insulation layer should be flat and tight without any
of the refrigerant pipes. crack or gap.
(4). Reserve a distance of about 200 mm near the welding (4). Thickness of the Insulation Layer
point to protect the insulation sleeve during welding. After For the air supply and return ducts laid in a room without
performing the air-tightness test, perform insulation to an air conditioner, thickness of the rubber and plastic
the welding point separately to ensure continuity of the insulation layer is 35 mm.
insulation sleeve.
For the air supply and return ducts laid in an air
(5). The insulation layer cannot crack during construction. conditioning room, thickness of the rubber and plastic
Bond the insulation material joints with special glue and insulation layer is 20 mm.
then wrap them with electrical adhesive tape. The width of
the adhesive tape must be 50 mm or more to ensure secure (5). Supports, hangers, and brackets of the air duct must
connection. be installed outside the insulation layer. A chock must be
provided between the support, hanger, or brackets and the
(6). Use glue to bond the insulation material at the water outlet air duct.
to the unit to prevent dewing.
(7). Wrap joints of indoor/outdoor units with insulation
materials. There must be no gap between the joint and the
wall of the indoor/outdoor unit, as shown in the following
figure.
No gap
50
Part 7 Electric and Controller Installation

I. Precautions
Both the power cable and communication cable must be connected properly. If the power cable
is connected to the communication port, the main board will be burnt.
The power cable and communication cable can be identified in the following ways:
Method 1: Use sheaths in different colors.
L N
D1 D2 H1 H2
INSTALLATION
Grounding screw
L N
1. Reliable grounding is required.

2. The screw for fixing the conducting wire must
be tightened. It must be replaced if slipped screw
head exists. Indoor/outdoor unit Wired controller
Warning
3. The external conducting wire must be fixed by

a clip. Otherwise,personal injury or fire may communication D1 D2 H1 H2
occur.
Color label for the

communication cable
Color label for the

power cable
Power cable Indoor/outdoor Communication cable

communication cable of the wired controller
Method 2: Use different types of cables.
The diameter of the power cable is larger than that of the communication cable. Alternatively,
adopt three cores or more for the power cable and two cores for the communication cable.
L N
D1 D2 H1 H2
Grounding
screw L N

1. Reliable grounding is required.

2. The screw for fixing the conducting wire must
be tightened. It must be replaced if slipped screw
head exists.
Warning
3. The external conducting wire must be fixed by Indoor/outdoor unit Wired controller
a clip. Otherwise,personal injury or fire may
occur. communication D1 D2 H1 H2
Power cable (three-core) Indoor/outdoor Communication

(The yellow green cable communication cable of the
is the ground cable.) cable (two-core) wired controller
(two-core)
Elaborate the method with qualified technicians on site no matter which method is adopted.
51
II. Installation of the Power Cable

1. Precautions
(1). The air conditioning unit is category 1 electrical appliance which requires reliable grounding.
(2). The grounding resistance must meet the requirement of Local Requirements.
(3). The yellow green cable inside the air conditioning unit is a grounding cable. It cannot be used for other purposes otherwise it
must be cut. Do not fix it with tapping screws. Otherwise, an electric shock may be caused.
(4). A reliable ground terminal must be provided for the power. Do not connect the grounding cable to any of the following:
1). Water pipes
2). Gas pipes
3). Drainage pipe
INSTALLATION
4). Other places deemed as unreliable

(5). The power cable and the communication cable must be laid separately with a distance of greater than 20 cm. Otherwise, the
communication of the unit will be affected.
2. Requirements on Power Cable Configuration
Configure a circuit breaker to each unit for short circuit and overload protection. In addition, configure a general circuit breaker to
both the indoor and ODUs to switch ON or switch OFF the general power of the IDU or ODU.
(1). External Connection for Individual Units
Note:The maximum number of connected IDUs (n) is determined based on the capacity of the ODU. For details, see the
description on unit capacity configuration.
52
(2). External Connection for Modularly Connected Units
INSTALLATION
Note:The maximum number of connected ODUs (N) and that of connected IDUs (n) are determined based on the combination
form of ODUs. For details, see the description on unit capacity configuration.
53
3. Procedure for Installing the Power Cable

(1). Remove the plates used for threading the external power cable, fit the threading rubber ring to the hole, and thread the power
cable through the hole. Connect L1, L2, L3, and N of the power cable, and the grounding cable to L1, L2, L3, and N on the
power terminal block and the grounding screw next to the terminal block respectively.
L1 L2 L3 1L 2L 3N L1 L2 L3
Inner-unit connection cableI nner-unit connection cableI nner-unit connection cable
Terminal block Terminal block Terminal block

Connector of the Connector of the Connector of the
grounding cable grounding cable grounding cable
( ( (
INSTALLATION
Fixing mode of Fixing mode of Fixing mode of

tablet compressing reverse u-type Exposed straight insertion
conducting wire
Externally connecte Externally connecte Externally connecte
power cable power cable power cable
(2). Fasten and fix the power cable with ties (support heads).
(3). Lay the power cable and communication cable for the ODU according to the following figures.
Note: Provide a threading rubber ring when threading a strong power cable or a communication cable.
54
III. Installation of the Communication System

The CAN communication network is adopted for Lennox VRF system. Manual DIP or identification on polarities of the
communication power is not required for the IDU. Only the function DIP needs to be set for the ODU. For details, see the
description on function setting of the ODU.
Module 3 (slave unit) Module 2 (slave unit) Module 1 (master unit)
Main board AP1 Main board AP1 Main board AP1
INSTALLATION
Communication Interface of Interface of Communication interface Communication Interface of Interface of Communication interface Communication Interface of Interface of Communication interface
interface of VFD emergency power network (CA N1) of ODU/IDU interface of VFD emergency power network (CA N1) of ODU/IDU interface of VFD emergency power network (CA N1) of ODU/IDU
signal switch signal CN1 signal switch signal CN1 signal switch signal CN1
CN9 CN9 CN9
CN44 CN45 CN2 CN44 CN45 CN2 CN44 CN45 CN2
CN10 A CN10 A CN10 A
CN3 CN3 CN3
CN11 B CN11 B CN11 B
A A A
B XT3 XT2 B XT3 XT2 B XT3 XT2
F1 F2 P1 P2 D1 D2 G1 G2 F1 F2 P1 P2 D1 D2 G1 G2 F1 F2 P1 P2 D1 D2 G1 G2
Communication Communication Communication
interface interface interface
CN301¡¢CN302 CN301¡¢CN302 CN301¡¢CN302
Inverter compressor Inverter compressor Inverter compressor

drive board AP3 drive board AP3 drive board AP3
A A A
B CN301 XT1 B CN301 L1 L2 L3 XT1 B CN301 L1 L2 L3 XT1
L1 L2 L3
CN302 CN302 CN302
Communication Communication Communication
interface Power supply E interface Power supply E interface Power supply E
Inverter fan drive Inverter fan drive Inverter fan drive

board AP4 board AP4 board AP4
Communication among basic modules Communication among basic modules

Communication between
ODU and IDU
IDU main board
Communication among IDUs Communication
2 2
IDU interface CN12
D1 D2 H1 H2
X T2
D1 D2 H1 H2
Prev. IDU Communication

IDU NO.N,(80max) matched resistance
IDU NO.1 IDU NO.2
Main board
Wired controller Communication
interface
H1 H2
IDU main board IDU main board
Communication Communication Wired controller
IDU interface
D1 D2
CN12
H1 H2
IDU interface
D1 D2
CN12
H1 H2
X T2 X T2
D1 D2 H1 H2 D1 D2 H1 H2
Connect with the

last slave module
Next IDU Prev. IDU Next IDU
1. Connection of Communication Cable Terminals

All connections for communication of Lennox Series VRF are fastened by screws.
Connection screw Terminal Board
55
2. Connection of Communication Cables

The communication bus of indoor and ODUs must be connected in series instead of in star mode. The last IDU of the bus shall
be connected to a matching resistor (placed in the package of the ODU).
INSTALLATION
Figure 4 Communication cable connection for IDUs and ODUs
56
3. Communication Cable Connection Method and Procedure

(1). Communication cable connection between the IDUs and ODUs
The communication cable between the IDUs and ODUs is connected via interface D1/D2 on the terminal block XT2. Connection
modes for the single-module system and multi-module system are shown in the following figures.
ODU
ON
1 2
SA8
D1 D2 G1G2
INSTALLATION
MODBUS
Communication within IDUs GATEWAY
2 2
MODBUS
MODBUS or
or BACnet
Ă BACnet
gateway gateway
(connected
when centralized
The gateway is
control is required)
available when
IDU NO.1 IDU NO.2 IDU NO.n,(80max) central controlling
is required.
Wired controller
IDU D1 D2 H1 H2 IDU D1 D2 H1 H2
X T2
X T2 D1 D2 H1 H2
D1 D2 H1 H2
Connect with the

outdoor module Prev. IDU
Note:
Next IDU Communication
matched resistance
1. If there are multiple
modules for the modular
Figure 5 Communication cable connection for the single-module system
ODU, the master unit must
ODU 3 (slave unit) ODU 2 (slave unit) ODU 1 (master unit) be the first ODU module on
the communication cable
ON ON
and cannot be connected
to the IDU. (The master
ON
1 2 1 2 1 2
SA8 SA8 SA8

unit is set by SA8 on the
main board of the ODU.)
2. If there are multiple
D1 D2 G1G2 D1 D2 G1G2 D1 D2 G1G2
modules for the modular
ODU, the IDU must be
connected to the slave
module of the last ODU.
(The slave unit is set by
Communication within IDUs
MODBUS
GATEWAY
SA8 on the main board of
2 2
the ODU.)
MODBUS
MODBUS or BACnet
or
3. The communication cable
Ă BACnet
gateway gateway
(connected
and power cable must be
when centralized
The gateway is
control is required)
laid separately to avoid
available when
IDU NO.1 IDU NO.2 IDU NO.n,(80max) central controlling interference.
is required. 4. The communication cable
must be long enough to
Wired controller avoid joints.
IDU D1 D2 H1 H2 IDU D1 D2 H1 H2
5. Indoor units must be

X T2
X T2
D1 D2 H1 H2
D1 D2 H1 H2
connected in series.
Connect with the
last slave Prev. IDU
The last IDU shall be
module Next IDU Communication
matched resistance connected to a matching
resistor (placed in the
Figure 6 Communication cable connection for the multi-module system package of the ODU).
57
(2). Communication cable connection between the IDU and wired controller
Connection modes for the communication cable between the IDU and wired controller are shown in the following figures.
ODU ODU
INSTALLATION
D1 D2
D1 D2
H1 H2
D1 D2
D1 D2 H1 H2
IDU
IDU
Figure 7.1 One wired controller Figure 7.2 Two wired controllers
controlling one IDU controlling one IDU
ODU
D1 D2
IDU1 IDU2 IDU16

H1 H2 H1 H2 D1 D2 H1 H2
D1 D2 D1 D2
Figure 7.3 One wired controller controlling multiple IDUs
58
ODU
D1 D2
INSTALLATION
IDU1 IDU2 IDU16
H1 H2 H1 H2 D1 D2 H1 H2
D1 D2 D1 D2
Figure 7.4 Two wired controllers controlling multiple IDUs
When two wired controllers control multiple IDUs, the wired

controllers can be connected to any IDU which is in the
same series. Set of the two wired controller to the secondary
wired controller. The number of IDUs controlled by the wired
controller cannot exceed 16. All connected IDUs must be in the
same network.
The secondary wired controller can be set in start-up or
shutdown mode.
1. Press the “FUNCTION” button for 5 seconds on the wired
controller to be set as the secondary wired controller. The
temperature area displays “C00”. Continue to press the
“FUNCTION” button for 5 seconds, the parameter setting
interface is displayed and the temperature area displays
“P00”.
2. Select code P13 by pressing “ ” or “ ”. Press the “MODE”
button to switch to parameter value setting. When the
parameter value flickers, select code 02 by pressing “ ” Note:
or “ ”. Then press the “ENTER/CANCEL” button to finish 1. All wired controllers are set to primary wired controllers
setting. upon delivery.
3. Users can press the “ENTER/CANCEL” button to return to 2. In parameter setting status, Fan, Timer, Sleep, and Swing
the previous level till parameter setting exits. buttons are unavailable. Press the “ON/OFF” button to
The parameter setting list is shown below: return to the home page without executing the action of
power-on or power-off.
Parameter Parameter Parameter Default
Remark
3. In parameter setting status, the remote controller signal is
Code Name Range Value unavailable.
When two wired controllers control
one or multiple IDUs, the addresses
Wired 01: primary
of the controllers must be different.
controller wired controller
P13 01 The secondary wired controller
address 02: Secondary
(address: 02) does not support unit
setting wired controller
parameter setting except setting
of its address.
59
(3). Connection between the air duct type IDU and receiver 4. Installation and Disassembly of the Wired Controller (See
board the Manual)
When the air duct type IDU needs to be connected to the 4.1 VEWCL1B Wired Controller
remote-control receiver board, connect via Dsp1 and Dsp2 on Basic parameters and components of the wired controller
the main board of the IDU.
Corresponding
Remote-control
IDU Type Connection Type Main Board Interface
Receiver Board
of the IDU
Dsp1 (interconnecting with

Inter-board connection the 8-core interface)
Air duct type VERDV2C
112
(17 cores) Dsp 2 (interconnecting with
the 9-core interface)
INSTALLATION
112 22
Note:
40
1. The wired controller and the remote-control receiver board
can be used at the same time.
82.5
2. When selecting the remote-control receiver board, select a
3 .3
remote controller.
R
6-R2
.7 3 5
22
42.5 Unit:mm
1 2 3
No. 1 2 3
Panel of wired Soleplate of wired

Name Screw M4*25
controller controller
Q'ty 1 3 1
60
Installation of the wired controller
1 2 3 4
INSTALLATION
H2 H1
H2 H1
H2 H1
7 6 5
8 9 10
Disassembly of the wired controller
H2 H1
H2 H1
1 2 3 4
61
4.2 Wired Controller

Basic parameters and components of the wired controller

5

INSTALLATION

Size of the wired controller

Components of the wired controller
SN 1 2 3 4
Connecting
Base plate of Wired controller
Name box installed in Screw M4X25
the wired controller panel
the wall (86 box)
Quantity Provided by users 1 2 1
62
Installation of the wired controller
12
ON
1 2
ON
1 2 3 4
INSTALLATION
7 6 5
8 9
Installation diagram of the wired controller
Notes: connect the door control card interface to interfaces N and L or

interfaces VCC and GND of the terminal block. Note:
1. The wired controller must be installed by professional
personnel. The power must be switched off during Interfaces N and L are door control power interfaces with 100-
installation. 240 V-50/60 Hz.
2. Pull out the two-core twisted-pair communication cable Interfaces VCC and GND are door control power interfaces
connected to the IDU from the installation hole in the wall with DC 5-24 V.
and connect it to H1 and H2 of the terminal block and screw Users can select only one from 100-240 V and DC 5-24 V.
it on.
4. After cable connection is finished, cling the base plate of the
3. Precautions for the door control system wired controller to the wall and use the screw M4X25 to fix
If the wired controller is not connected to the door control the base plate to the installation hole in the wall.
system, set the switch “1” of the DIP S1 on the base plate to 5. Insert the inter-board connection cable of the base plate to
the digit. the needle file CN1 of the wired controller panel. Then place
To connect the wired controller to the door control system, the panel and base plate together.
set the switch “1” of the DIP S1 on the base plate to “ON” and
Disassembly of the wired controller

63
Part 8: Refrigerant System Evacuation (6). Before performing the air leak test to the refrigerant pipes,
Evacuating the refrigerant system include cleaning and do not conduct insulation or wrapping at the welding or
dehydrating the pipes, performing an air leak test, and flaring opening joints of the IDU. The pressure must be
charging refrigerant. increased simultaneously for pipes on outdoor sides and
cannot be increased for pipes on one side.
I. Air Leak Test
1. Importance of the Air Leak Test
Indoor unit
Air leak test of the multi-module air conditioning system mainly
refers to the tightness of the refrigerant pipes, which ensures Indoor unit Pressurize the
gas pipe and
Nitrogen
secure and reliable running of the air conditioner. liquid pipe at
Gas pipe the same time.
Refrigerant leakage may affect functions of the air conditions
or even damage the compressor and make the system to Liquid pipe
break down. Therefore, an air leak test must be performed. If
INSTALLATION
refrigerant leakage is detected after the system is installed, it Note: Before performing the air leak test, do not conduct
is very difficult to locate the leaking point as the suspending insulation or wrapping at the welding joints.
ceiling has been decorated. Therefore, the air leak test must
II. Refrigerant System Evacuation
be performed before ceiling sealing for indoor decoration is
finished. 1. Requirements on the Vacuum Pump
2. Procedure for Performing the Air leak Test The vacuum pump for different refrigerant systems cannot be
the same. The ultimate vacuum degree of the vacuum pump
Access valves (Schrader valves) of the gas and liquid pipes of should reach 750 microns (0.0295 mm Hg/0.1Kpa abs).
the ODU are shut-off at the time of delivery of the equipment.
The air discharge capacity of the vacuum pump must be
Before test, apply a small amount of required lubricant on the greater than 4 L/S (8.5 cfm).
block nut and pipe terminals and use two wrenches to fi x the
block nut. The ODU pipes cannot be connected when the air The precision of the vacuum pump must be greater than 0.02
leak test is being performed. mm Hg.
The test pressure for R410A system is 4.15 MPa (600 psig). The system vacuum pump must be equipped with a check
Use dry nitrogen as media for the air leak test. Increase the valve.
pressure slowly by following the steps below: 2. Procedure and Precautions for Evacuation
Step 1: Increase the pressure to 0.5 MPa (72 psig). Stop for 5 2.1 Procedure
minutes and then perform air leak test. Major leakage may be
detected. (1). Before Evacuation, ensure that the Access valves
(Schrader valves) of the gas and liquid pipes are turned off.
Step 2: Increase the pressure to 1.5 MPa (220 psig). Stop for 5 (2). Use the center port of a manifold gauge to connect the
minutes and then perform air leak test. Minor leakage may be vacuum pump to the service valves of the gas and liquid
detected. pipes.
Step 3: Increase the pressure for R410A system to 4.15 MPa
(600 psig). Stop for 5 minutes and then perform strength check. (3). Evacuate until the vacuum level reaches 750 microns or
Slight leakage or blow holes may be detected.After increasing less. If not, leakage may exist. Perform air leak test
the pressure to the pressure test, keep the pressure for 24 again.
hours and check whether it decreases. If the pressure does not
(4). If the vacuum level cannot be kept after evacuation is
decrease, it meets the requirement.
performed for twice, there may be water in the pipe once it
3. Precautions: is confirmed that no leakage exists. In this case, remove
(1). The measuring range of the test pressure gauge for R410A water by means of vacuum breaking. Pressurize with
system must be above 4.5 MPa (650 psig). nitrogen at 0.05 MPa (7 psig). Evacuate for 2 hours and
keep dehydrating for 1 hour. If the vacuum level of 750
(2). Record the value displayed on the pressure gauge, microns cannot be reached, repeat this operation till water
ambient temperature, and test time. is removed.
(3). Pressure correction: The pressure changes by 0.01 MPa
(1.5 psig) when the temperature changes by 1°C. (5). After reaching 750 microns, turn off the regulator valve and
hold for 4 hours. Ensure that the reading of the vacuum
(4). The pressure meets the requirement if it does not change. meter does not increase. If does, continue the evacuation
(5). If the pressure must be kept for a long time, decrease the process until the vacuum can be hold for 4 hours at 750
pressure to 0.5 MPa (72 psig) or lower. High pressure for microns or less.
a long time may cause leakage at the welding point or
safety hazard.
64
2.2. Precautions: Note:

(1). The gas pipe and liquid pipe must be evacuated at the 1. Rated capacity configuration rate C for IDUs and ODUs =
same time. Sum of rated cooling capacity of IDUs/Sum of rated cooling
capacity of ODUs
High pressure Low pressure 2. If all IDUs are fresh air IDUs in Lennox VRF series, the
gauge gauge quantity of additional refrigerant for each module (B) is 0 kg.
• Examples
(1). Example 1:
The ODU consists of modules VEP096N432N, VEP132N432N,
and VEP150N432N. The IDU consists of 8 pieces of
Liquid pipe
Gas pipe VELD048N432U.
valve
INSTALLATION
valve
Rated capacity configuration rate C for IDUs and ODUs = 140
x 8/(280+400+450) = 108%. The number of IDUs is greater
than 4, according to the above table,
The quantity of additional refrigerant for module
VEP096N432N (B) is 3.5 kg.
Vacuum pump The quantity of additional refrigerant for module
VEP132N432N (B) is 5.0kg.
(2). Turn off the valve before powering off the vacuum pump.
The quantity of additional refrigerant for module
(3). Keep vacuuming for 2 hours. The vacuum meets the VEP150N432N (B) is 5.0kg.
requirement if the pressure displayed by the vacuum gauge
Therefore,
does not increase.
∑ Quantity of additional refrigerant for each module
(4). The units parallel connected to the module and oil-
(B) = 3.5+5.0+5.0 = 13.5 kg
equalizing pipe also need to be vacuumized.
Assume that the quantity of additional refrigerant for the
Part 9: Refrigerant System Charging pipe (A) = ∑ Length of the liquid pipe x Quantity of additional
I. Calculation Method for Charging Additional refrigerant for the liquid pipe per meter = 25 kg
Refrigerant Total quantity of additional refrigerant for the system
Quantity of additional refrigerant for the pipe (R) = Quantity of (R) = 25+13.5 = 38.5 kg
additional refrigerant for the pipe (A) + ∑ Quantity of additional (2). Example 2:
refrigerant for each module (B)
The ODU consists of one VEP150N432N and the IDU
1. Method for calculating the quantity of additional refrigerant consists of one fresh air IDU VEOA150N432M. The quantity of
for the pipe (A): additional refrigerant for this module is 0 kg.
Quantity of additional refrigerant for the pipe (A) = ∑ Length of Therefore,
the liquid pipe x Quantity of additional refrigerant for the liquid
pipe per meter ∑ Quantity of additional refrigerant for each module (B) = 0 kg
Assume that the quantity of additional refrigerant for the
Diameter of the
Φ28.6 Φ25.4 Φ22.2 Φ19.05 Φ15.9 Φ12.7 Φ9.52 Φ6.35 pipe (A) = ∑ Length of the liquid pipe x Quantity of additional
Liquid Pipe refrigerant for the liquid pipe per meter = 5kg
kg/m 0.680 0.520 0.350 0.250 0.170 0.110 0.054 0.022 Total quantity of additional refrigerant for the system
(R) = 5+0= 5 kg
2. Method for calculating ∑ for the quantity of additional
refrigerant for each module (B)
Quantity of Additional Refrigerant

Module Capacity (HP)
for Each Module (B) (kg) (2)
Rated Capacity Configuration Number of

8 10 12 14 16
Rate C for Indoor and ODU (1) Configured IDUs
≤4 0 0 0 0 0
50% ≤ C ≤ 70%
>4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
≤4 0.5 0.5 1 1.5 1.5
70% < C ≤ 90%
>4 1 1 1.5 2 2
≤4 1 1 1.5 2 2
90% < C ≤ 105%
>4 2 2 3 3.5 3.5
≤4 2 2 2.5 3 3
105% < C ≤ 115%
>4 3.5 3.5 4 5 5
≤4 3 3 3.5 4 4
115% < C ≤ 135%
>4 4 4 4.5 5.5 5.5
65
II. Method for Charging Additional Refrigerant Step 7: Close the valves of the high pressure gauge and
Charging additional refrigerant for the VRF System is classified cylinder. Replace the refrigerant tank.
into pre-charging and charging process during running. Step 8: Perform step 3 again if necessary.
1. Pre-charging Refrigerant Step 9: Perform step 5 and step 6 again. Record the weight
Step 1: Take the manifold gauge and connect the high before charging m3 and weight after charging m4.
pressure gauge hose to the liquid pipe valve, the low pressure Step 10:If there is no sufficient refrigerant and the calculated
gauge hose to the gas pipe valve, and the center gauge hose quantity of refrigerant is not fulfilled the system, record the total
to the vacuum pump service valve. Start the vacuum pump to amount of additional refrigerant..
perform evacuation.
m=(m1-m2)+(m3-m4)+…+(mn-1-mn)
Step 2: After evacuation is finished, close the high pressure
Quantity of additional refrigerant to be charged during running
and low pressure valves from the manifold gauge. Disconnect
m`=M-m
the center gauge hose from the vacuum pump and connect it
INSTALLATION
to the refrigerant tank. M is the required total amount of refrigerant.

Step 3: Properly loosen the joint between the center gauge If the pre-charged quantity (m) reaches the required total
hose and the manifold and slightly turn on the valve of the amount for the system, close the valve of the refrigerant tank
refrigerant tank. Evacuate remanent air through the center immediately to finish charging and proceed with step 11.
gauge hose. After that, fasten the joint and turn on the valve of Step 11: Carefully Remove the pressure gauge.
the refrigerant tank completely.
2. Charging Refrigerant During Running
Step 4: If the refrigerant tank is not equipped with a siphon,
turn the refrigerant tank upside down and place it on the Step 1: With the valve of the refrigerant tank closed, reconnect
electronic scale. Then record the current weight (m1). If the the manifold gauge as follows: Disconnect the low pressure
refrigerant tank is equipped with a siphon, record the current gauge hose from the gas pipe valve and connect it to the low
weight (m1) directly. pressure detection valve, as shown in the following figure.
High pressure Low pressure High pressure Low pressure

gauge gauge gauge gauge
Refrigerant Refrigerant Liquid pipe Gas pipe

tank valve valve tank valve valve
Low pressure
detection valve
Electronic scale Electronic scale
High pressure Low pressure Step 2: Open the valves for the liquid and gas pipes of each
gauge gauge module completely. For the modular unit, the oil-equalizing
valve of each module also needs to be opened.
Step 3: Make the system to run in commissioning mode via the
commissioning software or the main board of the ODU. (For
details, see the description on commissioning.)

Step 4: When the commissioning step goes to adding
valve valve refrigerant, open the valve of the refrigerant tank and add the
remaining quantity (m`).
Refrigerant
Siphon
tank Step 5: After all refrigerant is pulled out, close valve of the
refrigerant tank and wait till automatically commissioning is
completed for the system.
Electronic scale
Step 6: Remove the pressure gauge to finish the charging
refrigerant process.
Step 5: Open the valve of the high pressure gauge (while keep
the valve of the low pressure gauge closed) and then charge
refrigerant to the system. Record the change of weight of the
refrigerant tank.
Step 6: When all refrigerant is pulled out of the refrigerant tank,
record the current weight m2.
66
Commissioning Operation
CONTENTS
Part 1 Security Requirements ...............................................................................68
I. Precautions for Construction ..............................................................................68
II. Precautions for the Use of Refrigerants ............................................................68
Part 2 Introduction to Unit Functions ...................................................................68
I. Function Settings of ODUs .................................................................................68
II. System Function Button Operations ..................................................................71
II. Function Application of IDUs .............................................................................80
Part 3 Commissioning Process.............................................................................94
I. Necessity of VRF Engineering Commissioning ..................................................94
COMMISSIONING
II. Required Files and Tools for Engineering Commissioning ................................94
OPERATION
III. Engineering Commissioning Procedures .........................................................95
IV. References for Proper Unit Operation Parameters ........................................108
67
Part 1 Security Requirements
I. Precautions for Construction
(1). All commissioning and maintenance personnel must learn and strictly comply with construction security specifi cations.
Security measures must be taken especially for outdoor operations.
(2). Workers of special types of labor, such as refrigerating engineers, electricians, and welders, must have the corresponding
certifications). No other)worker is allowed to do these type of activities)
(3). The equipment must be powered off before relevant operations, and other security requirements should be strictly complied with.
(4). All installation and maintenance operations must comply with the design of the product, national and local security operation
requirements. Rule-breaking operations are prohibited.
II. Precautions for the Use of Refrigerants

The Lennox Series VRF uses R410A refrigerant. Pay attention to the following points:
(1). The refrigerant R410A has a higher working pressure than R22. The working pressure of the former is 1.6 times than the latter.
(2). The refrigerant R410A uses thicker-walled copper tubes than R22. Adopt copper tubes with appropriate wall thickness.
(3). R410A is an azeotropic mixture. Refrigerant must remain in the form of liquid.
Part 2 Introduction to Unit Functions
I. Function Settings of ODUs
Function application of ODUs consists of function DIP switch settings and function button settings, including special engineering
requirements. System Function DIP Switch Settings
COMMISSIONING
OPERATION
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
SA1 SA2 SA3 SA4 SA5 SA6 SA7 SA8

Compressor
Pressure Setting DIP Switch
Capacity
Master Unit Setting
Reserved DIP Switch
Centralized
Operation DIP Switch
1# Compressor/Module
Emergency Operation
DIP Switch Emergency

Outdoor Fan Static
Fan Emergency
Control Address
DIP Switch
Operation
DIP Switch
DIP Switch
DIP Switch
DIP Switch Name Meaning Factory Settings Remark

SA1_capacity Capacity DIP switch Defines the rated capacity of the unit. Defined based on the model. The factory settings cannot be changed.
The address DIP switch is used only when centralized control is required.
Defines and differentiates addresses of different systems
SA2_Addr-CC Centralized control address DIP switch 00000 Otherwise, the factory settings are used without being changed. The
in the case of centralized control by multiple systems.
address DIP switch is valid only when it is set on the master unit.
2#-6# compressor emergency operation Provides aftersales emergency settings for It is better not to use the emergency function. Replace the compressor
SA3_COMP-E 00000
DIP switch 2#-6# compressors. at the first time when an exception occurs.
1# compressor/module emergency Provides aftersales emergency settings for It is better not to use the emergency function. Replace the compressor
SA4_I/M-E 00
operation DIP switch 1# compressor/module. at the first time when an exception occurs.
It is better not to use the emergency function. Replace relevant parts
SA5_FAN-E Fan emergency operation DIP switch Provides aftersales emergency settings for fans. 00
of the fan at the first time when an exception occurs.
Sets the static pressure of the fan according to the static This DIP switch should be set based on actual engineering conditions,
Outdoor
SA6_ESP_S pressure of the exhaust pipeline connected with the 00 neither over-large nor over-small. It is unnecessary to change
fan static pressure setting DIP switch
engineering unit, to guarantee normal operation of the unit. the factory settings in outdoor scenarios.
SA7 Reserved DIP switch —— 00 ——
A master unit must be set, and only one master unit can be set in each
SA8_MASTER-S Master unit setting DIP switch Defines the master unit. 00 refrigerating system. This DIP switch is mandatory. The default
factory setting is the master unit status.
Note:
1. On the master module, the SA8 DIP switch must be set again, the SA1 DIP switch cannot be further set, and other DIP
switches retain the factory settings without special requirements.
2. Function DIP switches must be set when the ODU is powered off, and then the settings are valid after the ODU is powered on.
68
Meanings and setting methods of function DIP switches are as 3. Compressor Emergency Operation DIP Switch (SA3_
follows: COMP-E)
1. Unit Capacity DIP Switch (SA1_capacity) Corresponding to 2# - 6# compressors, the compressor
emergency operation DIP switch (SA3_COMP-E) is used for
The unit capacity DIP switch (SA1_capacity) has been set
aftersales emergency settings when an exception occurs on a
upon factory departure. It is unnecessary to further set the DIP
compressor. It can shield the operation of the abnormal
switch. In addition, users are not allowed to change the DIP
compressor in a short time and guarantee the emergency
switch settings. Otherwise, the system may work abnormally or
operation of other compressors.
even the compressor may be damaged.
2. Centralized Control Address DIP Switch (SA2_Addr-CC) When it is required to shield the operation of 2# - 6#
compressors upon failure, set the DIP switch according to the
The centralized control address DIP switch (SA2_Addr-CC) following methods:
indicates the centralized control address required when
different refrigerating systems are controlled in a centralized Compressor Emergency Operation DIP Switch (SA3_COMP-E)
manner. The default factory setting is “00000”. Remark
DIP1 DIP2 DIP3 DIP4 DIP5
If it is not required to use centralized control between multiple
Not shielding the operation of
refrigerating systems, this DIP switch can retain the factory 0 0 0 0 0
2# - 6# compressors
settings without being changed.
Shielding the operation of
If it is required to use centralized control between multiple 1 0 0 0 0
2# compressor
refrigerating systems, set the DIP switch according to the
following methods: Shielding the operation of
0 1 0 0 0
3# compressor
(1). The DIP switch must be set on the master unit. Otherwise,
the setting is invalid. 0 0 1 0 0
4# compressor
(2). On the same refrigerating system, the centralized control
address DIP switch (SA2_Addr-CC) on a non-master unit is 0 0 0 1 0
5# compressor
invalid, and it is unnecessary to change the settings.
COMMISSIONING
(3). The centralized control address DIP switch (SA2_Addr-CC) 0 0 0 0 1
6# compressor
OPERATION
on the master unit of a refrigerating system must be set to
“00000”, and this system is the master system.
(4). The centralized control address DIP switch (SA2_Addr-CC)
on the master unit of other refrigerating systems must be set
as follows:
SA2
Address No.
DIP1 DIP2 DIP3 DIP4 DIP5
1 0 0 0 0 2
0 1 0 0 0 3
0 0 1 0 0 4 2# Compressor 1# Compressor
0 0 0 1 0 5
0 0 0 0 1 6
1 0 0 0 1 7
0 1 0 0 1 8
0 0 1 0 1 9
0 0 0 1 1 10 Precautions:
1 0 0 1 1 11 (1). When the DIP switch setting is not covered in the above
0 1 0 1 1 12 scope, a DIP switch setting exception fault may occur.
0 0 1 1 1 13 (2). Only one compressor can be set to emergency mode on a
1 0 1 1 1 14 module.
0 1 1 1 1 15 (3). The compressor emergency operation mode is valid only in
a single-module multi-compressor system.
1 1 1 1 1 16
(4). The default factory setting is “00000”.
5) The centralized control address DIP switch (SA2_Addr-CC) (5). The system cannot continually run for more than 24 hours
cannot be the same between different refrigerating systems. in compressor emergency operation status. Once 24 hours
Otherwise, address conflicts may occur and the unit cannot are exceeded, the entire unit will be forcibly stopped and the
run properly. limited operation code “Ad” is displayed on the IDU.
(6). 1# - 6# compressors are defi ned from right to left facing the
front of the unit.
69
4. 1# Compressor/Module Emergency Operation DIP Switch (1). Fan positions

(SA4_I/M-E)
The 1# compressor/module emergency operation DIP switch
(SA4_I/M-E) is used for aftersales emergency settings when
an exception occurs on the 1# compressor/module. It can
#2 Fan #1 Fan
shield the operation of the abnormal compressor/module in a
short time and guarantee the emergency operation of other
compressors.
When it is required to set the 1# compressor/module to
emergency mode, set the DIP switch as follows:
1# Compressor/Module Emergency Operation DIP Switch (SA4_I/M-E)
DIP1 DIP2 Remark
0 0 Not shielding the operation of 1# compressor/module
1 0 Shielding the operation of 1# compressor
0 1 Shielding the operation of the module
(2). When it is required to set the fan to emergency mode, set

Precautions:
the DIP switch as follows:
(1). When the DIP switch setting is not covered in the above
scope, a DIP switch setting exception fault may occur. Fan Emergency Operation DIP Switch (SA5_FAN-E)
DIP1 DIP2 Remark
(2). Only one compressor can be set to emergency mode on a
0 0 No fan in emergency operation mode
module.
1 0 Shielding the operation of 1# fan
(3). The compressor emergency operation mode is valid only in
COMMISSIONING
0 1 Shielding the operation of 2# fan

a single-module multi-compressor system.
OPERATION
(4). The module emergency operation mode is valid only in a Precautions:

system with more than two modules connected in parallel. 1). When the DIP switch setting is not covered in the above
(5). Only one module can be set to emergency operation mode scope, a DIP switch setting exception fault may occur.
in each system. 2). Only one fan can be set to emergency mode on a module.
(6). The default factory setting is “00”. 3). The default factory setting is “00”.
(7). The system cannot continually run for more than 24 hours 4). The system cannot continually run for more than 120 hours
in compressor emergency operation status. Once 24 hours in fan emergency operation status. Once 120 hours are
are exceeded, the entire unit will be forcibly stopped and the exceeded, the entire unit will be forcibly stopped and the
limited operation code “Ad” is displayed on the IDU. limited operation code “Ad” is displayed on the IDU.
(8). The system cannot continually run for more than 48 hours 6. Outdoor Fan Static Pressure Setting DIP Switch (SA6_
in module emergency operation status. Once 48 hours are ESP_S)
exceeded, the entire unit will be forcibly stopped and the
limited operation code “Ad” is displayed on the IDU. The outdoor fan static pressure setting DIP switch (SA6_
ESP_S) is used in special scenarios such as the unit
(9). 1# - 6# compressors are defined from right to left facing installation equipment room. In scenarios where air ducts are
the front of the unit. required to be connected, zero static pressure (0 Pa), low
static pressure (30 Pa or 0.12" H20), medium static pressure
5. Fan Emergency Operation DIP Switch (SA5_FAN-E)
(50 Pa or 0.2" H20), and high static pressure (82 Pa or 0.33"
The fan emergency operation DIP switch (SA5_FAN-E) is used H20) can be set according to the design of air ducts. The
for aftersales emergency settings when an exception occurs setting methods are as follows:
on a dual-module fan. It can shield the operation of a fan in
a short time and guarantee the emergency operation of the Outdoor Fan Static Pressure Setting DIP Switch (SA6_ESP_S)
system. DIP1 DIP2 Static Pressure Range
0 0 0 Pa
1 0 30 Pa
0 1 50 Pa
1 1 82 Pa
The default factory setting is “00”.

Note that the DIP switch should be independently set on each
module.
70
7. Reserved Function DIP Switch (SA7) II. System Function Button Operations
SA7 is the reserved function DIP switch and meaningless
currently.
8. Master Unit Setting DIP Switch (SA8_MASTER-S) Module c
(Master Module)
The master unit setting DIP switch (SA8_MASTER-S) defines
module management of a system. A master unit must be set,
and only one master unit can be set in each refrigerating
system (in power-off status). The setting methods are as
follows: Module a/Module
b (Sub-module)
Master Unit Setting DIP Switch (SA8_MASTER-S)
DIP1 DIP2 Remark
0 0 Master unit
Note:
1 0 Sub-module
1. System function settings and query must be performed after
Upon factory departure, all modules are in “00” master unit commissioning of the entire unit.
status by default. When multiple modules are connected in 2. System function settings and query can be used no matter
parallel, only one module retains the master unit status and whether the entire unit runs.
other modules are set to sub-module status. When a module is
1. Introduction to Function Buttons
independently used, it uses the factory settings.
The main board AP1 of the ODU consists of eight function
For the basic module set to master unit, the module address is
buttons:
displayed as “01” on the main board.
Precautions:
(1). When the DIP switch setting is not covered in the above
scope, a DIP switch setting exception fault may occur.
COMMISSIONING
OPERATION
(2). A module must be set to master unit status, and only one
module can be set to master unit status in each refrigerating
system. Other modules are set to sub-module status.
Function Button Name and Meaning
(3). Settings must be performed in power-off status.
Button Code Function Meaning
(4). The default factory setting is “00” master unit status. 9.
SW1 UP Indicates the upward selection button.
DIP Switch Example
SW2 DOWN Indicates the downward selection button.
(1). Explanation of DIP switch positions
SW3 FUNCTION Indicates the function button, used for function settings.
On the DIP switch, “ON” indicates “0” status and the
opposite direction indicates “1” status. SW4 CHECK Indicates the query button, used for function query.
The position of white lever indicates the position to be set to. SW5 SKIP Indicates the skip button.
ON Position of White Lever

ON SW6 BACK
Indicates the return button, used to return
to the upper-level menu.
Position of White Lever SW7 CONFIRM Indicates the confirmation button.
SW8 RESET Indicates the reset button, used to restore factory settings.
"0" Status" 1" Status
(2). Example
The following takes master unit settings as an example.
Assume that a system consists of three modules: module a,
module b, and module c. Set module c to master unit and
the other two modules to sub-modules. The settings are as
follows:
71
2. Introduction to Functions
2.1 List of functions
Factory Settings Remark

Function Code Function Name Function Meaning
Code Meaning —
Refrigerant recovery Fully or partially recovers refrigerants in a faulty module or IDU pipeline
1 A2
operation according to the system pressure after automatic startup during maintenance.
—— —— It can only be set.
Unit cooling/heating Sets the unit to cooling/heating, single-cooling, single-heating,

2 A6
function or air supply mode for centralized management.
nA Cooling/Heating function It can be set and queried.
3 A7 Outdoor silent mode Sets different silent modes to meet users' noise requirements. 00 No silent settings It can be set and queried.
Aftersales vacuuming Automatically enables all electronic expansion valves and electromagnetic valves
4 A8 —— —— It can only be set.
mode during maintenance to guarantee vacuum processing in all pipelines.
Automatically decreases the power consumption of the unit according No automatic

5 n0 Conservation control 1
to system operation parameters.
01
conservation settings
It can be set and queried.
Forcible defrosting
n3 Forcibly enables ODU defrosting operation. —— —— It can only be set.
operation
Forcibly decreases No capacity output

n4 Conservation control 2 00 It can be set and queried.
the maximum power consumption of the unit. limitation settings
8 Indoor unit project Prevents IDU project number conflicts when different refrigerating systems are
n5 —— —— It can only be set.
number offset controlled in a centralized manner.
COMMISSIONING
9 n6 Fault query Queries historical fault information of the ODU. —— —— It can only be queried.
OPERATION
10 n7 Parameter query Queries real-time operation parameters of the ODU. —— —— It can only be queried.
Indoor unit project

11 n8 Displays project numberes of all IDUs through ODU operations. —— —— It can only be queried.
number query
Online IDU quantity

12 n9
query
Displays the number of online IDUs. —— —— It can only be queried.
Outdoor unit bar code

nb Queries the entire-unit bar code and controller bar code of ODU. —— —— It can only be queried.
function query
2.2. Description of Functions This function falls into two modes: faulty module refrigerant
recovery and IDU pipeline refrigerant recovery.
(1) A2 Refrigerant recovery operation
This function partially recovers refrigerants in a faulty module
Refrigerant Recovery Refrigerant Recovery
or IDU pipeline during unit maintenance. The refrigerant Mode Code Mode Name
Remark
recovery volume of each basic module is as follows:
This mode is selected when a basic module
Basic module
Model of Basic Module Maximum Refrigerant Recovery Volume (kg) 01 fails and it is required to recover refrigerants
refrigerant recovery
from this basic module.
VEP075N432N 7.5
VEP096N432N 7.5 This mode is selected when an IDU fails
Indoor unit pipeline
02 and it is required to recover refrigerants
VEP120N432N 8.7 refrigerant recovery
from the IDU pipeline.
VEP132N432N
13.5
VEP150N432N
When this function is enabled, the ODU automatically starts
and recovers refrigerants to the ODU or IDU pipeline.
72
(2) A6 Unit cooling/heating function For the forcible silent mode, the system runs in low-noise
This function sets operation modes of the entire unit, including: mode no matter in the daytime or night-time. The forcible silent
mode falls in three categories:
Function Mode of ODU
Operation Mode of IDU Silent Mode Code Noise Degree
Code Name
Mode 10 10 Low-noise mode
Cooling mode, dehumidifying mode, heating mode, Mode 11 11 Low- and medium-noise mode
and air supply mode.
nA Cooling/Heating Mode 12 12 superlow-noise mode
(Note: The heating mode cannot work with other
modes at the same time.) (factory settings)
Note: The system capacity may fall off after the silent mode is
nC Single-cooling Cooling mode, dehumidifying mode, and air supply mode. set. Therefore, try to balance the noise with the capacity in
selecting a silent mode category.
Heating mode and air supply mode.
nH Single-heating (Note: The heating mode cannot work with the air supply The factory setting is “00”.
mode at the same time.) (4) A8 Aftersales vacuuming mode
nF Air supply Air supply mode. This function ensures the vacuum degree of the entire system
during maintenance to prevent operation functions of dead
The user or administrator can set operation modes of the ODU zones. Expansion valves and electromagnetic valves of the
based on actual situations to prevent conflicts. unit will be enabled after this function is set.
When it is required to set different refrigerating systems to the (5) n0 Conservation control 1
same function mode, set the master system according to the
System conservation is set when conservation operations are
above requirements. For the master system settings, see the
required. The default factory setting is capacity priority control
“Centralized Control Address DIP Switch (SA2_Addr-CC)”
mode. The system capacity may fall off after the conservation
section.
mode is set.
(3) A7 Outdoor silent mode
COMMISSIONING
Code Function Name
This function is used when users require lower environment
OPERATION
noises, including night-time automatic silent mode and forcible 01 Conservation control – invalid (factory settings)
silent mode. 02 Conservation control - valid
For the night-time automatic silent mode, the system
automatically judges the highest daytime environment Note: The cooling or heating effect may fall off after the
temperature and then starts silent operations in a certain capacity limitation is set.
interval to guarantee night-time low-noise operations. The (8) n5 Indoor unit project number offset
night-time automatic silent mode falls into nine categories:
This function sets the IDU project number when multiple
refrigerating systems are controlled in a centralized manner (by
Starting the Silent Stopping the
Mode X Hours after the Nighttime Silent Mode using a remote monitor or centralized controller), avoiding the
Silent Mode Code
Daytime Temperature after Continual
Noise Degree same project number between different systems. If the project
Reaches the Highest Operations for Y Hours number is not set, project number conflicts may occur between
systems.
Mode 1 01 6 10
Mode 2 02 6 12
This function only needs to be set on the master system, which
is the system with the centralized control address SA2 DIP
Mode 3 03 8 8
switch being “00000”. For details, see the “Centralized Control
Mode 4 04 8 10 Low-noise mode Address DIP Switch (SA2_Addr-CC)” section.
Mode 5 05 10 8 (9) n6 Fault query
Mode 6 06 10 10 This function queries historical faults of the system. Up to five
Mode 7 07 4 14 historical faults can be memorized in time order.
Low- and medium- (10) n7 Parameter query
Mode 8 08 6 8
noise mode
This function queries operation parameters of each module of
superlow-noise the ODU in real time.
Mode 9 09 12 10
mode
(11) n8 Indoor unit address query
Note: The highest daytime temperature is generally in 13:00- This function queries addresses of all IDUs through one
15:00. operation of the ODU.
(12) n9 Online IDU quantity query.
This function queries the number of online IDUs through the
ODU.
73
3. Function Setting Operations Step 4: Set function parameters.

Step 1: Open the commissioning window of the master unit Setting methods of function parameters are as follows:
panel. (1) A7 Outdoor silent mode settings
Step 2: Power on the entire unit. Step 1: Confirm entering the A7 outdoor silent mode settings.
Step 3: Press “SW3” on the master unit to enter the to-be- The master unit is displayed as follows:
selected status of function settings. By default, the master unit
is displayed as follows: LED1 LED2 LED3
LED1 LED2 LED3 Silent Mode

Function Code Display Mode Display Mode Current Status Display Mode
Code
Current
Function Code Display Mode
Progress
Display Mode Current Status Display Mode
A7 On 00 Blinking OC Blinking
A7 Blinking 00 Blinking 00 Blinking
Step 2: Select a corresponding silent mode by pressing “SW1
Users can select corresponding functions by pressing “SW1 (UP)” or “SW2 (DOWN)”.
(UP)” or “SW2 (DOWN)” on the master unit, including:
LED1 LED2 LED3
LED1 LED2 LED3 Silent Mode
Code
Current
Progress A7 On 00 Blinking OC Blinking
A7 Blinking 00 Blinking 00 Blinking A7 On 01 Blinking OC Blinking
n0 Blinking 01 Blinking 00 Blinking A7 On 05 Blinking OC Blinking
COMMISSIONING

OPERATION

After selecting the functions to be set, press “SW7” to confirm
entering function settings. The master unit is displayed as
follows: A7 On 11 Blinking OC Blinking
LED1 LED2 LED3
Current Step 3: Press “SW7” to confirm selecting the mode. The
Progress master unit is displayed as follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3
A6 On nC Blinking nC Blinking
Silent Mode
A2 On 01 Blinking 00 Blinking Function Code Display Mode
Code
A8 On 00 Blinking OC Blinking A7 On 00 On OC On
n0 On 01 Blinking OC Blinking A7 On 01 On OC On
n3 On 00 Blinking 00 Blinking A7 On 02 On OC On
A7 On 05 On OC On
Then go to step 4 to set corresponding functions.
A7 On 06 On OC On
A7 On 07 On OC On
A7 On 08 On OC On
A7 On 09 On OC On
A7 On 10 On OC On
A7 On 11 On OC On
A7 On 12 On OC On
74
On the master unit, press “SW6” to return to the upper level (3) A2 Refrigerant recovery operation settings
(press “SW6” in setting status to return to the upper level;
Step 1: Confirm entering the A2 refrigerant recovery operation
press “SW6” after settings are completed to restore the normal
settings. The master unit is displayed as follows:
operating status of the unit).
If no button operations are performed on the master unit for LED1 LED2 LED3
five minutes, the function setting automatically quits and the
unit restores the current status. Function Code Display Mode
Refrigerant
Recovery Code
The default factory setting is “00”, that is, no silent mode.
A2 On 01 Blinking 00 Blinking
(2) A6 Unit cooling/heating function settings
Step 1: Confirm entering the A6 unit cooling/heating function Step 2: The default setting is “01”. Select “01” or “02” by
settings. The master unit is displayed as follows: pressing “SW1 (UP)” or “SW2 (DOWN)”. Press “SW7” to
confirm selecting the mode.
LED1 LED2 LED3
On the master unit, press “SW6” to return to the upper level.
ODU Function ODU Function
Mode Code
Display Mode
Mode Code
Display Mode If no button operations are performed on the master unit for
five minutes, the function setting automatically quits and the
A6 On nC Blinking nC Blinking unit restores the current status.
1). Indoor unit refrigerant recovery
Step 2: Select a corresponding cooling/heating function by
pressing “SW1 (UP)” or “SW2 (DOWN)”. Step 3: Select “01” as in step 2 to enter IDU refrigerant
recovery. Digital LEDs and status LEDs of all basic modules
LED1 LED2 LED3 are displayed as follows:
Function Code Display Mode Display Mode Display Mode LED1 LED2 LED3
Mode Code Mode Code
Refrigerant
A6 On nC Blinking nC Blinking
COMMISSIONING
Recovery Code
A6 On nH Blinking nH Blinking
OPERATION
A6 On nA Blinking nA Blinking [Module low-
A2 On 01 On On
pressure Ps]
A6 On nF Blinking nF Blinking
Step 3: Press “SW7” to confirm selecting the mode. The LED3 shows the low-pressure value of a module. If the value is
master unit is displayed as follows: negative, LED3 circularly displays the negative code “nE” and
the numeric value every one second. For example, for -30°C,
LED1 LED2 LED3 LED3 alternately displays “nE” for one second and then “30”
for another second.
Mode Code
Display Mode
Mode Code
Display Mode Step 4: Close liquid-tube access valves of all basic modules of
the ODU. When the low-pressure value displayed on LED3
A6 On nC On nC On continually blinks, quickly close gas-tube access valves of all
A6 On nH On nH On basic modules and then press “SW7” on the master unit to
A6 On nA On nA On confi rm completing refrigerant recovery or power off the entire
unit.
A6 On nF On nF On
If no operations are performed after the low-pressure value
On the master unit, press “SW6” to return to the upper level displayed on LED3 continually blinks for three minutes, the
(press “SW6” in setting status to return to the upper level; entire unit will be forcibly stopped.
press “SW6” after settings are completed to restore the normal On the master unit, press “SW6” to return to the upper level for
operating status of the unit). restoring the standby status of the entire unit (press “SW6” in
If no button operations are performed on the master unit for setting status to return to the upper level; press “SW6” after
five minutes, the function setting automatically quits and the settings are completed to restore the normal operating status
unit restores the current status. of the unit).
The default factory setting is “nA” cooling/heating. Note:Another startup is not allowed within 10 minutes after
refrigerant recovery.
75
2). Basic module refrigerant recovery (5). n0 System conservation operation settings
Step 3: Set the basic module requiring refrigerant recovery to Step 1: Confirm entering the n0 system conservation operation
module emergency operation status and close the liquid-tube settings. The master unit is displayed as follows:
stop valve of the emergency status module. Select “02” as in
step 2 to enter basic module refrigerant recovery. The display LED1 LED2 LED3
is as follows:
Function Code Display Mode Code Display Mode Current Status Display Mode
LED1 LED2 LED3 n0 On 01 Blinking OC Blinking
Current
Progress
Display Mode Current Status Display Mode Step 2: Select a corresponding capacity limitation value by
pressing “SW1 (UP)” or “SW2 (DOWN)”.
Module high-
A2 On 02 On On
pressure LED1 LED2 LED3
LED3 shows the high-pressure value of the module.
n0 On 01 Blinking OC Blinking
Step 4: When the high-pressure value displayed on LED3 n0 On 02 Blinking OC Blinking
continually blinks (displayed as 0°C if the high pressure is less
than 0°C), quickly close the gas-tube stop valve of the
Step 3: Press “SW7” to confirm selecting the mode. The
emergency module and then press “SW7” on the master unit to
master module is displayed as follows:
confi rm completing refrigerant recovery or power off the entire
unit.
LED1 LED2 LED3
If no operations are performed after the high-pressure value
displayed on LED3 continually blinks for three minutes, the
entire unit will be forcibly stopped. n0 On 01 On OC On
On the master unit, press “SW6” to return to the upper level for n0 On 02 On OC On
COMMISSIONING
restoring the standby status of the entire unit (press “SW6” in

setting status to return to the upper level; press “SW6” after If no button operations are performed on the master unit for
OPERATION
settings are completed to restore the normal operating status of five minutes, the function setting automatically quits and the
the unit). unit restores the current status. (Press “SW6” in setting status
to return to the upper level; press “SW6” after settings are
Note: Before the basic module refrigerant recovery operation,
completed to restore the normal operating status of the unit.)
users must close the liquid-tube stop valve of the basic module
requiring refrigerant recovery. (8). n5 Indoor unit project number offset settings
Another startup is not allowed within 10 minutes after refrigerant Step 1: Confirm entering the n5 IDU project number offset
recovery. settings. The master unit is displayed as follows:
(4). A8 evacuation mode settings
LED1 LED2 LED3
Step 1: Confirm entering the A8 evacuation mode settings. The
Current
master unit is displayed as follows: Function Code Display Mode
Progress/Mode
n5 On 00 Blinking 00 Blinking
LED1 LED2 LED3
Current Step 2: Press “SW7” to send the project number offset

Progress command. The master module is displayed as follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3
Enter the to-be-confirmed status of system evacuation Current
mode settings. Function Code Display Mode
Progress/Mode
Step 2: Press “SW7” to confirm entering the to-be-confirmed n5 On 00 On 00 On

status of system evacuation mode settings. All modules are
displayed as follows: After 10 seconds, the system quits this mode and restores the
LED1 LED2 LED3 normal operation mode.
Current Note: This function only needs to be set on the master system,
Progress which is the system with the centralized control address SA2
A8 On 00 On OC On DIP switch being “00000”. For details, see the “Centralized
Control Address DIP Switch (SA2_Addr-CC)” section.
Expansion valves and electromagnetic valves of all outdoor 4. Function Query Operations
and IDUs are opened, and the entire unit cannot be enabled.
Step 1: Open the commissioning window of the master unit
Press “SW6” on the master unit to quit the evacuation panel.
status. Alternatively, the entire unit quits the evacuation
status after 24 hours. Step 2: Power on the entire unit.
76
Step 3: Press “SW4” on the master unit to enter the query Note: The online IDU quantity query function applies to a single
status. refrigerating system only.
Step 4: Select a function to be queried by pressing “SW1 Step 7: If the n6 fault query is selected, the display is as
(UP)” or “SW2 (DOWN)” on the master unit. By default, the A7 follows. Enter the to-be-confirmed status of fault query.
outdoor silent mode is displayed for query.
LED1 LED2 LED3
For example, select the A6 unit cooling/heating function. The
display is as follows: Function Code Display Mode
Current
Progress/Mode
LED1 LED2 LED3 n6 Blinking 00 Blinking 00 Blinking
Function Code Display Mode Display Mode Display Mode
Mode Code Mode Code Press “SW7” on the master unit to confirm fault query.
A6 On nA On nA On Select a fault to be queried by pressing “SW1 (UP)” or “SW2
(DOWN)”. LED3 alternately displays the historical fault code
Step 5: If the n8 IDU address query is selected, the display and module address in an interval of one second in the
is as follows. Enter the to-be-confirmed status of IDU project sequence of fault records. LED2 displays the fault sequence
number query. number. If there not historical faults, LED2 and LED3 display
“00” by default. Up to five historical faults can be queried. The
LED1 LED2 LED3 faults that can be queried are as follows:
Current
Function Code Display Mode Display Mode Current Status Display Mode Code description
Progress/Mode
E1 High-pressure protection
n8 Blinking 00 Blinking 00 Blinking
E3 Low-pressure protection
U4 Lack of refrigerant protection
Press “SW7” and select the IDU project number query on the
master unit. The master unit is displayed as follows. Other E2 Discharge low-temperature protection
modules are displayed in normal status. J9 Over-low pressure ratio protection
COMMISSIONING
J8 Over-high pressure ratio protection
OPERATION
LED1 LED2 LED3 J7 Four-way valve leakage protection

Current
Display Mode Current Status Display Mode E5 High-temperature protection of compressor 1
Progress/Mode
E6 High-temperature protection of compressor 2
n8 On 00 On 00 On J2 Over-current protection of compressor 2
EU Top high-temperature protection of compressor 1
Regardless of the current display status of wired controllers
Eb Top high-temperature protection of compressor 2
or display panels of all IDUs, the current display status is all
switched to the IDU project number. However, it does not PL DC bus line over-low voltage protection for inverter compressor driver
influence the settings and operation status of outdoor and PH DC bus line over-high voltage protection for inverter compressor driver
IDUs. P6 Inverter compressor driver IPM module protection
On the master unit, press “SW6” to return to the upper level. PJ Inverter compressor startup failure
The IDU retains the project number display status. PE Inverter compressor phase lack protection
On the master unit, press and hold “SW6” to quit the address P3 Inverter compressor driver module reset
display status for all IDUs and return to the upper level. P5 Inverter compressor over-current protection
PC Current detection circuit failure of inverter compressor driver
If no quit button operations are performed on the master unit
P9 Inverter compressor out-of-step protection
for 30 minutes, the function setting automatically quits and the
unit restores the current status. C2 Communication failure between the master unit and inverter compressor driver
P8 Over-high temperature protection for inverter compressor driver module
Step 6: If the n8 IDU address query is selected, the display is
P7 Temperature sensor failure of inverter compressor driver module
as follow
PF Charge circuit failure of inverter compressor driver
LED1 LED2 LED3 HL DC bus line over-low voltage protection for inverter outdoor fan driver
Number of IDUs Number of IDUs HH DC bus line over-high voltage protection for inverter outdoor fan driver
Function Display
(Thousands-place Display Mode (Tens-place Display Mode H6 Inverter outdoor fan driver IPM module protection
Code Mode
Hundreds-place) Ones-place)
HJ Inverter outdoor fan startup failure
n9 On 00 On 00 Blinking HE Inverter outdoor fan phase lack protection
H3 Inverter outdoor fan driver module reset
The digital LED2 displays the number of IDUs (thousands-
H5 Inverter outdoor fan over-current protection
place hundreds-place) and the digital LED3 displays the
number of IDUs (tens-place ones place). For example, if the HC Current detection circuit failure of inverter outdoor fan driver
number of IDUs is 75, “0075” is displayed. H9 Inverter outdoor fan out-of-step protection
C3 Communication failure between the master unit and inverter outdoor fan driver
If no button operations are performed on the master unit for
five minutes, the function setting automatically quits and the H8 Over-high temperature protection for inverter outdoor fan driver module
unit restores the current status. H7 Temperature sensor failure of inverter outdoor fan driver module
77
The display is as follows: Parameter Code Parameter Name Unit Remark
01 Outdoor environment temperature °C

LED1 LED2 LED3
02 Operation frequency of compressor 1 Hz
Function Code Display Mode Fault Sequence Display Mode Current Status Display Mode
Displayed 03 Operation frequency of compressor 2 Hz

n6 On 01 On
alternately
04 Operation frequency of outdoor fan Hz
Displayed
n6 On 02 On
alternately
05 Module high-pressure °C
Historical fault/ Displayed
n6 On 03 On
module address alternately 06 Module low-pressure °C
Displayed
n6 On 04 On 07 Discharge temperature of compressor 1 °C
alternately
Displayed 08 Discharge temperature of compressor 2 °C
n6 On 05 On
alternately
This parameter is invalid for the
09 Discharge temperature of compressor 3 °C
VRF series.
“01-05” indicates the fault sequence from the earliest to the
latest. This parameter is invalid for the
VRF series.
If there are less than five historical faults, LED2 and LED3
display “00” indicating there are no more historical faults after This parameter is invalid for the
the last fault is displayed. VRF series.
In fault query status, press and hold “SW7” for five seconds to This parameter is invalid for the
clear all historical faults of the ODU. VRF series.
Step 8: If the n7 parameter query is selected, the display is as This parameter is invalid for the
follows. Enter the to-be-confirmed status of parameter query. VRF series.
14 Current value of compressor 1 A

COMMISSIONING
LED1 LED2 LED3

OPERATION
Current 15 Current value of compressor 2 A

Progress/Mode This parameter is invalid for the
n7 Blinking 00 Blinking 00 Blinking VRF series.

On the master unit, press “SW7” to confirm parameter query VRF series.
and enter the module confirmation status for parameter query.
The display is as follows: 18 Current value of compressor 5 A
VRF series.
LED1 LED2 LED3 This parameter is invalid for the

VRF series.
Module
Address 20 Reserved
21 Module temperature of compressor 1 °C
22 Module temperature of compressor 2 °C
n7 On 04 Blinking 00 Blinking 23 Module temperature of outdoor fan 1 °C
24 Module temperature of outdoor fan 2 °C

Select a module for parameter query by pressing “SW1 (UP)”
or “SW2 (DOWN)” and then press “SW7”. The display is as 25 Outdoor unit heating EXV1 PLS
follows:
26 Outdoor unit heating EXV2 PLS
LED1 LED2 LED3
27 Subcooler EXV PLS
Parameter
Code
Display Mode Current Status Display Mode 28 Defrosting temperature °C
n7 On XX On Parameter value Blinking 29 Liquid-extracting temperature of subcooler °C
30 Outlet temperature of accumulator °C

LED2 displays the parameter code of the module and LED3
displays the parameter value. Parameters are displayed in 31 Oil return temperature °C
GMV5 series.
the following sequence. By default, the outdoor environment
temperature value is displayed. Select a corresponding This parameter is invalid for the
32 Intake-tube temperature of condenser °C
parameter value by pressing “SW1 (UP)” or “SW2 (DOWN)”. GMV5 series.

33 Outlet temperature of condenser °C
GMV5 series.
78
Note: Example:
1. If a parameter value is negative, LED3 circularly displays Entire-unit bar code: N1R0128150066
the negative code “nE” and the numeric value every one Controller bar code: N1M0128150067
second. For example, for -30°C, LED3 alternately displays
“nE” for one second and then “30” for another second. The display sequence is as follows:
2. The discharge temperature and environment temperature LED1 LED2 LED3
are displayed as four-digit values, circularly displaying the
higher two digits and the lower two digits. For example, if Parameter Code Display Mode Parameter Code Display Mode Parameter Code Display Mode
“01” and “15” are alternately displayed, it indicates 115°C. nb On Un Blinking -n Blinking
If “nE”, “00”, and “28” are alternately displayed, it indicates
-28°C.
LED1 LED2 LED3
3. If a parameter is invalid for the unit, “00” is displayed.
Parameter Code Display Mode Parameter Code Display Mode Parameter Code Display Mode
4. If no button operations are performed on the master unit for
five minutes, the function setting automatically quits and the N1 On R0 On 12 On
unit restores the current status.
Step 9: If the nb ODU bar code query is selected, the display is LED1 LED2 LED3
as follows. Enter the to-be-confirmed status of ODU bar code Parameter Code Display Mode Parameter Code Display Mode Parameter Code Display Mode
query.
81 On 50 On 06 On
LED1 LED2 LED3
Current LED1 LED2 LED3

Progress/Mode
nb Blinking 00 Blinking 00 Blinking
6X On/Off XX Off XX Off
Press “SW7” on the master unit to enter the next-level menu
COMMISSIONING
selection. The display is as follows: LED1 LED2 LED3
OPERATION
LED1 LED2 LED3
nb On Pc Blinking -n Blinking
Function Code Display Mode Module Address Display Mode Current Status Display Mode
nb On 01 Blinking 00 Blinking LED1 LED2 LED3

nb On 02 Blinking 00 Blinking
N1 On M0 On 12 On
LED1 LED2 LED3

Select a module for query by pressing "SW1 (▲)" or "SW2
(▼)" and then press "SW7". The display is as follows: Parameter Code Display Mode Parameter Code Display Mode Parameter Code Display Mode
81 On 50 On 06 On
LED1 LED2 LED3
Function Code Display Mode Parameter Code Display Mode Current Status Display Mode
LED1 LED2 LED3
nb On Un/Pc Blinking -n Blinking
Note: Un indicates the entire-unit bar code and Pc indicates 7X On/Off XX Off XX Off
the controller bar code.
After confirming the module, select a bar code sequence by If a parameter is invalid for the unit, “00” is displayed.
pressing "SW1 (▲)" or "SW2 (▼)". The display sequence is as On the master unit, press “SW6” to return to the upper level
follows: if there are two levels of menu. Press “SW4” to quit the query
Entire-unit bar code (bits 1-13) and controller bar code (bits status.
1-13), that is, entire-unit bar code header → entire-unit bar If no button operations are performed on the master unit for
code (bits 1-6) → entire-unit bar code (bits 7-12) → entire-unit five minutes, the function setting automatically quits and the
bar code (bit 13) → controller bar code header → controller bar unit restores the current status.
code (bits 1-6) → controller bar code (bits 7-12) → controller
Step 4: In query status, press “SW4” to quit.
bar code (bit 13). The display is as follows
LED1 LED2 LED3
Code On Code On Code On
79
5. Basic Operations for Engineering Commissioning II. Function Application of IDUs

5.1 Basic Operations Indoor unit functions cover user operation functions and
engineering application functions. For user operation functions,
Basic Operations Operation Method Remark refer to operating instructions of the IDU, wired controller, and
remote controller.
Starting engineering Press and hold "SW7" on the master
—— Engineering application functions include:
commissioning unit for more than five seconds.
SN Function Name
In this mode, the system does not
1 Master IDU query and settings
detect the communication status
Selecting no-wired- Press "SW4" and "SW5" simultaneously
between the IDU and wired controller 2 Indoor unit project number query and settings
controller commissioning in any commissioning progress after the
any more. Commissioning can
mode unit enters the commissioning status. 3 User parameter query
be performed on the IDU without
configuring the wired controller. 4 User parameter settings
5 Engineering parameter query
In engineering commissioning status,
6 Engineering parameter settings
Quitting engineering press and hold "SW7" for more than
——
commissioning five seconds on the master unit to quit
commissioning. Engineering application functions can be operated through
the IDU wired controller (VEWCL1B or VEKCH2B) or remote
This function is valid after step 9. controller (VERCL1B, fittings selectable).
For example, if receiving a pausing Engineering Application Functions Operated through the
In engineering commissioning status,
engineering commissioning signal VEWCL1B Wired Controller
press "SW6" on the master unit to retain
Pausing engineering during the process of "10. Pre-startup
the previous commissioning completion
commissioning ODU valve status judging phase" in Master IDU Settings
phase of the current commissioning
step 11, the system will restore the
phase. The master IDU can be set through the wired controller or
completion phase of "9. Pre-startup
refrigerant judging phase" in step 10.
remote controller. The methods for setting the master IDU
through the wired controller are as follows:
COMMISSIONING
Method 1:
OPERATION
In engineering commissioning pause

Continuing engineering
status, press "SW6" on the master unit —— Step 1: Set an IDU to power-off status.
commissioning
to continue engineering commissioning.
Step 2: Press and hold the “MODE” button on the wired
controller for more than five seconds.
5.2 Restoring Factory Settings
Step 3: Check whether the setting is successful. If it is,
“MASTER” on the wired controller will be on. Otherwise, repeat
Restoring Factory
Setting Method
Prompt for
Remark steps 1 and 2.
Settings Successful Settings
Press and hold

All factory settings of the ODU are
"SW8" on the All LEDs blink for
Restoring setting 1 restored and the unit waits for re-
master unit for more three seconds.
commissioning.
than 10 seconds.
Press and hold Re-commissioning is not required.

"SW3" and "SW8" The number of outdoor and IDUs is
All LEDs blink for
Restoring setting 2 on the master unit memorized. Addresses of outdoor
five seconds.
for more than 10 and IDUs are all cleared. All the other
seconds. function settings are cleared. In power-off statusP ress "MODE" for five seconds
Press and hold Re-commissioning is not required.

"SW5" and "SW8" The number of outdoor and IDUs is
All LEDs blink for
Restoring setting 3 on the master unit memorized. Addresses of outdoor and
seven seconds.
for more than 10 IDUs retain the preceding settings. All
seconds. the other function settings are cleared.
"MASTER" is on when the

master indoor unit is successfully set.
80
Method 2: Project number query of IDUs in the entire communication

network: Press and hold the “FUNCTION” button for five
Step 1: Press and hold the “FUNCTION” button for five
seconds in power-on or power-off status to enter the parameter
seconds in power-on or power-off status to enter the parameter
query interface "C00". Press “▼” to switch to “C18”. Press the
query interface.
“MODE” button to enter query. The timer area of each wired
Step 2: Press and hold the “FUNCTION” button for five controller in the entire network displays the project number of
seconds in "C00" status to enter the parameter setting the corresponding IDU. Synchronously, the double-eight digital
interface. LED of each IDU embedded or connected with an LED panel
Step 3: Press “▲” or “▼” to switch level 2 parameter codes till displays its own project number.
“P10” is displayed on the temperature area. Method for quitting query:
Step 4: Press the “MODE” button to set the parameter to Quit the “C18” query interface.
"01" and then Press the “ENTER” button. If the setting is
Press the “ON/OFF” button on any wired controller in the
successful, "MASTER" on the wired controller will be on.
network.
Master IDU Display
Project number settings of IDU
For IDUs connected with wired controllers, "MASTER" on the
Press and hold the “FUNCTION” button for five seconds in
wired controller connected with the master IDU will be on.
power-on or power-off status to enter the parameter query
For IDUs embedded or connected with LED panels, the interface “C00”. Continuously press the “MODE” button for
operation LED on the LED panel of the master IDU will blink three times, and then press and hold the “FUNCTION” button
three times when the IDU turn on. for five seconds to enter the engineering parameter setting
Note: After the master IDU is successfully set, stick the “ ”
MASTER
interface. The temperature area displays “P00”. Press "▼" to
flag to the wired controller or unit panel for convenience of user switch to “P42”.
operation and engineering maintenance. This flag is placed in Single IDU: Press the “MODE” button. The project number
the package bag of the ODU. blinks in the timer area. Press “▲” or “▼” to adjust the project
Project number Query and Settings number, and then Press the “ENTER” button to confirm and
return to the upper-level menu.
COMMISSIONING
Project number query of a single IDU
One-to-many: Press the “MODE” button to enter the IDU
OPERATION
Press and hold the “FUNCTION” button for five seconds in selection menu. Press “▲” or “▼” to switch IDUs. Press the
power-on or power-off status to enter the parameter query “MODE” button to set the project number of the current IDU in
interface "C00". The timer area of the wired controller displays the same method as above.
the project number of the current IDU. If the current wired
controller works in one-to-many mode, the timer area displays User Parameter Query
the IDU that has the minimum project number. User parameters can be queried in power-on or power-off
Project number of multiple IDUs status.
Project number query of IDUs in one-to-many mode: Press Press and hold the “FUNCTION” button for five seconds to
and hold the “FUNCTION” button for five seconds in power- enter the user parameter query interface. The temperature
on or power-off status to enter the parameter query interface area displays “C00” and “CHECK” is on.
"C00". Press “▼” to switch to “C01”. Press the “MODE” button Select a parameter code by pressing “ ” or “ ”.
to enter query. The timer area displays the project numberes
of IDUs from small to large. Press “▲” or “▼” to switch project Press the “ENTER/CANCEL” button to return to the upper-level
numberes. menu till quitting parameter query.
Note: It is normal if the buzzer of the IDU operated by the

wired controller rings. The purpose of ringing the buzzer is to
facilitate engineering commissioning personnel to locate the
IDU, especially for the IDU without any LED panel because it
cannot display its project number.
81
The user parameter query list is as follows:

Table 2.1 User Parameter Query List
Parameter
Parameter Name Parameter Range View Method
Code
Display mode:
Parameter
C00 - Timer area: displays the project number of the current IDU.
setting ingress
Note: If the current HBS network consists of multiple IDUs, only the IDU that has the minimum project number is displayed.
Operation method:
In “C01” status, press the “MODE” button to enter project number query of IDU. Press “▲” or “▼” to switch the IDU SN.
Display mode:
Project number query 1-255: project
Temperature area: displays the fault of the current IDU (in the case of multiple faults, they are circularly displayed every three seconds).
C01 of IDU and faulty IDU number of online
Timer area: displays (project number conflict C5 fault)/project number of the current IDU (project numberes are arranged from small to large).
location IDU
Special operations:
After users press the “MODE” button to enter project number query, the buzzer of the IDU operated by the wired controller will ring till users quit "C01" query or switch to
the next IDU.
Indoor unit quantity

C03 query in the system 1-80 Timer area: displays the number of IDUs in the system network.
network
Operation method:
00: common
In “C06” status, press the “MODE” button to enter the preferential operation query interface. Press “ ” or “ ” to switch the IDU SN.
Preferential operation operation
C06 Display mode:
query 01: preferential
Temperature area: displays the project number of the current IDU.
operation
Timer area: displays the preferential operation setting value of the current IDU.
Operation method:
COMMISSIONING
In “C07” status, press the “MODE” button to enter the indoor environment temperature query interface. Press “ ” or “ ” to switch the IDU SN.
Indoor environment
OPERATION
C07 - Display mode:

temperature query
Timer area: displays the temperature value of the indoor environment temperature sensor after replenishment.
Prompt time query for

C08 4-416: days Timer area: displays the prompt time for air filter cleaning.
air filter cleaning
Wired controller
C09 01, 02 Timer area: displays the adress of the current wired controller.
adress query
Indoor unit quantity

C11 query in one-to-many 1-16 Timer area: displays the number of IDUs controlled by the wired controller.
mode
Outdoor environment
C12 - Timer area: displays the temperature value of the environment temperature sensor of the master ODU.
temperature query
Operation method:
In “C17” status, press the “MODE” button to enter the indoor relative humidity query interface. Press “▲” or “▼” to switch the IDU SN.
Indoor relative humidity Display mode:
C17 20-90
query Temperature area: displays the relative humidity value.
Timer area: displays the project number of IDU (project numberes are arranged from small to large).
If the HBS network consists of only one IDU, the timer area directly displays the IDU relative humidity value in the “C17” interface.
Operation method(“C18” query is not supported for the slave wired controller):
In “C18” status, press the “MODE” button to enter the IDU project number query interface. Press “▲” or “▼” to switch the IDU SN.
Cancellation method:
1. If users quit the "C18" query interface within 20 seconds, the project number display is cancelled.
Indoor unit project
2. If the query interface is quit after 20 seconds upon timeout, press the “ON/OFF” button in power-on or power-off status to cancel the project number display.
number query in
C18 1-255 3. The method for cancelling the project number display on any wired controller in the network is the same as 2.
the communication
Display mode:
network
Temperature area: displays the SN of the current IDU (project numberes are arranged from small to large).
Timer area: displays the project number of the current IDU.
Each IDU/wired controller in the network displays its own project number (the wired controller circularly displays project numberes of IDUs every second from small to
large).
82
Parameter
Parameter Name Parameter Range View Method
Code
Operation method:
In “C20” status, press the “MODE” button to enter the fresh-air IDU temperature query interface. Press “▲” or “▼” to switch the IDU SN.
Fresh-air IDU outlet Display mode:
C20 -9 to 99
temperature query Temperature area: displays the project number of the current IDU (1-16, project numberes are arranged from small to large).
Timer area: displays the fresh-air IDU outlet temperature.
If the HBS network consists of only one IDU, the timer area directly displays the fresh-air IDU outlet temperature in the "C20" interface.
Note:
1. In parameter query status, "FAN", “TIMER”, "SLEEP", and "SWING" are invalid. By pressing the “ON/OFF” button,
users can return to the main interface but not power on/off the unit.
2. In parameter query status, signals of the remote controller are invalid.
1) User Parameter Settings
User parameters can be set in power-on or power-off status.
a. Press and hold the “FUNCTION” button for five seconds. The temperature area displays “C00”. Press and hold
the “FUNCTION” button for another five seconds to enter the wired controller parameter setting interface. The
temperature area displays “P00”.
b. Select a parameter code by pressing “ ” or “ ” . Press the “MODE” button to switch to parameter value settings.
The parameter value blinks. Adjust the parameter value by pressing “ ” or “ ” and then press the “ENTER/
CANCEL” button to complete settings.
c. Press the “ENTER/CANCEL” button to return to the upper-level menu till quitting parameter settings.
The user parameter setting list is as follows:
COMMISSIONING
Table 2.2 User Parameter Setting List
OPERATION
Parameter
Parameter Name Parameter Range Default Value Remark
Code
00: does not change the master/slave status

After the IDU connected
P10 Master IDU settings of the current IDU 00
with the current wired controller is successfully set to master IDU, "MASTER" on the wired controller is on.
01: sets the current IDU to master IDU
Infrared connection This setting can only be enabled through the master wired controller.
00: disabled
P11 settings of wired 01 When the infrared remote receiving function of the wired controller is disabled, neither the master nor slave wired
01: enabled
controller controller can receive remote signals. The wired controllers can only be operated by pressing.
When two wired controllers simultaneously control one or more IDUs, the two wired controllers should use different
Wired controller 01: master wired controller
P13 01 addresses. The slave wired controller (address: 02) does not have the unit parameter setting function except its
address settings 02: slave wired controller
own address settings.
Group-controlled IDU 00: disabled This value is set based on the number of connected IDUs.
P14 01
quantity settings 01-16: number of indoor units If the current value is inconsistent with the actual number of group-controlled IDUs, an “L9” fault may occur.
Set unit of 00:Celsius

P16 00
temperature 01:Fahrenheit
After identifying the IDU type, the wired controller only displays the available static pressure levels.
1. The static pressure levels fall into five levels and nine levels for VRF IDUs. The wired controller only displays the
static pressure levels matched with the identified IDU type.
2. When the HBS network consists of IDUs with both five and nine static pressure levels, the wired controller
Static pressure Type 1: 03.04.05.06.07
P30 05 displays nine adjustable static pressure levels according to the maximum control principle. If the static pressure
settings for indoor fan Type 2: 01. 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. 09
levels received by the IDU from the wired controller, remote controller, or remote monitoring system exceed the
setting range, the limit value prevails.
3. During power-on and synchronization, the setting value of static pressure levels is determined by settings of the
IDU.
00: standard-ceiling installation height

P31 High-ceiling installation 00
01: high-ceiling installation height
00: common timing

P33 Timer function settings 00
01: time-point timing
83
Parameter
Code
Repeating validity for 00: single timing

P34 00 This setting is valid only when the timer function is set to time-point timing.
time-point timing 01: repeated everyday
Cooling setting
P37 temperature in 17°C -30°C 25
automatic mode Cooling setting temperature – heating setting temperature ≥ 1.
Heating setting Note: The two settings are still valid in remote shielding status.
P38 temperature in 16°C -29°C 20
automatic mode
Preferential operation 00: common operation When power supply is insufficient, users are allowed to power on/off the IDU set with preferential operation and
P43 00
settings 01: preferential operation other IDUs are forcibly powered off. A fault code is displayed on the IDU that is forcibly powered off.
Accumulated time
00: not cleared
P46 clearing for air filter 00
01: cleared
cleaning
01: angle 1(25°)

Opening angle of indoor
P49 02: angle 2(30°) 01 Applicable to limited models of indoor unit.
unit air-return plate
03: angle 3(35°)
Operation method:
Target outlet Enter query in “P50” status and press “▲” or “▼” to set the target outlet temperature of fresh-air IDU. The default
temperature setting for value is 18°C upon factory departure.
P50 16-30°C
fresh-air IDU in cooling Press the “ENTER/CANCEL” button to confirm settings and return to the upper-level menu.
mode Display mode:
COMMISSIONING
Temperature area: displays the target outlet temperature of fresh-air IDU.

OPERATION
Operation method:
Target outlet Enter query in “P51” status and press “▲” or “▼” to set the target outlet temperature of fresh-air IDU. The default
temperature setting for value is 22°C upon factory departure.
P51 16-30°C Press the “ENTER/CANCEL” button to confirm settings and return to the upper-level menu.
fresh-air IDU in heating
mode Display mode:
Temperature area: displays the target outlet temperature of fresh-air IDU.
Linked settings for 00: no linked control (default) There is not linked control by default upon factory departure. After the linked control function is set, the fresh-air
P54
fresh-air IDU 01: linked control IDU can be independently controlled.
Note:
1. In parameter setting status, "FAN", “TIMER”, "SLEEP", and "SWING" are invalid. By pressing the “ON/OFF” button, users can
return to the main interface but not power on/off the unit.
2. In parameter setting status, signals of the remote controller are invalid.
5) Engineering Parameter Query
Engineering parameters can be queried in power-on or power-off status.
Press and hold the “FUNCTION” button for five seconds to enter the engineering parameter query interface. The
temperature area displays “C00” and “CHECK” is on.
a. Within five seconds after “C00” is displayed, continuously press the “MODE” button for three times in an interval less than
one second to enter engineering parameter query.
b. Select a parameter code by pressing “ ” or “ ” .
c. Press the “ENTER/CANCEL” button to return to the upper-level menu till quitting parameter query.
84
In the engineering parameter query interface, users can also query user parameters listed in Table 2.1.
The engineering parameter query list is as follows:
Table 2.3 Engineering Parameter Query List
Parameter Code Parameter Name Parameter Range View Method
Display mode:
Parameter setting
C00 - Timer area: displays the project number of the current IDU.
ingress (default)
Note: If the current HBS network consists of multiple IDUs, only the IDU that has the minimum project number is displayed.
Operation method:
In “C02” status, press the “MODE” button to enter the preferential operation query interface. Press “ ” or “ ” to switch the project
Indoor unit capacity number of IDU.
C02 -
query Display mode:
Timer area: displays the current IDU capacity/IDU capacity after adjustment.
Project number query of 1-255: project number

C04 Timer area: displays the project number of the master IDU/00.
master IDU 00: no master IDU
Operation method:
1. In “C05” status, press the “MODE” button to enter the historical fault query interface. Press “ ” or “ ” to switch the project number
of IDU. Press the “MODE” button to enter fault code query of the current IDU. Press “ ” or “ ”to switch the fault SN. Press the “ENTER/
Historical fault query
C05 Five historical faults CANCEL” button to return to the upper-level menu.
ingress of IDU
Display mode:
Temperature area: displays the fault SN and fault code.
Timer area: displays the project number of IDU.
COMMISSIONING
Operation method:
00: 0 Pa
In “C10” status, press the “MODE” button to enter static pressure setting query of ODU. Press “ ” or “ ” to switch the ODU address.
OPERATION
Static pressure setting 20: 20 Pa
C10 Display mode:
query of ODU 50: 50 Pa
Temperature area: displays the address of the current ODU.
80: 80 Pa
Timer area: displays the static pressure setting value.
Outdoor unit network

C13 1-255 Timer area: displays the network number of the current ODU.
number query
Operation method:
In “C14” status, press the “MODE” button to enter inlet-tube temperature sensor query of IDU. Press “ ” or “ ” to switch the IDU SN.
Display mode:
Temperature query Temperature area: displays the project number of the current IDU.
for inlet-tube Timer area: displays the temperature value.
C14 -9 to 99
temperature sensor If the HBS network consists of only one IDU, the timer area directly displays the temperature value in the “C14” interface.
of IDU No matter Fahrenheit or Centigrade remote signals are received, the temperature is displayed in Centigrade.
When the wired controller displays the inlet-tube temperature after receiving signals from the remote controller, the inlet-tube
temperature of the IDU that has the minimum project number in the HBS network is displayed by default.
Operation method:
In “C15” status, press the “MODE” button to enter outlet temperature sensor query of IDU. Press “ ” or “ ” to switch the IDU SN.
Display mode:
Temperature query Temperature area: displays the project number of the current IDU.
C15 for outlet temperature -9 to 99 Timer area: displays the temperature value.
sensor of IDU If the HBS network consists of only one IDU, the timer area directly displays the temperature value in the "C15" interface.
No matter Fahrenheit or Centigrade remote signals are received, the temperature is displayed in Centigrade.
When the wired controller displays the inlet-tube temperature after receiving signals from the remote controller, the inlet-tube
temperature of the IDU that has the minimum project number in the HBS network is displayed by default.
Operation method:
In “C16” status, press the “MODE” button to enter electronic expansion valve opening degree query of IDU. Press “ ” or “ ” to switch
the IDU SN.
Display mode:
Opening degrees
query of electronic
C16 0-20 Timer area: displays the opening degree value.
expansion valve
If the HBS network consists of only one IDU, the timer area directly displays the opening degree value of electronic expansion valve in
of IDU
the “C16” interface.
When the wired controller displays the opening degree of electronic expansion valve after receiving signals from the remote controller,
the opening degree of electronic expansion valve of the IDU that has the minimum project number in the HBS network is displayed by
default.
85
Capacity configuration
35: 135% Temperature area: displays the parameter code.
n2 ratio upper-limit
50: 150% Timer area: displays the setting value of capacity configuration ratio of the current outdoor/IDU.
of outdoor/IDU
Operation method:
In “n6” status, press the “MODE” button to enter fault code query of ODU (when a wired controller controls multiple IDUs, only the faults
memorized by the IDU that has the minimum project number can be queried). Press “ ” or “ ” to switch the fault SN. Press the
n6 Five historical faults “ENTER/CANCEL” button to return to the upper-level menu.
ingress of ODU
Display mode:
Temperature area: displays the fault SN and fault code from left to right (1-5, faults are arranged from the earliest to the latest).
Timer area: displays the project number of the ODU.
Operation method (n7 query is not supported for the slave wired controller):
In “n7” status, the timer area is not displayed. Press the “MODE” button to enter parameter query of ODU. The first bit in the temperature
area (display bit of the ODU module ID) blinks. Press “▲” or “▼” to switch the ODU module ID. Press the “MODE” button to select
an ODU module. In this case, the first bit in the temperature area stops blinking, and the second and third bits in the temperature area
display the parameter code. The timer area displays a corresponding parameter value. Press “▲” or “▼” to switch the parameter
code and press the “ENTER/CANCEL” button to return to the upper-level menu.
Display mode:
Temperature area: displays the ODU module ID and parameter code from left to right.
Timer area: displays a corresponding parameter value to the right.
Parameter Code Parameter Name Unit
01 Outdoor environment temperature °C

COMMISSIONING
04 Operation frequency of outdoor fan Hz

OPERATION
05 Module high-pressure °C
06 Module low-pressure °C
Parameter query 01-13
n7 07 Discharge temperature of compressor 1 °C
ingress of ODU 25-29
25 Outdoor unit heating EXV1 (Actual value = Displayed value * 10) PLS
26 Outdoor unit heating EXV2 (Actual value = Displayed value * 10) PLS
27 Subcooler EXV (Actual value = Displayed value * 10) PLS
28 Defrosting temperature °C
29 Liquid-extracting temperature of subcooler °C
30 Outlet temperature of accumulator °C
31 Oil return temperature °C
32 Inlet-tube temperature of condenser °C
33 Outlet temperature of condenser °C
nA: cooling/heating
Unit cooling/heating nC: single-cooling Temperature area: displays the parameter code.
A6
function nH: single-heating Timer area: displays the cooling/heating function setting value of the current unit.
nF: air supply
86
Operation method (nb query is not supported for the slave wired controller):
In “nb” status, the timer area is not displayed. Press the “MODE” button to enter bar code query. The temperature area displays “nb” and
the project number in the timer area blinks. Press “▲” or “▼” to switch the project number of IDU.
Press the “MODE” button to select an IDU. The temperature area displays “Un” and the timer area displays “-n”. Press “▲” or “▼” to
display the entire-unit bar code and controller bar code of IDU. Press the “ENTER/CANCEL” button to return to the upper-level menu.
The temperature area displays “nb” and the timer area displays the project number of the queried IDU. Press the “ENTER/CANCEL”
button again to return to the upper-level menu.
Display mode:
Temperature area: displays nb/Un/Pc/bar code.
Timer area: displays -n/project number/bar code.
The following is an example:
Example Temperature Area Timer Area Remark 1 Remark 2
It indicates that the

-n
Un (to the right) following is the entire-unit
(in the middle)
bar code of IDU.
Entire-init bar code of IDU It indicates the former

N1r0128150066 N1r 0128
seven bits of the bar code.
nb Bar code query of IDU 0-9, A-Z, a-z, -
It indicates the latter
150 066 Press “▼” to
six bits of the bar code.
display downward
and press “▲” to
It indicates that the
display upward.
COMMISSIONING
Pc -n following is the controller
bar code of IDU.
OPERATION
Controller bar code of IDU It indicates the former
N1r0128150067 N1r 0128
seven bits of the bar code.
It indicates the latter six

150 067
bits of the bar code.
Note:
1. Un indicates the entire-unit bar code of IDU and Pc indicates the controller bar code of IDU.
2. When there is only one IDU, press the “MODE” button in “nb” status to enter bar code query without selecting the project number of
IDU.
3. The system quits the query status if no operations are performed in 60 seconds.
4. The bar code query starts from the entire-unit bar code of IDU and ends at the controller bar code of IDU without circulation. That is,
the query does not start again even if users press “▼”.
Note:
1. In parameter query status, "FAN", “TIMER”, "SLEEP", and "SWING" are invalid. By pressing the “ON/OFF” button, users can
2. In parameter query status, signals of the remote controller are invalid.
1) Engineering Parameter Settings
Engineering parameters can be set in power-on or power-off status.
a. Press and hold the “FUNCTION” button for five seconds. The temperature area displays “C00”. Continuously press the
“MODE” button for three times, and then press and hold the “FUNCTION” button for five seconds to enter the engineering
parameter setting interface. The temperature area displays “P00”.
b. Select a parameter code by pressing “ ” or “ ”. Press the “MODE” button to switch to parameter value settings. The
parameter value blinks. Adjust the parameter value by pressing “ ” or “ ”and then press the “ENTER/CANCEL” button to
complete settings.
c. Press the “ENTER/CANCEL” button to return to the upper-level menu till quitting parameter settings.
87
In the engineering parameter setting interface, users can also set user parameters listed in Table 2.2.
The engineering parameter setting list is as follows:
Table 2.4 Engineering Parameter Setting List
Parameter
Code
00: standby after power-down recovery

P15 Power-down memory mode 00
01: restoring the original status after power-down recovery
00: not cleared Historical faults of all IDUs controlled by the current wired
P17 Historical fault clearing for IDU 00
01: cleared controller are cleared.
When there are master and slave wired controllers and the
01: temperature sensor of air return vent temperature sensor of wired controller is used, only the
02: temperature sensor of wired controller temperature sensor of the master wired controller is used by
03: temperature sensor of air return vent for cooling, default.
Environment temperature sensor dehumidifying, and air supply; temperature sensor of wired Note:
P20 03
settings for IDU controller for heating In automatic mode, the environment temperature sensor settings
04: temperature sensor of wired controller for cooling, are invalid for a common IDU but the setting value is memorized.
dehumidifying, and air supply; temperature sensor of air return The environment temperature sensor settings are invalid for a
vent for heating fresh-air IDU. The temperature sensor of air return vent is used by
default.
Temperature sensor
Corrected value of environment temperature
of unit: 0°C;
P21 sensor of IDU (for cooling, dehumidifying, -15 to +15 Press “ ” or “ ” to add or reduce by 1°C.
temperature sensor of
and air supply)
wired controller: 0°C
COMMISSIONING
Press “ ” or “ ” to add or reduce by 1°C.

Temperature sensor
OPERATION
Corrected value of environment temperature The temperature sensor of unit and the temperature sensor of
of unit: -2°C;
P22 sensor of IDU (for heating, fast heating, -15 to +15 wired controller share the same corrected value.
temperature sensor of
and air warming) In heating mode, corrected value of temperature sensor of unit =
wired controller: 0°C
corrected value of temperature sensor of wired controller - 2°C.
P32 Capacity adjustment function of IDU -40% to +40% 00 Press “ ” or “ ” to add or reduce by 10%.
Select "01" and then press and hold the “ENTER/CANCEL” button
00: invalid
P35 Factory setting recovery for user functions 00 to restore the factory settings for user functions (factory setting
01: valid
recovery fails if remote shielding is valid).
Select "01" and then press and hold the “ENTER/CANCEL”

Factory setting recovery for engineering 00: invalid
P36 00 button to restore the factory status for engineering settings (factory
settings 01: valid
setting recovery fails if remote shielding is valid).
00: disabled
10: 10 seconds
20: 20 seconds
It indicates the number of seconds for enabling the low-level fan
P40 Prevention for heat collection 30: 30 seconds 00
every 15 minutes.
40: 40 seconds
50: 50 seconds
60: 60 seconds
Automatically In “P42” status, press the “MODE” button to enter the setting
generated upon the menu. The project number blinks in the timer area. Press “ ” or
P42 Project number settings of IDU 1-255
initial system “ ” to adjust the project number. Press the “ENTER/CANCEL”
operation button to confirm settings and return to the upper-level menu.
00: invalid When it is set to "01", the wired controller initiates an IDU project
P45 One-key project number reset for IDU 00
01: valid number reset command.
Minimum opening degree setting After the default minimum opening degree for heating breakdown
00: automatically controlled
P48 for heating breakdown is manually modified, the opening degree remains unchanged
1-500
of IDU expansion valves upon heating breakdown.
88
Parameter
Code
00: comfortability preferred

n0 System conservation operation settings 00
01: conservation preferred
40: 40 minutes
n1 Defrosting period settings 50: 50 minutes 50
60: 60 minutes
00: common
n3 Forcible defrosting After settings, it automatically restores to "00".
01: forcible defrosting
08: 80% Enter query in “n4” status. The temperature area displays the
Highest capacity output limitation
n4 09: 90% 10 function code and the timer area displays the corresponding
settings for ODU
10: 100% function setting value.
00: no silent function Enter query in “A7" status. The temperature area displays the
A7 Silent function of ODU 01-09: intelligent nighttime silent mode 00 function code and the timer area displays the corresponding
10-12: forcible silent mode function setting value.
Note:
COMMISSIONING
1. In parameter setting status, “FAN”, “TIMER”, “SLEEP”, and “SWING” are invalid. By pressing the “ON/OFF” button, users can
OPERATION
2. In parameter setting status, signals of the remote controller are invalid.
89
7). Failure Display (2). Engineering Application Functions Operated through the
VEKCH2B Wired Controller
When a fault occurs during the system operation, the
temperature area of wired controller displays the fault code.
When multiple faults occur, fault codes are circularly displayed.
When a fault occurs, power off the unit and ask for professional
maintenance personnel for help.
The following figure shows the VEWCL1B remote control
power-on high-pressure protection fault interface.
VEKCH2B Wired Controller

1). Master IDU Settings
Method 1: In power-off status, press and hold the “MODE”
button for five seconds to set the IDU connected with the
COMMISSIONING
current wired controller to master IDU. If the setting is

successful, “ ” master will be on.
OPERATION
Method 2:
Power-on High-pressure Protection Fault Interface Step 1: In power-on or power-off status, press and hold the
“MODE” button and "SWING" simultaneously for fi ve seconds
Note: If the IDU connected with the current wired controller is to enter the parameter query interface.
a fresh-air IDU, “FAP” is displayed on the main interface of the
wired controller. Only the outlet temperature can be set for the Step 2: In "C00" status, press and hold the “MODE” button and
fresh-air IDU. For the setting method, see the “IDU Function "SWING" simultaneously for fi ve seconds to enter the
Settings” section. parameter setting interface.
Step 3: Press "▲" or "▼" to switch level 2 parameter codes till
“P10” is displayed on the temperature area.
Step 4: Press the “MODE” button to set the parameter to
"01" and then Press the “ENTER” button. If the setting is
successful, "MASTER" on the wired controller will be on.
“MASTER”
90
2). User Parameter Query

5). Engineering Parameter Settings
User parameters can be queried in power-on or power-off
status. Engineering parameters can be set in power-on or power-
off status.
a. Press and hold the “MODE” button and "SWING"
simultaneously for fi ve seconds to enter the user a. Press and hold the “MODE” and "SWING" button
parameter query interface. The temperature area simultaneously for five seconds. The temperature area
displays “C00” and “CHECK” is on. displays “C00”. Continuously press the “MODE” button
for three times, and then press and hold the “MODE”
b. Select a parameter code by pressing “ ” or “ ”. button and "SWING" simultaneously for another five
c. Press the “SWING” button to return to the upper-level seconds to enter the wired controller engineering
menu till quitting parameter query. parameter setting interface. The temperature area
displays “P00”.
For the user parameter setting list of the VEKCH2B wired
controller, refer to the user setting query list in VEWCL1B user b. Select a parameter code by pressing “ ” or “
parameter settings. ”. Press the “MODE” button to switch to parameter
value settings. The parameter value blinks. Adjust the
Note: In parameter settings, the function of "SWING" on the parameter value by pressing “ ” or “ ” and then
VEKCH2B wired controller is equivalent to the function of press the “SWING” button to complete settings.
“ENTER/CANCEL” on the VEWCL1B wired controller.
c. Press the “SWING” button to return to the upper-level
3). User Parameter Settings menu till quitting parameter settings.
User parameters can be set in power-on or power-off status. For the engineering parameter setting list of the VEKCH2B
a. Press and hold the “MODE” button and "SWING" wired controller, refer to the engineering setting query list in
simultaneously for fi ve seconds. The temperature area VEWCL1B engineering parameter settings.
displays “C00”. Press and hold the “MODE” button and Note: In parameter settings, the function of "SWING" on the
"SWING" simultaneously for another fi ve seconds to enter VEKCH2B wired controller is equivalent to the function of
the wired controller user parameter setting interface. The “ENTER/CANCEL” on the VEWCL1B wired controller.
temperature area displays “P00”.
COMMISSIONING
(3). Engineering Application Functions Operated through the
b. Select a parameter code by pressing “ ” or “ ”. Press the VERCL1B Remote Controller
OPERATION
“MODE” button to switch to parameter value settings. The
parameter value blinks. Adjust the parameter value by The VERCL1B remote controller provides all engineering
pressing “ ” or “ ” and then press the “SWING” button to application functions. It is set to common type by default
complete settings. upon factory departure. It can use engineering application
functions only after being set to professional type. The
c. Press the “SWING” button to return to the upper-level menu following only describes engineering application functions.
till quitting parameter settings. For other user operation functions, refer to the
"Remote Controller Operating Instructions".
controller, refer to the user setting query list in VEWCL1B user Method for setting the professional remote controller: Press "
parameter settings. " and "
MODE
" simultaneously in power-off status. If "
TEMP
"
Note: In parameter settings, the function of "SWING" on the blinks for three times, it indicates that the setting succeeds.
VEKCH2B wired controller is equivalent to the function of Method for restoring the common remote controller: Press "
“ENTER/CANCEL” on the VEWCL1B wired controller. MODE
" and "TEMP
" simultaneously in power-off status. If " "
blinks for three times, it indicates that the setting succeeds.
4). Engineering Parameter Query
Engineering parameters can be queried in power-on or
power-off status.
a. Press and hold the “MODE” and "SWING"
button simultaneously for fi ve seconds to enter
the engineering parameter query interface. The
temperature area displays “C00” and “CHECK” is on.
b. In "C00" status, continuously press the “MODE” button for
three times to enter engineering parameter query.
c. Select a parameter code by pressing “ ” or “ ”.
d. Press the “SWING” button to return to the upper-level menu
till quitting parameter query.
controller, refer to the user setting query list in VEWCL1B user
parameter settings.
Note: In parameter settings, the function of "SWING" on the
VEKCH2B wired controller is equivalent to the function of
“ENTER/CANCEL” on the VEWCL1B wired controller.
91
No. Button name Function
Table 2.5 Query Parameters
1 ON/OFF Turn on or turn off the unit
Query Code Query Content Query Sub-item Level 2 Query Content
2 FAN Set fan speed
C00 Invalid
3 ▲/▼ Set temperature and time
C01 Project number query of the current IDU
4 MODE Set operation mode
C02 Capacity query of the current IDU
5 Set quiet function
C03 Indoor unit quantity query in the CAN1 network
6 Set health function and air function
C04 Project number query of the master IDU
7 Set left&right swing status 01 Fault 1
8 Set up&down swing status 02 Fault 2
9 X-FAN Set X-FAN function C05 03 Fault 3
ingress of the current IDU
10 TIMER ON Set timer on function 04 Fault 4
11 TIMER OFF Set timer off function 05 Fault 5

C06 Preferential operation query
12 SAVE Set energy-saving function
C07 Temperature query for environment temperature sensor of the current IDU
13 SLEEP Set sleep function
C08 Prompt time query for air filter cleaning
14 LIGHT Set light function
01 Module 1
15 CLOCK Set clock of the system
Static pressure setting 02 Module 2
16 I FEEL Set I FEEL function C10
query of ODU 03 Module 3
17 TEMP Switch temperature displaying type on the unit’s display 04 Module 4
C11 Indoor unit quantity query in one-to-many control mode
1). Master IDU Settings
C12 Temperature query for outdoor environment temperature sensor
The master IDU can be set through the wired controller or
C13 CAN2 bus line ID query
remote controller. The methods for setting the master IDU
C14 Inlet-tube temperature query of IDU
through the remote controller are as follows:
COMMISSIONING
C15 Outlet temperature query of IDU

Step 1: Set an IDU to air-supply status and set the temperature
OPERATION
C16 Opening degrees query of electronic expansion valve of IDU

to 30°C.
n2 Capacity configuration ratio upper-limit query of outdoor and IDUs
Step 2: Continuously press “—” and “+” for three times within
n4 Highest capacity output limitation query
five seconds.
01 Fault 1
Step 3: Check whether the setting is successful. If it is, the 02 Fault 2
LED panel of the IDU will display "UC" for five seconds and Historical fault query ingress
n6 03 Fault 3
"MASTER" on the wired controller will be on. Otherwise, repeat of ODU
steps 1 and 2. 04 Fault 4
05 Fault 5
2). Parameter Query
A6 Unit cooling/heating function
Engineering application functions cover parameter query and A7 Outdoor silent mode
parameter settings.
For parameter query, users can query user parameters and 3). Parameter Settings
engineering parameters of the unit. The parameter query For parameter settings, users can set user parameters and
method is as follows: engineering parameters of the unit. The parameter setting
1) On the professional remote controller of, VERCL1B press method is as follows:
and hold " " for five seconds to enter the parameter query
CLOCK
a. After entering parameter query, switch the query code
status. The viewing text is displayed. The query code to "C00". Press and hold " " for fi ve seconds to CLOCK
"C00" blinks in the temperature area. enter the parameter setting status. The setting text is
2) Press " " to switch the query code and select a unit displayed and "P00" blinks in the temperature area.
parameter to be queried (see Table 2.5 for parameters that can b. Press " " to switch the setting code and select a unit
be queried). parameter to be set (see Table 2.6 for parameters that
3) If the timer area displays query sub-items, it indicates that can be set).
there are level 2 query menus. Press " " to enter level 2
MODE
c. Press " " to enter parameter settings. The current
TEMP
query menu selection. The content blinks in the timer area. parameter value blinks in the timer area. Press " " to
Press " " to switch query sub-items and select a level 2 menu change the parameter value.
to be queried.
Press " TEMP
" to confi rm query and return to step 2.
4) Press " " to confi rm query and return to step 2.
TEMP
After entering engineering commissioning, the system

After entering the engineering application function, automatically quits the engineering commissioning status if no
the system automatically quits the engineering commissioning valid operations are performed within 20 seconds. To directly
status if no valid operations are performed within 20 seconds. quit the engineering commissioning status, press " ". CLOCK
To directly quit the engineering commissioning status, press

" ".
CLOCK
92
Table 2.6 Setting Parameters
Setting Code Setting Content Setting Value

P00 Invalid
00: not changing the current settings
P10 Master IDU settings 01: setting the corresponding IDU to master IDU
001-255: setting the IDU corresponding to *** to master IDU
00: standby after power-down recovery
P15 Power-down memory mode settings
01: restoring the original status after power-down recovery
00: not cleared
P17 Historical fault clearing
01: cleared
01: temperature sensor of air return vent
02: temperature sensor of wired controller
03: temperature sensor of air return vent for cooling, dehumidifying, and air supply; temperature sensor of wired controller
P20 Indoor environment temperature value
for heating
04: temperature sensor of wired controller for cooling, dehumidifying, and air supply; temperature sensor of air return vent
for heating and automatic mode
Corrected value settings of environment temperature sensor of IDU (for cooling,
P21 -15 to 15
dehumidifying, and air supply)
P22 Corrected value settings of environment temperature sensor of IDU (for heating) -15 to 15
Type 1: 03.04.05.06.07
P30 Static pressure settings for indoor fan
Type 2: 01.02.03.04.05.06.07.08.09
00: standard-ceiling installation height
P31 High-ceiling installation settings
01: high-ceiling installation height
P32 Capacity adjustment function of IDU -40% to +40%
00: invalid
P34 Repeating validity for time-point timing
01: valid
00: invalid
P35 Factory setting recovery for user functions
01: factory setting recovery
00: invalid
COMMISSIONING
P36 Factory setting recovery for engineering settings
01: factory setting recovery
OPERATION
00: disabled
10: 10 seconds
20: 20 seconds
P40 Prevention for heat collection 30: 30 seconds
40: 40 seconds
50: 50 seconds
60: 60 seconds
P42 Project number settings of IDU 1-255
00: no preferential operation
P43 Preferential operation settings
01: preferential operation
00: not displayed
P44 One-key project number setting query for IDU
01: displayed
00: invalid
P45 One-key project number reset for IDU
01: project number reset
00: not cleared
P46 Accumulated time clearing for air filter cleaning
01: cleared
00: no cleaning prompt settings
10-39: The first digit indicates the pollution degree of the using place and the second digit indicates the accumulated
operating time of IDU. The two digits are described as follows:
1. Slight pollution: The first digit is "1". If the second digit is "0", it indicates that the accumulated operating time is 5500
hours. The accumulated operating time is added by 500 hours when the second digit is increased by "1”. When the
second digit is “9”, the accumulated operating time is 10000 hours.
P47 Prompt settings for air filter cleaning
2. Medium pollution: The first digit is "2". If the second digit is "0", it indicates that the accumulated operating time is 1400
hours. The accumulated operating time is added by 400 hours when the second digit is increased by "1". When the
second digit is "9", the accumulated operating time is 5000 hours.
3. Heavy pollution: The first digit is "3". If the second digit is "0", it indicates that the accumulated operating time is 100
hours. The accumulated operating time is added by 100 hours when the second digit is increased by "1". When the
second digit is "9", the accumulated operating time is 1000 hours.
00: comfortability preferred
n0 System conservation operation settings
01: conservation preferred
40: 40 minutes
n1 Defrosting period settings 50: 50 minutes
60: 60 minutes
00: no defrosting
n3 Forcible defrosting
01: forcible defrosting
00: no silent function
A7 Silent function of ODU 01-09: intelligent nighttime silent mode
10-12: forcible silent mode
08: highest energy consumption limitation being 80%
n4 Highest capacity output limitation settings 09: highest energy consumption limitation being 90%
10: no conservation limitation
93
4). Engineering Application Functions Operated through the Part 3 Commissioning Process
VERCL1A Remote Controller Note:
The VERCL1A remote controller only provides engineering 1. It is forbidden to directly connect the compressor with power
application functions for setting the master IDU. For other supply and forcibly power it on during commissioning and
user operation functions, refer to the “Remote Controller maintenance.
Operating Instructions”.
2. Engineering commissioning operations must be performed
The method for setting the master IDU through the on the Lennox Series VRF unit. Otherwise, the unit cannot
VERCL1A remote controller is as follows: properly run.
3. Before commissioning is completed, the main board of ODU
displays “module address 0F A0” and that of IDU displays
“A0”.
4. A module must be set to master module and only one can be
set during commissioning.
5. An IDU must be set to master IDU and only one can be set
during commissioning.
6. Other functions can use the factory settings if there are not
special engineering requirements.
I. Necessity of VRF Engineering Commissioning
Different form ordinary air conditioning units, the VRF system
raises high design requirements and easily incurs operation-
affected factors such as impurities and water during
engineering installation. Due to the requirements on
engineering design/installation complexity and high-precise
system control, commissioning is mandatory after engineering
COMMISSIONING
installation. Only a qualified unit can be delivered for use.

OPERATION
No. Button name Function

1 ON/OFF Turn on or turn off the unit
II. Required Files and Tools for Engineering
Commissioning
2 TURBO Set TURBO function
1. Required Tools for Engineering Commissioning of Lennox
3 MODE Set operation MODE Series VRF
4 Set up&down swing status
Inner hexagon spanner Digital thermometer
5 I FEEL Set I FEEL function Shifting spanner Noise meter
6 TEMP Switch temperature displaying type on the unit's display Cross screwdriver Clamp meter
7 Set health function and air function Straight screwdriver Digital multimeter
LIGHT Vacuum pump Electricity meter

8 Set LIGHT function
Electronic balance Timer
9 X-FAN Set X-FAN function
System high and low pressure gauges
10 SLEEP Set SLEEP function Step ladder
for corresponding refrigerants
11 CLOCK Set CLOCK of the system
Wind-speed transmitter
12 TOFF Set timer OFF function
13 TON Set timer ON function The Lennox Series VRF provides two commissioning
14
methods. One is to perform commissioning by pressing
Set left & right wing status
buttons on the main board of ODU. The other is to perform
15 FAN Set FAN speed commissioning on a PC through professional software.
Parameters of the ODU and IDU can be simultaneously
16 Set clock of the system
dispayed with the second method. (For details about these
methods, refer to respective instructions.)
Perform settings by pressing “▲” and “▼” in air supply mode: 2. Commissioning Files
1. Set the temperature to 30°C. The following commissioning fi les are required to record
2. Press “▼” and then “▲” in fi ve seconds. Repeat this installation and commissioning of units: pre-commissioning
operation for three times. scheme determination meeting minutes, commissioning
personnel record tables, commissioning system appearance
After successful settings, “UC” is displayed on the receiving check record tables, commissioning data record tables, and
indicator panel of the remote controller for five seconds and commissioning reports. See attached tables for fi le formats.
“MASTER” is displayed on the wired controller.
94
III. Engineering Commissioning Procedures
1. Step 1: Pre-commissioning Preparations
Does the stop valve of
1.1 Overall Commissioning Plan outdoor unit reach the
maximum opening
Before commissioning, the person-in-charge should learn degree?
about the overall engineering progress plan, overall workload
of engineering commissioning, possible influence factors in
achieving the commissioning progress, and required labors
and materials.
leakage?
1.2 Composition of Commissioning Members Oil
Commissioning members comprise aftersales commissioning

personnel and installation personnel.
(2). Check system refrigerants before startup.
All commissioning participants must take part in professional
Before the system is started, connect the liquid pipe
training courses before unit commissioning. All participants can
valve of ODU with a high pressure gauge and the gas-
be grouped as required and each group should include at least
pipe valve of ODU with a low pressure gauge, and
professional commissioning personnel and assistants.
then read their values. In this case, high pressure and
1.3 Preparations of Commissioning Tools and Instruments low pressure of the system should be in balance
(1). Make sure that all tools or instruments are status, and the difference between the saturation
temperature corresponding to the balanced pressure
available and ready before commissioning.
value and the environment temperature (the higher in
(2). Make sure that the commissioning software is outdoor and indoor temperatures is taken as
running properly before commissioning. environment temperature) should not be larger than 5°
C. If the difference is larger than 5°C, it is required to
(3). The professional aftersales commissioning software check the ODU for leakage.
provided by Lennox should be used for commissioning
of Lennox Series VRF system. Note: Guarantee that the system has never been started
before this test. Otherwise, the high pressure value will be
COMMISSIONING
(4). Make sure that all required files and parameter records over-higher than the environment temperature or the low
OPERATION
are ready. pressure value will be over-lower than the environment
2. Step 2: Pre-commissioning Check temperature.
Installation environment check covers the heat exchange Example:
environment of unit and electromagnetic radiant components. The outdoor environment temperature is 30°C and the indoor
All requirements should comply with national and local environment temperature is 28°C. The pressure gauges
electrical standards. For any installation incompliance, connected with the system show that the high pressure value
records should be made for providing an analysis basis during is 28°C and the low pressure value is 27°C. The difference
refrigerating system testing. between the outdoor environment temperature and either
2.1 Installation Appearance Check pressure value is less than 5°C. It indicates that the system
standby pressure is normal.
Installation appearance check covers whether pipeline
installation complies with specifi cations, whether refrigerant
High Pressure
pipes and condensing drainage pipes are thermal insulated. Gauge
LowPressure
Refrigerant pipes should be tidily installed, with outdoor and Gauge
indoor disperse pipes leaning in the required scope. For any
installation incompliance, records should be made for
providing an analysis basis during refrigerating system testing.
Refrigerant pipes and condensing drainage pipes should not
be exposed. If any pipe is exposed, an immediate amendment
is required to avoid serious loss.
2.2 Refrigerating System Check Oil Detection Valve
(1). Before commissioning, make sure that the stop valve Low-pressure
Detection Valve
of each module reaches the maximum opening degree.
Check whether there is any refrigerator oil leakage
around the valve. If there is, immediately check for
leakage with soap bubbles or leak detectors. If confirming
that leakage exists, immediately stop commissioning and
solve the problem before continuing commissioning.
95
2.3 Electrical System Check (6). Check the input power.

(1). Check for high electromagnetic interference, dusts, and 1). Power consistency check: Measure the power supply to
acidic or alkaline gas in the unit environment. be connected with the air conditioning unit for its voltage,
frequency, three-phase voltage unbalance factor, and
1). The air conditioning unit can neither share the same
frequency offset. Specifications of the power supply
power supply system with the equipment containing
should be consistent with power specifications displayed
variable-frequency drives, nor reside near the equipment
on the unit nameplate. The fluctuation range of voltage
generating high electromagnetic interference. Otherwise,
should be within ±10%.
the air conditioning unit may fail to properly work due to
interference. If this case exists, records should be made. 2). Phase sequence check:
In the case of serious influence, the air conditioning unit a. After powering on the unit, measure the grounded
must be relocated or relevant measures must be taken. voltage value of N-bit on the power patch panel and the
2). Prevent acidic or alkaline gas/liquid from rusting cables voltage value between every two of L1, L2, and L3 bits.
of the air conditioning unit. In general, the voltage between N-bit and L1/L2/L3-bit
should approach 220 V and the voltage between every
(2). Check the installation appearance of power cables.
two of L1, L2, and L3 bits should approach 380 V. If the
Check whether power cables of indoor and ODUs are measurement result does not match the above-
installed according to vendor requirements and whether cable mentioned normal value, check whether the external
connectors are reliably connected. Except the connection power cable is inversely connected between the N wire
part of patch panels, wire exposure is not allowed on any and one of L wires.
connection part of power cables.
b. Observe the code displayed on the digital LED of the
(3). Check the power capacity required for the unit. main board AP1. If the fault code “U3” is displayed,
The air conditioning unit works at a current much larger than it indicates that the phase sequence of the external
the rated current (the working current changes in a large scope power cable connected with the air conditioning unit is
in different conditions). The power grid provides unstable incorrect. Power off the unit and exchange any two
voltages and the line power factor decreases. Therefore, the phases among L1, L2, and L3 bits on one end of the
power capacity should not be less than the maximum power of external power cable. Power on the unit and observe
COMMISSIONING
the unit. the code again. The fault code “U3” should disappear.
OPERATION
(4). Check air switches and fuse links for their models and 2.4 Communication System Check
using methods. (1). The following communication contents must be checked
1). Commercial air conditioning units must be installed again before commissioning:
with independent air switches, fuse links, and similar
protectors. Reasonable models and using methods Do main boards correctly communicate with each
should be selected for air switches and fuse links. other between outdoor unit modules?
Remarks:
c. Air switches work for overload and short-circuit
protection. Air switches provide a less breaking current Are DIP switches of the master outdoor
than fuse links and air switches react more slowly than unit correctly set?
fuse links. The advantage of air switches is that they
can be manually reset after a protection action.
d. Fuse links only work for short-circuit protection. They
provide a large breaking current and act slowly. Does the master outdoor unit correctly
However, fuses must be replaced after a protection communicate with the indoor unit?
action.
2). Select air switch models according to the power cable
diameter and air switch specifications. In general, the
rated current of air switches should be larger than or Are indoor units correctly connected
equal to the load current calculated based on the line, with each other?
and less than or equal to the persistent current rating
allowed by the conductor.
(5). Check components in the electric box.
In the case of unit power-off, visually check whether any Does the indoor unit correctly communicate
with the wired controller?
component in the electric box drops during transportation.
Then, check whether any component or cable is loose or drops
by hand. For a large-scale unit, power cable terminals of the (2). Communication cables cannot be laid out in the same
patch panel and cable terminals connected with connectors trough as power cables. Communication cables should be
must be tightened with a sleeve spanner or screwdriver, and independently laid out in hard fire-resistant PVC tubes. The
tightened once more after two months of normal operation. parallel spacing between communication cables and strong
Auxiliary contacts of AC connectors cannot be removed electric wires should be larger than 20 cm.
because they have been debugged upon factory departure.
96
2.5 Installation and Master of Commissioning Software 3. Step 3: Commissioning Operation

2.6 Spot Check 3.1 Precautions
(1). Before starting commissioning, make sure that the
Spot Check for Lennox Seried VRF Commissioning
unit compressor has been preheated for more than
SN Spot Check Item Qualified eight hours and check whether preheating is normal
1 Is the engineering design diagram complete? by touching. Commissioning can be started only when
preheating is normal. Otherwise, the compressor may be
2 Does the construction comply with the design diagram? damaged. Commissioning must be performed or guided by
Is the rated capacity of the IDU/ODU of a single refrigerating system within professional personnel.
3
50%-135%?
4 Is the number of connected IDUs in a single refrigerating system within 80?
5 Is the access capacity of a fresh-air unit within 30%?

Does the difference of level between IDUs and ODUs comply with unit design
6
requirements?
Does the difference of level between IDUs comply with unit design
7
requirements?
8 Is an oil loop installed on the riser every 10 m?
9 Are long pipes of IDUs and ODUs less than or equal to 165 m?
Has the compressor been
10 Is the total length of pipes less than 1000 m?
preheated for more than
Is the spacing between the ODU and the first disperse pipe larger than 90 m? eight hours?
11
If yes, is the corresponding pipe diameter increased?
Is the spacing between the IDU and the nearest disperse pipe larger than 10
12
m? If yes, is the corresponding pipe diameter increased?
COMMISSIONING
13 Does the wall thickness of copper tubes meet design requirements?
OPERATION
14 Are disperse pipes horizontal or vertical?
Does the diameter of cables connected with IDUs and ODUs comply with unit
15
design requirements?
Do the circuit breaker and leakage switch comply with unit design (2). When unit commissioning is started, the system
16
requirements? automatically selects an operation mode according to the
17 Is the spacing between the power cable and the TV set larger than 1 m? environment temperature:
18 Do communication cable materials comply with unit design requirements? Cooling mode when the outdoor environment temperature is
higher than 20°C.
19 Are all communication cables of IDUs and ODUs serially connected?
Heating mode when the outdoor environment temperature is
Is the last-communicating IDU installed with a communication-matched lower than 20°C.
20
resistance?
(3). Before starting commissioning, make sure again that
21 What is the load of the selected IDU model?
access valves (Schrader valves) of all basic modules of the
22
Is the foundation of ODU firm? Do shock absorption and water drainage ODU have been completely opened.
comply with requirements?
(4). During commissioning, the front panel of ODU must be
23 Are basic modules installed on the same horizontal line? completely covered. Otherwise, commissioning accuracy
24 Does the drainage pipe of IDU retain a 1/100 ratio of slope? may be affected (as shown in the following figure).
25 Is the raised height of drainage pipe of IDU less than 85 cm?
26 Is the drainage of IDU smooth?
27 Does a U-shaped trap exist in the drainage pipe of IDU?

Are the air outlet and air return vent of IDU connected with soft connectors?
28
Is a plenum chamber installed for air return?
29 Is the water pipe of IDU installed with an air exhaust vent?
30 Is "MASTER" stuck to the wired controller or panel of the master IDU?
31 Does appending refrigerants to the system comply with requirements?

(5). Before commissioning, make sure that appending
Does the ODU run with static pressure? Has a static pressure value been refrigerants to pipes has finished completely or for more
32
set? than 70%.
Has the ODU been preheated for more than eight hours before
33
commissioning?
97
6) The following table describes progress display of each phase during commissioning:
Progress Description for Commissioning Phases

—— Commissioning Code Progress Code Status Code
LED1 LED2 LED3 Meaning
Progress
Code Display Status Code Display Status Code Display Status
db On 01 On A0 On The system is in non-commissioning status.
The system does not set any master unit, and a master unit
db On 01 On CC On
should be set.
01_Master unit setting
detection The system sets more than two master units, and a master
db On 01 On CF On
unit should be set again.
The system successfully sets a master unit and automatically

db On 01 On OC On
enters the next step.
db On 02 On Ad Blinking The system is assigning addresses.
There is not any master IDU, and a master IDU should be set
02_Unit address db On 02 On L7 Blinking through the commissioning software. If no master IDU is set
assignment within one minute, the system will automatically set one.
The system successfully assigns addresses and automatically

db On 02 On OC On
LED3 displays the module quantity, which should be manually

db On 03 On 01-04 Blinking
03_Basic module quantity confirmed.
confirmation for ODU The system confirms the module quantity and automatically
db On 03 On OC On
COMMISSIONING
LED3 displays the IDU quantity, which should be manually

db On 04 On 01-80 Blinking
OPERATION
04_Indoor unit quantity confirmed.

confirmation The system confirms the IDU quantity and automatically
db On 04 On OC On
The system detects communication failure between master
db On 05 On C2 On
unit and inverter compressor driver.
The system detects communication failure between master
db On 05 On C3 On
unit and inverter fan driver.
05_Internal communication The rated capacity ratio is over-high between IDUs and
detection for basic modules db On 05 On CH On
ODUs.
db On 05 On CL On The rated capacity ratio is over-low between IDUs and ODUs.
The system completes detection and automatically enters the

db On 05 On OC On
next step.
db On 06 On Corresponding fault code On The system detects component failure of ODU.

06_Internal component
detection for basic modules The system detects that no ODU component fails and
db On 06 On OC On
automatically enters the next step.
The system detects component failure of IDU. "XXXX"

indicates the project number of the faulty IDU. The
XXXX/ corresponding fault code is displayed after three seconds. For
db On 07 On On
07_Component detection Corresponding fault code example, if a d5 fault occurs on IDU 100, LED3 will circularly
for IDU display "01", "00" (two seconds later), and "d5" (two seconds
later).
The system detects that no IDU component fails and

db On 07 On OC On
The system gives a prompt if the compressor preheating
db On 08 On U0 On
08_Compressor preheating period is less than eight hours.
confirmation The system detects that the compressor preheating period is
db On 08 On OC On
more than eight hours and automatically enters the next step.
The system detects insuffi cient refrigerants and stops to

db On 09 On U4 On
09_Pre-startup refrigerant balance the pressure lower than 0.3 MPa (45 psig).
detection
The system detects that refrigerants are normal and
db On 09 On OC On
98
Progress Description for Commissioning Phases

—— Commissioning Code Progress Code Status Code
Progress
db On 10 On ON On Outdoor unit valves are being opened.
10_Pre-startup ODU valve db On 10 On U6 On Outdoor unit valves have not been completely opened.
status detection
db On 10 On OC On Outdoor unit valves have been properly opened.
11_Manually calculated The refrigerant charging status is manually calculated

db On 11 On AE On
refrigerant charging status (appended refrigerants must be accurately calculated)
db On 12 On AP Blinking The system waits for a unit commissioning startup command.

12_Unit commissioning
startup confirmation The unit is set to manually-calculated refrigerant charging
db On 12 On AE On commissioning operation status.
13_ —— —— —— —— —— —— No meaning.
14_ —— —— —— —— —— —— No meaning.
The system is in cooling-mode commissioning operation (the

db On 15 On AC On system automatically selects the commissioning operation
mode without needing manual settings).
db On 15 On Corresponding fault code On A fault occurs on the cooling-mode commissioning operation.
A fault occurs on other modules during the cooling-mode

15_Cooling operation by db On 15 On J0 On
COMMISSIONING
commissioning operation.
manual charging
OPERATION
db On 15 On U9 On A fault occurs on ODU pipes or valves.
The system detects pipe failure of IDU. "XXXX" indicates

the project number of the faulty IDU. The fault code "U8"
db On 15 On XXXX/U8 On is displayed after three seconds. For example, if a U8 fault
occurs on IDU 100, LED3 will circularly display "01", "00" (two
seconds later), and "U8" (two seconds later).
The system is in heating-mode commissioning operation (the

db On 16 On AH On system automatically selects the commissioning operation
mode without needing manual settings).
db On 16 On Corresponding fault code On A fault occurs on the heating-mode commissioning operation.
A fault occurs on other modules during the heating-mode

16_Heating operation by db On 16 On J0 On
commissioning operation.
manual charging
db On 16 On U9 On A fault occurs on ODU pipes or valves.
The system detects pipe failure of IDU. "XXXX" indicates

the project number of the faulty IDU. The fault code "U8"
db On 16 On XXXX/U8 On is displayed after three seconds. For example, if a U8 fault
occurs on IDU 100, LED3 will circularly display "01", "00" (two
seconds later), and "U8" (two seconds later).
The unit has completed commissioning and in standby status.

17_Commissioning
01-04 On OF On OF On LED1 displays the module address; LED2 and LED3 display
completion status
"OF".
Note: In commissioning status, press and hold “SW3” and “SW4” simultaneously for more than five seconds to enter the no-
wired-controller commissioning mode. In this mode, the system does not detect the communication status between the wired
controller and IDU.
99
3.2 Commissioning Operation Mode Step 6: Find the module with its address being “01”, which is
the master unit. On the master unit, press and hold “SW7” for
The Lennox Series VRF provides two commissioning methods.
more than five seconds to enter unit commissioning.
One is to perform commissioning through the main board of
ODU. The other is to perform commissioning on a PC through
professional software. Parameters of the ODU and IDU can
be simultaneously displayed and historical data can be stored
and queried with the second method. (For details about these
methods, refer to respective instructions.)
3.2.1 Commissioning Through the Main Board of ODU
When unit commissioning is performed through the main board
of ODU, the main board provides the following commissioning SW7
operation functions:
Step 7: Wait for the unit to automatically operate
Step 1: Completely cover the front panel of ODU and open commissioning steps 01 and 02.
commissioning windows of all basic modules.
Exception 1: If the master unit is incorrectly set in step 01, the
following faults are displayed in step 01:
Commissioning Code Progress Code Status Code

Progress Display Display Display
Code Code Code
Status Status Status
Remove
The system
does not set any
db On 01 On CC On master unit, and
a master unit
COMMISSIONING
should be set.
OPERATION
The system sets

more than two
master units, and
01_Master unit db On 01 On CF On
a master unit
settings
should be set
again.
Step 2: In power-off status of ODU, set the ODU to a
corresponding static pressure mode according to static The system
pressure design requirements for outdoor engineering. For successfully sets
details about the setting method, see the “Outdoor Fan a master unit and
db On 01 On OC On
Static Pressure Setting DIP Switch (SA6_ESP_S)” section. If automatically
there are not static pressure requirements, retain the factory enters the next
settings. step.
Step 3: In power-off status of ODU, set one module of ODU

to master unit and other modules to sub-modules. For details According to the above fault symptoms, set the master unit
about the setting method, see the “Master Unit Setting DIP again by referring to the setting method in the “Master Unit
Switch (SA8_MASTER-S)” section. Setting DIP Switch (SA8_MASTER-S)” section. Then enter unit
commissioning again.
Step 4: If centralized control is required, set the centralized
control address in power-off status of ODU. For details about Exception 2: If no master IDU is detected in step 02, the
the setting method, see the “Centralized Control Address DIP following faults are displayed in step 02:
Switch (SA2_Addr-CC)” section. If centralized control is not
required, retain the factory settings. LED1 LED2 LED3
Current
Step 5: Power on all outdoor and IDUs. If LED3 displays “A0” Function Code Display Mode
Progress
on main boards of all modules of ODU and the wired controller
db On 02 On L7 Blinking
of each IDU displays “A0”, it indicates that the unit is in non-
commissioning status.
In this case, all buttons are invalid. Users can set the master
IDU through the commissioning software, wired controller,
or commissioning remote controller within one minute. If
no master IDU is set within one minute, the system will
automatically set a master IDU. Then the system automatically
LED3
100
Step 7: When the unit runs to step 03, users need to manually Step 9: Unit commissioning step 05 is internal communication
confirm the number of outdoor modules. The main board of detection.
each module is displayed as follows: If no exception is detected, the main board is displayed
as follows and the unit automatically enters the next
Commissioning Code Progress Code Status Code commissioning step.
LED1 LED2 LED3
Progress Display Display Display Commissioning Code Progress Code Status Code
Code Code Code
03_Module Progress Display Display Display
Module Code Code Code
quantity db On 03 On Blinking Status Status Status
quantity
confirmation The system
05_Internal
completes detection
communication db On 05 On OC On
and automatically
If the displayed quantity is consistent with the number of detection
actually connected modules, press “SW7” on the master unit
to confirm. The main board is displayed as follows and the unit
If an exception is detected, the unit retains the current status
automatically enters commissioning step 04.
and waits for manual troubleshooting. Corresponding faults
include:
LED1 LED2 LED3

Code Code Code
Status Status Status LED1 LED2 LED3 Meaning
03_Module Progress Display Display Display
Code Code Code
quantity db On 03 On OC On Status Status Status
confirmation
The system detects
communication
If the displayed quantity is inconsistent with the number of
COMMISSIONING
failure between
db On 05 On C2 On
actually connected modules, check whether communication master unit and
OPERATION
cables are correctly connected between modules in power-off inverter compressor
status. Then perform commissioning again. driver.
Note: It is very important to correctly confirm the number of The system detects
ODUs. If the confirmed quantity is inconsistent with the actual communication
quantity, the system may improperly run. db On 05 On C3 On failure between
05_Internal
master unit and
communication
Step 8: When the unit runs to step 04, users need to manually inverter fan driver.
detection
confirm the number of indoor modules. The main board of each
module is displayed as follows: The rated capacity
ratio is over-high
db On 05 On CH On
between indoor and
ODUs.
LED1 LED2 LED3
Progress The rated capacity
Display Display Display
Code Code Code ratio is over-low
Status Status Status db On 05 On CL On
between indoor and
04_Indoor Number of ODUs.
unit quantity db On 04 On connected Blinking
confirmation IDUs
For details about the above troubleshooting method, refer to
the “Troubleshooting Method” part.
If the displayed quantity is consistent with the number of
actually connected modules, press “SW7” on the master unit Step 10: Unit commissioning step 06 is component detection
to confirm. The main board is displayed as follows and the unit for ODU.
automatically enters the next commissioning step. If no exception is detected, the main board is displayed
as follows and the unit automatically enters the next
commissioning step.
LED1 LED2 LED3
Progress Display Display Display Commissioning Code Progress Code Status Code
Code Code Code
04_Indoor
unit quantity db On 04 On OC On Code Code Code
confirmation
The system detects
Note: It is very important to correctly confirm the number of 06_Component that no ODU
IDUs. If the confirmed quantity is inconsistent with the actual detection db On 06 On OC On component fails and
for ODU automatically enters
quantity, the system may improperly run.
the next step.
101
If an exception is detected, the unit retains the current status and waits for manual troubleshooting. Corresponding faults include:

Progress LED1 LED2 LED3 Meaning
06_Component Corres-ponding fault

db On 06 On On The system detects component failure of ODU.
detection for ODU code
For details about the above troubleshooting method, refer to the “Troubleshooting Method” part.
Step 11: Unit commissioning step 07 is component detection for IDU.
If no exception is detected, the main board is displayed as follows and the unit automatically enters the next commissioning step.

07_Component The system detects that no IDU component fails and automatically
db On 07 On OC On
detection for IDU enters the next step.
If an exception is detected, the unit retains the current status and waits for manual troubleshooting. Corresponding faults include:

COMMISSIONING
07_Component XXXX/Corres-ponding
db On 07 On On The system detects component failure of IDU.
OPERATION
detection for IDU fault code
“XXXX” indicates the project number of the faulty IDU. The corresponding fault code is displayed after three seconds. For
example, if a d5 fault occurs on IDU 100, LED3 will circularly display “01”, “00” (two seconds later), and “d5” (two seconds later).
For details about the above troubleshooting method, refer to the “Troubleshooting Method” part. Page 110 (PDF 113)
Step 12: Unit commissioning step 08 is compressor preheating confirmation.
If it is detected that the compressor preheating period is more than eight hours, the main board is displayed as follows and the
unit automatically enters the next step.

08_Compressor
The system detects that the compressor preheating period is more
preheating db On 08 On OC On
than eight hours and automatically enters the next step.
confirmation
If it is detected that the compressor preheating period is less than eight hours, an exception is prompted and the main board is
displayed as follows. In this case, press “SW7” to skip the waiting time and automatically enter the next commissioning step.
However, the compressor may be damaged if it is forcibly started.

08_Compressor
The system gives a prompt if the compressor
preheating db On 08 On U0 On
preheating period is less than eight hours.
confirmation
102
Step 13: Unit commissioning step 09 is pre-startup refrigerant confirmation.

If the refrigerant volume meets the system startup requirements, the main board is displayed as follows and the unit automatically
enters the next commissioning step.

09_Pre-startup The system detects that refrigerants are normal and automatically
db On 09 On 0C On
refrigerant detection enters the next step.
If no refrigerant exists in the system or the refrigerant volume does not meet the system startup requirements, “U4 lack of
refrigerant protection” is prompted and the main board is displayed as follows. The unit cannot enter the next commissioning
step. In this case, check for leakage or append refrigerants till the exception disappears.

09_Pre-startup The system detects insuffi cient refrigerants and stops to balance
db On 09 On U4 On
refrigerant detection the pressure lower than 0.3 MPa (45 psig).
Step 14: Unit commissioning step 10 is pre-startup ODU valve status detection.
If the master unit is displayed as follows, it indicates that the unit is being enabled.
COMMISSIONING
OPERATION
10_Pre-startup
ODU valve status db On 10 On ON On Outdoor unit valves are being opened.
detection
If the master unit is displayed as follows, it is required to check again whether the ODU valves are completely opened.

10_Pre-startup
It is required to check again whether the ODU valves are completely
ODU valve status db On 10 On U6 On
opened.
detection
After confirming that all valves are completely opened, press “SW7” to enter the next commissioning step.
If it is detected that the unit valve status is normal, the main board is displayed as follows and the unit automatically enters the
next commissioning step.

10_Pre-startup
ODU valve status db On 10 On OC On Outdoor unit valves have been properly opened.
detection
Step 15: Unit commissioning step 11 is manually calculated refrigerant charging status. Without operations, the system gives a
function prompt and automatically enters the next step.
103
Step 16: Unit commissioning step 12 is unit commissioning startup confirmation.

To avoid enabling the unit before all preparations are completed, it is required to confirm again whether to enable the unit.
If the master unit is displayed as follows, it indicates that the unit is waiting for enabling confirmation.

12_Unit
commissioning
db On 12 On AP Blinking The system waits for a unit commissioning startup command.
startup
confirmation
If it is confirmed to enable the unit, press “SW7”. The main board is displayed as follows and the unit automatically enters the
next commissioning step.

12_Unit
commissioning The unit is set to manually-calculated refrigerant charging
db On 12 On AE On
startup commissioning status.
confirmation
Step 17: After unit startup confirmation, the system automatically selects the cooling or heating mode according to the
environment temperature.
COMMISSIONING
A. If the system selects the cooling mode, the main board is displayed as follows:
OPERATION

The system is in cooling-mode commissioning operation (the

db On 15 On AC On system automatically selects the commissioning operation mode
without needing manual settings).
Corresponding
db On 15 On On A fault occurs on the cooling-mode commissioning operation.
fault code
15_Cooling A fault occurs on other modules during the cooling-mode

db On 15 On J0 On
commissioning commissioning operation.
operation
db On 15 On U9 On A fault occurs on ODU pipes.
The system detects pipe failure of IDU. "XXXX" indicates the

project number of the faulty IDU. The fault code "U8" is displayed
db On 15 On XXXX/U8 On after three seconds. For example, if a U8 fault occurs on IDU 100,
LED3 will circularly display "01", "00" (two seconds later), and "U8"
(two seconds later).
104
B. If the system selects the heating mode, the main board is displayed as follows:

The system is in heating-mode commissioning operation (the

db On 16 On AH On system automatically selects the commissioning operation mode
without needing manual settings).
Corresponding
db On 16 On On A fault occurs on the heating-mode commissioning operation.
fault code
16_Heating A fault occurs on other modules during the heating-mode

db On 16 On J0 On
commissioning commissioning operation.
operation
db On 16 On U9 On A fault occurs on ODU pipes.
The system detects pipe failure of IDU. "XXXX" indicates the

project number of the faulty IDU. The fault code "U8" is displayed
db On 16 On XXXX/U8 On after three seconds. For example, if a U8 fault occurs on IDU 100,
LED3 will circularly display "01", "00" (two seconds later), and "U8"
(two seconds later).
Step 18: If no exception occurs when the unit continuously operates for 40 minutes, the system automatically confirms
commissioning completion, stops the entire unit, and restores the standby status. The main board is displayed as follows:

COMMISSIONING
OPERATION
17_Commissioning The unit has completed commissioning and in standby status. LED1
01~04 On OF On OF On
completion status displays the module address; LED2 and LED3 display "OF".
Step 19: After unit commissioning is completed, set unit functions according to the actual engineering requirements on functions.
For details about the setting method, refer to the “System Function Setting Method” part. Skip this step if there are not special
requirements.
Step 20: Deliver the unit for use and let users know the precautions.
3.2.2 Commissioning Through the Commissioning Software
Step 1: Install commissioning software to the computer and connect monitoring communication cables (for details about the
operation method, see the Lennox VRF Central Air Conditioning Commissioning Software” section).
Step 2: Completely cover the front panel of ODU.
Step 3: In power-off status of ODU, set the ODU to a corresponding static pressure mode according to static pressure design
requirements for outdoor engineering. For details about the setting method, see the “Outdoor Fan Static Pressure Setting DIP
Switch (SA6_ESP_S)” section.
Step 4: In power-off status of ODU, set one module of ODU to master unit. For details about the setting method, see the “Master
Unit Setting DIP Switch (SA8_MASTER-S)” section.
Step 5: Power on all outdoor and IDUs. In this case, all modules of ODU display that the unit is in non-commissioning status.
LED3
105
Step 6: Switch the commissioning software to the For the phase with "OK" displayed, a manual confirmation is
commissioning control interface. required for entering the next commissioning step. Click "
Click “Debug” to switch to the engineering commissioning " to display relevant information detected on this phase, which
interface. The unit will automatically operate the commissioning provides references for selection. Click "Close" to close the
modules listed in this interface from top to bottom and from left information (the number of commissioning units is displayed
to right. Note: The commissioning function only applies to the in "3 Confirm ODU Basic Module NO." and "4 Confirm IDU
single-system network. NO."; the preheating period is displayed in “8 Compr. Preheat
Confirmation").
Click "Start" to enter the commissioning function and the

COMMISSIONING
software automatically performs commissioning. " " indicates

that commissioning is being performed on the phase and " "
OPERATION
indicates that commissioning is passed on the phase.
" " indicates that commissioning is not passed on the phase

and troubleshooting is required (after troubleshooting, the unit
automatically enters the next step if no "OK" exists or click
"OK" to enter the next step). Click " " to display relevant
information detected on this phase, which provides references
for troubleshooting. Click "Close" to close the information.
106
During commissioning, click "Stop" to stop commissioning and At last, engineering commissioning is completed when " " is
then click "Start" to continue commissioning till commissioning displayed on "Project Debug Completion".
ends. "Back" and "Skip" are provided in "10 ODU Valves
Check Before Startup". When an exception occurs in step 10,
click "Back" to return to step 9 and then click "OK" in step 9 to
perform commissioning again for step 10. If a U6 fault (valve
exception) occurs in step 10, users can click "Skip" to skip the
fault. For other faults, "Skip" is unavailable.
Note: During commissioning, users must listen to the operating

sound of outdoor and indoor fans and compressors to check
for exceptions.
3.3 Operations after Commissioning
Sort and save data. Make detailed records of exceptions
and troubleshooting methods during commissioning for later
maintenance and query. At last, make a commissioning report
COMMISSIONING
and hand it over to users.
OPERATION
3.4 Precautions to Let Users Know after Commissioning
(1) Let users know where the master IDU is located and stick a
label to the master IDU. Tell users that modes of other IDUs
are limited by the mode of master IDU.
(2) An ODU that has been in power-off status for more than 24
hours should be preheated for more than eight hours before
startup to prevent damaging compressors.
Commissioning steps 11, 13, and 14 are reserved. Steps 13,

14, 15, and 16 are parallel steps (one of the four steps will be
selected according to the actual unit).
107
IV. References for Proper Unit Operation Parameters
SN Commissioning Item Parameter Name Unit Reference Value
Outdoor environment
1 °C ——
temperature
● When the system compressor is running, the normal discharge pipe or top temperature for cooling is
Discharge pipe temperature of 70-95°C, which is more than 10°C higher than the saturation temperature corresponding to the system
2 °C
compressor high-pressure. The normal temperature for heating is 65-80°C, which is more than 10°C higher than the
saturation temperature corresponding to the system high-pressure.
● When the system runs for cooling, the defrosting temperature is 5-11°C lower than the system high-
pressure value.
3 Defrosting temperature °C
● When the system runs for heating, the defrosting temperature is 2°C higher or lower than the system low-
pressure value.
● The normal system high-pressure value is 20-55°C. With the change of environment temperature and
system operation capacity, the system high-pressure value is 10-40°C higher than the environment
temperature. The higher the environment temperature, the less the temperature difference.
4 System high-pressure °C ● When the system runs for cooling with the environment temperature being 25-35°C, the system high-
pressure value is 44-53°C.
● When the system runs for cooling with the environment temperature being -5 to 10°C, the system high-
pressure value is 40-52°C.
Outdoor unit ● When the system runs for cooling with the environment temperature being 25-35°C, the system low-
parameter pressure value is 0-8°C.
5 System low-pressure °C
● When the system runs for cooling with the environment temperature being -5 to 10°C, the system high-
pressure value is -15 to 5°C.
● During the cooling operation, the heating electronic expansion valves always remain at 480 PLS.
COMMISSIONING
Opening degree of heating

6 PLS ● During the heating operation, the adjustable electronic expansion valves change between 120 and 480
System parameter electronic expansion valves
OPERATION
PLS.
Operation frequency of inverter ● The operation frequency of inverter compressor 1 changes between 20 and 95 Hz.
7 Hz
compressor ● The operation frequency of inverter compressor 2 changes between 30 and 100 Hz.
● According to different operation frequencies and loads, the current of inverter compressor 1 changes
8 Current of inverter compressor A
between 7 and 25 A. The current of inverter compressor 2 changes between 7 and 20 A.
IPM module temperature of ● When the environment temperature is lower than 35°C, the temperature of the IPM module is lower than
9 °C
inverter compressor 80°C. The highest temperature is not higher than 95°C.
● The normal bus line voltage is 1.414 times larger than the power voltage. For example, if the three-phase
Driver bus line voltage of
10 V power voltage is 390 V, the bus line voltage after current rectification is 390 V × 1.414 = 551 V. It is normal
inverter compressor
if the difference between the actual test value and the calculation value is within 15 V.
11 Operation frequency of fan Hz ● With the adjustment of system pressure, the fans run between 0 and 65 Hz.
12 Environment temperature of IDU °C ——
Inlet-tube temperature of
13 °C ● As the environment temperature is different, the inlet-tube temperature is 1-7°C lower than the outlet-tube
indoor heat exchanger
temperature of the same IDU in cooling mode.
Indoor unit
● The inlet-tube temperature is 10-20°C lower than the outlet-tube temperature of the same IDU in heating
parameter Outlet-tube temperature of
14 °C mode.
indoor heat exchanger
Opening degree of indoor

15 PLS The opening degree automatically changes between 0 and 2000 PLS or between 0 and 480 PLS.
electronic expansion valves
Communication ● The commissioning software shows that the number of IDUs/ODUs is consistent with the actual
16 Communication data —
parameter engineering quantity, without communication failure.
● The drainage effect of IDU is smooth and thorough, and no adverse-slope water storage exists in
17 Drainage system —— — condensing drainage pipes. The ODU can implement drainage completely from the drainage pipe, without
drops from the unit foundation.
● No exceptional sound occurs on compressors and indoor/outdoor fans. No fault occurs on the unit
18 Other ——
operation.
108
Maintenance
CONTENTS
Part 1 Failure Code Table.....................................................................................110
Part 2 Exception and Troubleshooting ...............................................................113
Part 3 Key Parts Maintenance .............................................................................150
I. Cautions on Controller AP1 Replacement ........................................................150
II. Compressor Replacement and Cautions.........................................................153
MAINTENANCE
109
Part 1 Failure Code Table

1. System Failure Code Table
Lennox Series VRF Display Code (1)
Content symbol
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Distinctive symbol
Auxiliary Power supply Inconsistent

Indoor unit Indoor fan Water overflow Anti-freezing Power supply
L heating over-current Mode conflict No master IDU number of
fault (unified) protection protection protection shortage
protection protection IDUs
Indoor
Inlet Middle Exhaust
Indoor unit Temperature Humidity Water temperature
d temperature temperature temperature Jumper cap fault
PCB fault sensor fault sensor fault sensor fault
sensor fault sensor fault sensor fault
Content symbol
A H C L E F J P U b d n y
Distinctive symbol
Inconsistent Mismatching
Warning about
L series of multi-split indoor and
poor air quality
IDUs ODU models
Indoor
Air outlet
Indoor unit network Wired controller Volume dial switch Indoor CO2 Project
d temperature
address exception PCB exception setting exception sensor fault commissioning
sensor fault
Content symbol
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Distinctive symbol
High exhaust High exhaust High exhaust High exhaust High exhaust
Low exhaust High exhaust
Outdoor unit High-pressure Low-pressure temperature temperature temperature temperature temperature
E temperature temperature
fault (unified) protection protection protection for protection for protection for protection for protection for
protection protection
compressor 1 compressor 2 compressor 3 compressor 4 compressor 5
Outdoor
MAINTENANCE
Compressor 1 Compressor 2 Compressor 3 Compressor 4 Compressor 5

Outdoor unit main
High pressure Low pressure exhaust exhaust exhaust exhaust exhaust
F board
sensor fault sensor fault temperature temperature temperature temperature temperature
fault
sensor fault sensor fault sensor fault sensor fault sensor fault
CN54
Content symbol
Distinctive symbol
Exhaust Exhaust Exhaust Exhaust Exhaust Exhaust

High exhaust High cover High cover
temperature temperature temperature temperature temperature temperature
temperature temperature temperature
E sensor falling sensor falling sensor falling sensor falling sensor falling sensor falling
protection for protection for protection for
protection for protection for protection for protection for protection for protection for
compressor 6 compressor 1 compressor 2
compressor 1 compressor 2 compressor 3 compressor 4 compressor 5 compressor 6
Outdoor
Compressor Compressor 1 Compressor 2

Compressor 1 Compressor 2 Compressor 3 Compressor 4 Compressor 5 Compressor 6
6 exhaust cover cover
F current sensor current sensor current sensor current sensor current sensor current sensor
temperature temperature temperature
fault fault fault fault fault fault
sensor fault sensor fault sensor fault
CN55
110
Lennox VRF Display Code (3)
Content symbol
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Distinctive symbol
Over-current Over-current Over-current Over-current Over-current Over-current Four-way High system Low system
Other module
J protection for protection for protection for protection for protection for protection for valve leakage pressure ratio pressure ratio
protection
compressor 1 compressor 2 compressor 3 compressor 4 compressor 5 compressor 6 protection protection protection
Outdoor Malfunction of Malfunction of

Outdoor Subcooler Subcooler Heat exchanger
Defrosting Defrosting inlet tube outlet tube
ambient outflow exhaust Outdoor humidity exhaust
b temperature temperature temperature temperature
temperature temperature temperature sensor fault temperature
sensor 1 fault sensor 2 fault sensor of Gas/ sensor of Gas/
sensor fault |ensor fault sensor fault sensor fault
Liquid Separator Liquid Separator
CN52 CN56 CN57 CN56
RT7, RT8 RT4: White, RT5: Black, RT6: Blue
Lennox VRF Display Code (3)
Content symbol
Distinctive symbol
Exceptional Water flow switch Low high pressure

J
pressure protection protection protection
Outdoor Cover temperature Cover temperature

Oil return
System clock sensor falling sensor falling
b temperature
exception protection for protection for
sensor fault
compressor 1 compressor 2
Content symbol
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Distinctive symbol
Compressor
Compressor Compressor driver board Inverter Compressor Inverter
Compressor Compressor Compressor
driver board driver board power voltage Compressor drive compressor drive IPM compressor
P drive module drive IPM module drive temperature
MAINTENANCE
fault (displayed failure (displayed protection PFC protection over-current over-temperature out-of-step
reset protection protection sensor fault
on the IDU) on the IDU) (displayed on protection protection protection
the IDU)
Outdoor
Fan driver
Fan driver Fan driver Variable Variable
board power Fan drive Fan drive IPM
board fault board failure Fan drive module Fan drive PFC frequency fan Fan drive IPM frequency
H voltage protection temperature over-temperature
(displayed on (displayed reset protection protection over-current module protection fan out-of-step
(displayed on sensor fault protection
the IDU) on the IDU) protection protection
the IDU)
Content symbol
Distinctive symbol
Inverter Compressor Compressor Compressor Inverter Inverter

Compressor Inverter
compressor drive DC bus drive current drive DC bus compressor compressor
P drive recharging compressor
drive storage high voltage detection circuit low voltage out-of-phase AC current
circuit fault starting failure
chip fault protection fault protection protection protection
Outdoor
Variable Variable Variable
Fan drive DC Fan drive Fan drive DC Fan drive Variable
frequency fan frequency frequency fan
H bus high voltage current detection bus low voltage recharging frequency fan
drive storage fan out-of-phase AC current
protection circuit fault protection circuit fault starting failure
chip fault protection protection
111
Content symbol
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Distinctive symbol
Wrong ODU Wrong

Deficient Power phase Refrigerant
capacity code/ compressor Valve exception Indoor unit Outdoor unit
Commissioning U preheating of sequence shortage
jumper cap drive board warning pipeline fault pipeline fault
the compressor protection protection
setting address
Content symbol
Distinctive symbol
Wrong compressor
Invalid refrigerant
Commissioning U Master IDU is set emergency
injection
operation dial
Content symbol
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Distinctive symbol
The unit is not After-sales Cooling and

A Defrosting Oil recycling Silent mode setting Vacuum mode
commissioned. refrigerant recycling heating setting
Status
Upper
Economic mode Maximum output Unit parameter Indoor unit project
n indoor/outdoor Unite fault enquiry
setting capacity enquiry number enquiry
capacity ratio
Content symbol
Distinctive symbol
MAINTENANCE
Unit starting Remote

Refrigerant Filter cleaning Emergency Restricted
A Heating Cooling Ventilation commissioning emergency
injecting reminder shutdown operation
confirmation shutdown
Status
Cooling
Heating Cooling Ventilation
n and heating Negative code
model model model
model
For example, when E4 is displayed on the ODU, find line E and column 4 in the above tables. The fault is shown in the
intersection of the line and column: High exhaust temperature protection.
Note: Previous faults in the system can be queried on the main board of the ODU and commissioning software. See n6 Fault
Enquiry of the ODU or enquiry function of the commissioning software for the method.
112
Part 2 Exception and Troubleshooting

1. How to locate a faulty IDU promptly
Use the IDU project number enquiry and faulty IDU locating function to locate a faulty IDU or
wired controller’s corresponding IDU as follows when multiple IDUs are running in one place:
1 2 3
Long press FUNCTION for five seconds Press “ ” to show parameter code C01. Press “ ” or “ ” to switch between
when the conditioner is on or off to new indoor units.
parameters.
4 5 6
MAINTENANCE
Press MODE to view units’ engineering Press ENTER/CANCEL (Note 2) to Press ENTER/CANCEL or ON/OFF to
numbers and failures. The engineering quit the interface of the indoor unit’s quite the parameter interface.
number is shown in the timer area, engineering number and failure and
while the failure code is shown in the return to the previous interface.
temperature area (Note 1). Meanwhile,
the corresponding failing indoor unit’s
buzzer buzzes.
C01 Indoor project number and fault enquiry

Note 1: If the enquired IDU is normal, no fault code will be displayed in the temperature area; if the unit indoor has multiple faults,
fault codes will be displayed in the temperature area at an interval of 3 seconds.
Note 2: Press the “ON/OFF” button on the interface of IDU project number and fault enquiry to exist the parameter enquiry
interface.
113
2. Exception Analyzing and Troubleshooting

(1). Form analyzing
1). Control
Fault code Fault Possible reasons Solution
Faults in the ODU's

1. The clock chip on the main board is damaged. 1. Replace the small CPU board.
main board (such as
F0 2. The memory chip on the main board is damaged. 2. Replace the control board.
memory and address
3. The address chip on the main board is damaged. 3. Replace the control board.
chip exceptions)
1. If the compressor is not started, check if the AC contact is closed. If not, replace the AC contact.
Faults in the constant 1. The constant-frequency compressor is not started.
2. If the connection is loose, reconnect it;
FC frequency compressor's 2. The current detection board is faulty.
3. Replace the current detection board.
current sensor 3. The main board's detection circuit is faulty.
4. Replace the main board.
Wrong outdoor capacity 1. The capacity code is wrong. 1, Modify the capacity code setting.
U2
code setting 2. The dial component is faulty. 2. Replace the main board.
1. The three-phase power cable is not connected

Power phase sequence 1. Check connection of the power cable.
U3 correctly.
protection 2. Replace the control board.
2. The main board's detection circuit is faulty.
Wrong emergency 1. The dial setting is wrong. 1. Modify the dial setting.
UL
operation dial code 2. The dial component is faulty. 2. Replace the main board.
If C0 is not displayed on the control board of the ODU, check the network between the IDU and communicator. If C0 is
displayed, check the network between the IDUs and ODUs and between the IDU and communicator as follows:
1. Check if the cables connecting the control board of the ODU and the IDU and connecting the IDU and communicator
Communication failure 1. The communication cable is not connected.
are loose. If yes, reconnect them;
between indoor and 2. The communicator is disconnected.
C0 2. Check if the cables connecting the control board and IDU and connecting the IDU and communicator are broken. If
ODUs and IDU's 3. The communication cable is poorly connected.
yes, replace the cables;
communicator 4. The communicator controller is faulty.
3. Check the contact of the communication cables;
3. Replace the control board. If the fault is solved, the control board is faulty. Replace the IDU. If the fault is solved, the
IDU is faulty.
1. Check if the cable connecting the control board and the compressor's drive board is loose. If yes, reconnect it;
2. Check if the cable connecting the control board and compressor's drive board is broken. If yes, replace the cable;
between main control 2. The communicator is disconnected.
C2 3. Check the contact of the communication cable connecting the control board and compressor's drive board;
board and inverter 3. The communication cable is poorly connected.
4. Replace the control board. If the fault is solved, the control board is faulty. Replace the compressor's drive board. If
compressor drive 4. The communicator is faulty.
MAINTENANCE
the fault is solved, the compressor's drive board is faulty.
1. Check if the cable connecting the fan's drive board and the compressor's drive board is loose. If yes, reconnect it;
2. Check if the cable connecting the fan's drive board and compressor's drive board is broken. If yes, replace the cable;
between main control 2. The communicator is disconnected.
C3 3. Check the contact of the communication cable connecting the fan's drive board and compressor's drive board;
board and variable 3. The communication cable is poorly connected.
4. Replace the control board. If the fault is solved, the control board is faulty. Replace the fan's drive board. If the fault is
frequency fan drive 4. The communicator is faulty.
solved, the fan's drive board is faulty.
Indoor unit project number

C5 Project numbers conflict with each other. Change conflicting project numbers and ensure that no IDU's project number is repeated.
conflict warning
1. Communication cables between ODUs are loose.

1. If the communication cable is loose, reconnect it;
2. Communication cables between ODUs are broken.
Outdoor unit number 2. If the communication cable is broken, replace it;
C6 3. Communication cables between ODUs are poorly
inconsistency warning 3. Check contact of the communication cable;
connected.
4. Replace the control board.
4. The control board is faulty.
1. The SA8 dial switch of the ODU is not switched to 00. 1. Switch the SA8 dial switch of an ODU to 00;
CC No controlling unit
2. The SA8 dial switch of the ODU is faulty. 2. Replace the control board or switch an ODU's SA8 dial switch to 00.
1. SA8 dial switches of multiple ODUs are switched to 00. 1. Leave one SA8 dial switch unchanged, while switch all the other dial switches to 11;
CF Multiple controlling units
2. Dial switches of multiple ODUs are faulty. 2. Replace the control board.
114
1. Check if the master IDU is powered on. If yes, replace the main board;
1. The master IDU is powered off.
2. Check the contact of the communication cable of the master IDU. If no communication failure (C0) is reported, replace
2. The communication of the master IDU fails.
L7 No master IDU the main board.
3. The main board of the master IDU is faulty.
3. Replace the IDU's main board and reset the master IDU.
4. No master IDU is set in the system.
4. Set the master IDU.
C5 Project number conflict Multiple IDUs share one project number. Reset the repeated project number (useful when there is no centralized control of multiple systems).
Note: Solution of C5 fault when multiple cooling systems are controlled in a centralized way
When multiple cooling systems are controlled in a centralized way, the C5 fault, i.e. project number conflict,
may occur on different cooling systems. In such case, set project numbers of each system and solve the fault
as follows:
Project number confl ict:
When multiple systems are controlled in a centralized way, if two or more IDUs share the same project
number, the engineer number confl ict occurs. In that case, IDUs cannot be switched to varied modes or
be turned on or off. The whole device cannot be started before the confl ict is solved. The commissioning
software will show the following page:
MAINTENANCE
Figure 1
115
b, Solution of project number conflict:

a). Manual setting on the
commissioning software:
Use the commissioning software to set
IDUs’ project numbers separately in
every system or reset projects numbers
in multiple systems.
Choose Setting -> Parameter Settings,
as shown in Figure 2.
If project commissioning is finished
and the IDU where the conflict occurs
needs to be set separately. Click Project
Number Conflict, as shown in Figure 3.
The pop-up box comprises two parts:
conflicting IDU box, showing the IDU’s
project number, system number and
time; setting box, showing the IDU
project number setting and setting
button.
Figure 2.
Choose one IDU in the conflicting IDU
box shown in Figure 3 and click Set in
the setting box. Choose a value in the
pop-up box shown in Figure 4 and click
Set.
Figure 3.
MAINTENANCE
Figure 4.
116
If the conflict is solved, the system will

return to the normal status and IDUs can
be operated, as shown in Figure 5:
If project commissioning is not finished
and all the IDUs’ project numbers need
to be reset, click Set All IDUs Project
Number shown in Figure 2. As shown in
Figure 6, the pop-up box comprises two
parts: Systems Selection, where you can
choose the system to be reset; Settings
box, where you can give the resetting
instruction.
Choose one or multiple systems in the
Systems Selection box and click Set in
the Settings box, as shown in Figure 6.
Click Set, as shown in Figure 7.
If the conflict is solved, the system will
return to the normal status and IDUs can
be operated as shown in Figure 5.
Figure 5
Figure 6
MAINTENANCE
Figure 7
b). Manual setting on the communicator and remote controller:

When the project number conflict occurs, you can use the communicator or remote
controller to revise project numbers and solve the conflict. See the manual of the
communicator or remote controller for the method.
117
c). Setting of auto project number deviation on ODU’s main board (recommended)
You can set auto IDU project number deviation via the ODU’s main board as follows:
1. After the whole system is commissioned, short press SW3 on the controlling unit and the
system will enter the standby status as follows:
LED1 LED2 LED3

Function Code LED Status Progress LED Status Status LED Status
A7 Flicker 00 Flicker 00 Flicker
n0 Flicker 01 Flicker 00 Flicker
2. Press SW2 (▼) on the controlling unit and select n5. Short press SW7 to show the following information:
LED1 LED2 LED3
Function Code LED Status Progress LED Status Status LED Status
n5 Solid On 00 Flicker OC Flicker
3. When project number deviation is to be confirmed, short press SW7 confirmation button to
enter the project number deviation status as shown in the following:
LED1 LED2 LED3

Function Code LED Status Current Progress/Mode LED Status Status LED Status
n5 Solid On 00 Solid On OC Solid On
IDU project numbers in all systems will automatically deviate. The conflict will be solved in about
1 minute and the system will work properly.
MAINTENANCE
The automatic deviation function only works when it is enabled on the controlling unit in the
system, of which the centralized control address is 00000.
Note: When there are only a few conflicting IDUs, manual setting is recommended. This method
only applies to conflicting IDUs and does only affect other IDUs’ project numbers.
In case of many conflicting IDUs, auto deviation is recommended. This method is faster, but may
change project numbers of normal IDUs. This method applies for the first commissioning after
installation.
1. Check the power supply of the control board. Replace the control board if it
1. The control board is powered off;
works properly;
Communication failure The compressor drive board is powered off;
2. Check the power supply of the drive board. Replace the drive board if it
C2 between main control board 2. The communication cable between the control board and compressor drive
works properly;
and inverter compressor drive board is not connected;
3. Connect the main board and drive board using the communication cable;
3. The compressor drive board's dial switch SA201 is wrong.
4. Adjust the dial switch of the compressor drive board.
Compressor drive module

P3 The compressor drive board is faulty. Replace the compressor drive board.
reset protection
1. The drive board's IPM module is damaged; 1. Replace the compressor drive board;
Inverter compressor over-current
P5 2. The compressor's UVW cable is not connected properly; 2. Reconnect the compressor's UVW cable;
protection
3. The compressor is damaged. 3. Replace the compressor.
118
1. The drive board's IPM module is damaged; 1. Replace the compressor drive board;
Compressor drive IPM
P6 2. The compressor's UVW cable is not connected properly; 2. Reconnect the compressor's UVW cable;
module protection
Compressor drive temperature

P7 The compressor drive board is faulty. Replace the compressor drive board.
sensor fault
1. The compressor drive board is faulty; 1. Replace the compressor drive board;
Compressor drive IPM
P8 2. Thermal gel is not applied evenly on the IPM module; 2. Apply thermal gel evenly on the IPM module;
over-temperature protection
3. The IPM module is not screwed properly. 3. Screw the IPM module properly.
Inverter compressor out-of-step 1. The compressor drive board is faulty. 1. Replace the compressor drive board.
P9
protection 2. The compressor is damaged. 2. Replace the compressor.
Compressor drive DC bus 1. Does the voltage of the input power cable of the whole system exceed 460 V; 1. Lower the voltage of the input power cable to the required range;
PH
high voltage protection 2. The compressor drive board is faulty. 2. Replace the compressor drive board.
Compressor drive DC bus 1. Is the voltage of the input power cable of the whole system lower than 320 V; 1. Elevate the voltage of the input power cable to the required range;
PL
low voltage protection 2. The compressor drive board is faulty. 2. Replace the compressor drive board.
Compressor drive current check

PC The compressor drive board is faulty. Replace the compressor drive board.
circuit fault
Compressor drive recharging 1. Is the voltage of the input power cable of the whole system lower than 280 V; 1. Elevate the voltage of the input power cable to the required range;
PF
circuit fault 2. The compressor drive board is faulty. 2. Replace the compressor drive board.
1. The drive board is damaged; 1. Replace the compressor drive board;

PJ Inverter compressor starting failure 2. The compressor's UVW cable is not connected properly; 2. Reconnect the compressor's UVW cable;
1. Check the power supply of the control board. Replace the control board if it
1. The control board is powered off;
works properly;
Communication failure 2. The fan drive board is powered off;
2. Check the power supply of the drive board. Replace the drive board if it
C3 between main control board 3. The communication cable between the control board and fan drive board is
works properly;
and variable frequency fan drive not connected;
3. Connect the main board and drive board using the communication cable;
4. The fan drive board's dial switch is wrong.
4. Adjust the dial switch of the fan drive board.
H3 Fan drive module reset protection The fan drive board is faulty. Replace the fan drive board.
1. The fan drive board's IPM module is damaged; 1. Replace the fan drive board;
Variable frequency fan
H5 2. The fan's UVW cable is not connected properly; 2. Reconnect the fan's UVW cable;
over-current protection
3. The fan is damaged. 2. Replace the fan.
MAINTENANCE
1. The fan drive board's IPM module is damaged; 1. Replace the fan drive board;
H6 Fan drive IPM module protection 2. The fan's UVW cable is not connected properly; 2. Reconnect the fan's UVW cable;
H7 Fan drive temperature sensor fault The fan drive board is faulty. Replace the fan drive board.
1. The fan drive board is faulty; 1. Replace the fan drive board;
Fan drive IPM
H8 2. Thermal gel is not applied evenly on the IPM module; 2. Apply thermal gel evenly on the IPM module;
over-temperature protection
3. The IPM module is not screwed properly. 3. Screw the IPM module properly.
Variable frequency fan 1. The fan drive board is faulty. 1. Replace the fan drive board.
H9
out-of-step protection 2. The fan is damaged. 2. Replace the fan.
Fan drive DC bus 1. Does the voltage of the input power cable of the whole system exceed 460 V; 1. Lower the voltage of the input power cable to the required range;
HH
high voltage protection 2. The fan drive board is faulty. 2. Replace the fan drive board.
1. Elevate the voltage of the input power cable to the required range;
1. Is the voltage of the input power cable of the whole system lower than 320 V;
Fan drive DC bus 2. Connect the fan drive board with the compressor drive board according to
HL 2. Is the fan drive board well connected with the compressor drive board;
low voltage protection the wiring diagram;
3. The fan drive board is faulty.
3. Replace the fan drive board.
HC Fan drive current detection circuit fault The fan drive board is faulty. Replace the fan drive board.
1. The drive board is damaged; 1. Replace the fan drive board;

Variable frequency fan
HJ 2. The fan's UVW cable is not connected properly; 2. Reconnect the fan's UVW cable;
starting failure
119
2. System faults
2.1 System exhaust temperature exception
Possible reasons
Fault Primary reason Secondary reason Tertiary reason
Fault Solution
code
Confirmation
Description Confirmation method Description Confirmation method Description
method
1. The stop valve of

Fully open the stop
the ODU is not fully —— —— —— —— Manual check
valve.
opened as required.
2.1.1 The control

Connect the electronic
wire of the electronic
expansion valve's
expansion valve is not Manual check
Reset the IDU. Listen to control wire to the
connected to the main
2.1 The controlling of the sound and touch the main board.
board.
electronic expansion valve tube to see if the electronic
When the IDU is working in the cooling
by main board of indoor expansion valve is reset.
mode and the electronic expansion 2.1.2 The control wire
unit is abnormal. If it is set, it is normal. Repair or replace the
valve is opened to 2000PLS, the that connects the
Otherwise, it is faulty. control wire of the
exhaust temperature of the IDU's coil is electronic expansion Manual check
2. The IDU's electronic expansion
more than 15°C higher than the inlet valve to the main
electronic expansion valve.
temperature; when the IDU is working board is broken.
valve is not working
in the heating mode and the electronic
properly.
expansion valve is opened to 2000PLS, Clean the system and
the inlet temperature of the IDU's coil is 2.2.1 Affected by clear the impurities.
more than 10°C higher than the inlet impurities in the —— Replace the body
temperature; 2.2 The electronic system of the electronic
expansion valve in the Other reasons expansion valve.
mode switcher is faulty.
Replace the body
2.2.2 The valve body is
—— of the electronic
faulty.
expansion valve.
3.1 The liquid pipe is Touch the pipe along the Replace and solder
High exhaust flowing direction of refrigerant —— ——
blocked. the pipe.
E4 temperature to feel the temperature
protection difference. The difference is
3.2 The gas pipe is large or part of the pipe is Replace and solder
—— ——
The system's exhaust temperature blocked. frosting. the pipe.
3. The system
rises and the low pressure is too low
pipeline is blocked.
(compared with the reference value). Touch the pipe along the 3.3.1 The block is Replace and solder
MAINTENANCE
flowing direction of refrigerant caused by solder. Cut off the pipe.

3.3 The pipe that connects to feel the temperature the pipe to
the IDU is blocked. difference. The difference is see if it
large or part of the pipe is 3.3.2 The pipeline is is blocked. Replace and solder
frosting. blocked by impurities. the pipe.
Inject refrigerant as
4.1 Not enough refrigerant —— —— ——
required.
The system's exhaust temperature
4. Lacking
rises and the low pressure is too low Use the refrigerant leak Stop the leak. Pump
refrigerant 4.2 Refrigerant pipe
(compared with the reference value). detector to detect the leak —— —— out air and inject
leakage
along the pipe. refrigerant again.
Stop the whole system. Test the

system's balance pressure 20 minutes
Discharge existing
later and convert the pressure into the
5. Wrong refrigerant refrigerant and inject
corresponding saturation temperature. —— —— —— ——
is injected. the correct refrigerant
Compare it with the outdoor ambient
as required.
temperature. If the difference is larger
than 5°C, it is exceptional.
6. Exhaust Replace the

temperature sensor —— —— —— temperature sensor or
failure main board.
120
Possible reasons
Fault Solution
code
Confirmation
Description Confirmation method Description Confirmation method Description
method
7. The ambient
temperature It is a normal
High exhaust The outdoor ambient
exceeds the scope Measure the ambient phenomenon caused
E4 temperature —— temperature exceeds —— ——
of temperature temperature. by the protection
protection 50°C.
required for safe function.
operation.
1.2.1 The control

expansion valve's
Reset the ODU. Listen to control wire to the
1.2 The controlling heating connected to the main
the sound and touch the main board.
electronic expansion board.
When the system is working tube to see if the electronic
of the main board or the
in the heating mode and the ODU's expansion valve is reset.
electronic expansion valve 1.2.2 The control wire
electronic expansion valve is opened to If it is set, it is normal. Repair or replace the
of the subcooler is faulty. that connects the
100PLS, the inlet temperature of the Otherwise, it is faulty. control wire of the
1. The ODU's electronic expansion Manual check
corresponding liquid-gas separator is electronic expansion
electronic expansion valve to the main
more than 1°C lower than the low- valve.
valve is not working board is broken.
pressure saturation temperature and the
properly.
difference between the compressor's
Clean the system and
exhaust temperature or cover
1.3.1 Affected by clear the impurities.
temperature and the high-pressure
impurities in the —— Replace the body
temperature is smaller than 10°C. 1.3 The body of the system of the electronic
electronic expansion valve Other reasons expansion valve.
is not working properly.
Replace the body
1.3.2 The body of the
valve is faulty.
expansion valve.
2.1.1 The control

expansion valve's
Reset the IDU. Listen to control wire to the
connected to the main
2.1 The controlling of the sound and touch the main board.
Low exhaust board.
electronic expansion valve tube to see if the electronic
E2 temperature When the system is working
by main board of indoor expansion valve is reset.
protection in the cooling mode and the ODU's 2.1.2 The control wire
unit is abnormal. If it is set, it is normal. Repair or replace the
electronic expansion valve is opened that connecting
Otherwise, it is faulty. control wire of the
to 200PLS, the exhaust temperature of the electronic Manual check
MAINTENANCE
2. The IDU's electronic expansion
the IDU's coil is more than 1°C lower expansion valve to the
electronic expansion valve.
than the inlet pipe's temperature and main board is broken.
valve is not working
the difference between
properly
the compressor's exhaust temperature Clean the system and
or cover temperature and the high- 2.2.1 Affected by clear the impurities.
pressure temperature impurities in the —— Replace the body
is smaller than 10°C. 2.2 The body of the system of the electronic
electronic expansion valve Other reasons expansion valve.
is not working properly.
Replace the body
2.2.2 The valve body is
faulty.
expansion valve.
3. Exhaust Replace the

temperature sensor —— —— —— —— —— temperature sensor or
failure main board.
Check the necessary

amount of refrigerant
4. Too much Incorrect quantity of and discharge the
Other reasons —— —— ——
refrigerant refrigerant is injected. unneeded refrigerant
slowly via the stop
valve of the fluid pipe.
121
2.2 Pressure
Possible reasons
Fault Solution
code Confirmation Confirmation
Description Description Confirmation method Description
method method

Manual
the ODU is not fully —— —— —— —— Fully open the stop valve.
check
opened as required.
2.1.1 The block is caused by

Touch the pipe along the flowing direction of Cut off the Replace and solder the pipe.
2.1. The system gas solder.
refrigerant to feel the temperature difference. pipe and
pipeline is blocked. 2.1.2 The pipeline is blocked
The difference is large. check it. Replace and solder the pipe.
by impurities.
The system's
exhaust pressure Touch the pipe along the flowing direction of
rises and the low 2.2 The fluid pipe is refrigerant to feel the temperature difference.
2. The system —— —— Replace and solder the pipe.
pressure is too blocked. The difference is large or part of the pipe is
low (compared frosting.
with the reference
value). 2.4.1 The block is caused by
Touch the pipe along the flowing direction of Replace and solder the pipe.
2.4 The pipe that solder. Cut off the
refrigerant to feel the temperature difference.
connects the IDU is pipe and
The difference is large or part of the pipe is
blocked. 2.4.2 The pipeline is blocked check it.
frosting. Replace and solder the pipe.
by impurities.
3.1 In the cooling mode, It is a normal phenomenon

the outdoor temperature Measure the outdoor ambient temperature. —— —— caused by the protection
is over 50°C. function.
3. The ambient
temperature is too —— 3.2 In the heating
high. mode, the actual It is a normal phenomenon
Measure the temperature of the unit's return air.
High pressure ambient temperature of —— —— caused by the protection
E1 the IDU's return air is function.
protection
over 30°C.
Stop the whole system. Test the system's

balance pressure 20 minutes later and convert
4.1 The high pressure the pressure into the corresponding saturation Replace the high pressure
—— ——
sensor is faulty. temperature. Compare it with the outdoor sensor.
ambient temperature. If the difference is larger
4. The pressure
MAINTENANCE
——
sensor is faulty. Connect the access valve of the module fluid
pipe and gas pipe to the high and low pressure
4.2 The high pressure
gauges and transform the readings into
and low pressure Reconnect the high- and low-
corresponding temperatures. Compare them to —— ——
sensors are connected press26ure sensors.
the high- and low-temperatures tested by the
reversely.
system. If the difference is larger than 5°C, it
is exceptional.
5.1.1 The pressure switch is

—— not connected to the main —— Reconnect it.
5.1 The high pressure board.
E1 protection is switch is not connected
5. The high pressure displayed on the to the main board. 5.1.2 The connect wire
switch is faulty. unit when it is —— between the pressure switch —— Reconnect them with the wire.
powered on. and main board is faulty.

—— —— —— Replace the pressure switch.
switch is damaged.
122
Possible reasons
Fault Solution
code Confirmation Confirmation
method method
6.1.1 The power cable

Manual Reconnect the motor with the
connecting the motor and
check power cable.
main board is loose.
6.1 The IDU's fan is
Manual check 6.1.2 The electric capacity
faulty. Manual Connect or replace the electric
is not connected or is
check capacity.
damaged.
Other
6.1.3 The motor is damaged. Replace the motor.
reasons
A. The ODU's fan
6.2.1 The fan motor is not
does not work
properly connected with the Manual
in the cooling Reconnect it properly.
6. The fan is not control board of the motor check
mode. B. The
working properly. with the power cable.
IDU's motor does
High pressure not work in the
E1 6.2.2 The fan motor is not
protection heating mode.
properly connected with the
6.2 The ODU's fan is Manual
Manual check control board of the motor Reconnect it properly.
faulty. check
with the signal feedback
cable.
6.2.3 The control board of Manual Replace the control board of

the fan's motor is damaged. check the motor.
6.2.4 The main board of the Other

Replace the motor.
fan's motor is damaged. reasons
Check the necessary amount of

7. Too much Incorrect quantity of refrigerant and discharge
Other reasons —— —— ——
refrigerant refrigerant is injected. unneeded refrigerant slowly via
the stop valve of the liquid pipe.
1.1 The outdoor

It is a normal phenomenon
ambient temperature
Measure the outdoor ambient temperature. —— —— caused by the protection
in the cooling mode is
1. The ambient function.
lower than -10°C.
temperature ——
Low high
exceeds the range. 1.2 The indoor ambient
MAINTENANCE
JL pressure It is a normal phenomenon
temperature in the Measure the temperature of the unit's return air.
protection —— —— caused by the protection
heating mode is lower
function.
than 5°C.
2. Not enough Locate the leak and inject

——
refrigerant refrigerant.

Manual
the ODU is not fully —— —— —— —— Fully open the stop valve.
check
opened as required.
2.1.1 The block is caused by

Touch the pipe along the flowing direction of Cut off the Replace and solder the pipe.
2.1. The system gas solder.
refrigerant to feel the temperature difference. pipe and
pipeline is blocked. 2.1.2 The pipeline is blocked
The difference is large. check it. Replace and solder the pipe.
by impurities.
The system's
Low-pressure
E3 exhaust pressure Touch the pipe along the flowing direction of
Protection
rises and the low 2.2 The fluid pipe is refrigerant to feel the temperature difference.
2. The system —— —— Replace and solder the pipe.
pressure is too blocked. The difference is large or part of the pipe is
low (compared frosting.
with the reference
value). 2.4.1 The block is caused by
Touch the pipe along the flowing direction of Replace and solder the pipe.
2.4 The pipe that solder. Cut off the
refrigerant to feel the temperature difference.
connects the IDU is pipe and
The difference is large or part of the pipe is
blocked. 2.4.2 The pipeline is blocked check it.
frosting. Replace and solder the pipe.
by impurities.
123
2.2 Pressure exception
Possible reasons

Fault Solution
code
Confirmation Confirmation
method method
3.1 The outdoor

3. The ambient It is a normal phenomenon
ambient temperature
temperature is too —— Measure the outdoor ambient temperature. —— —— caused by the protection
is lower than -25°C in
low. function.
the heating mode.
Stop the whole system. Test the system's

balance pressure 20 minutes later and convert
4.1 The low pressure the pressure into the corresponding saturation Replace the high pressure
—— ——
sensor is faulty. temperature. Compare it with the outdoor sensor.
Low-pressure
E3 ambient temperature. If the difference is larger
Protection
4. The pressure
——
sensor is faulty. Connect the access valves (Schrader valves)
of the module high- and low-pressure pipes to
the high and low pressure gauges and
and low pressure Reconnect the high- and low-
transform the readings into corresponding —— ——
sensors are connected pressure sensors.
temperatures. Compare them to the high- and
reversely.
low-temperatures tested by the system. If the
difference is larger than 5°C, it is exceptional.
6.1.1 The power cable

Manual Reconnect the motor with the
connecting the motor and
check power cable.
main board is loose.
6.1 The IDU's fan is

Manual check 6.1.2 The electric capacity is Manual Connect or replace the electric
faulty.
not connected or is damaged. check capacity.
Other
6.1.3 The motor is damaged. Replace the motor.
reasons
A. The IDU's fan
does not work in 6.2.1 The fan motor is not
Manual
6. The fan is not the cooling mode. properly connected with the Reconnect it properly.
check
working properly. B. The ODU's fan control board of the motor.
does not work in
Low-pressure the heating mode. 6.2.2 The fan motor is not
MAINTENANCE
E3 properly connected with the

Protection Manual
6.2 The ODU's fan is control board of the motor Reconnect it properly.
Manual check check
faulty. with the communication
feedback cable.
6.2.3 The control board of the Manual Replace the control board of
fan's motor is damaged. check the motor.
6.2.4 The main board of the Other

Replace the motor.
fan's motor is damaged. reasons
Check the necessary amount

of refrigerant and inject
7. Not enough Incorrect quantity of
Other reasons —— —— —— refrigerant slowly via the stop
refrigerant refrigerant is injected.
valve of the low-pressure
gas pipe.
124
2.3 Poor cooling/heating performance
Possible reasons
Feedback Primary reason Secondary reason Tertiary reason
Exception Solution
from user
Confirmation Confirmation
method method
1. The stop valve

of the ODU is not
—— —— —— —— Manual check Fully open the stop valve.
fully opened as
A. When the IDU is working required.
in the cooling mode and the
Touch the pipe along the 2.1.1 The block is caused by
electronic expansion valve Replace and solder the pipe.
flowing direction of refrigerant solder.
is opened to 2000PLS, the 2.1. The system gas Cut off the pipe
to feel the temperature
exhaust temperature of pipeline is blocked. and check it.
difference. The difference is 2.1.2 The pipeline is blocked
the IDU's coil is more than 5° Replace and solder the pipe.
large. by impurities.
C higher than the inlet
Poor
temperature; B. when the IDU Touch the pipe along the
heating/
is working in the heating mode flowing direction of refrigerant to
cooling 2. The system 2.2 The fluid pipe is
and the electronic expansion feel the temperature difference. —— —— Replace and solder the pipe.
valve is opened to 2PLS, the pipeline is —— blocked.
The difference is large or part of
inlet temperature of the IDU's blocked.
the pipe is frosting.
coil is more than 12°C lower
than the saturation Touch the pipe along the 2.4.1 The block is caused by
temperature corresponding to flowing direction of refrigerant Replace and solder the pipe.
2.4 The pipe that solder.
the high pressure; to feel the temperature Cut off the pipe
connects the IDU is
difference. The difference is and check it.
blocked. 2.4.2 The pipeline is blocked
large or part of the pipe is Replace and solder the pipe.
by impurities.
frosting.
3.1 The ambient 3.1.1 The system has worked

—— It is a normal phenomenon.
temperature of the for less than 1 hour.
Measure the outdoor ambient
IDU that works in the
temperature.
cooling mode is higher 3.1.2 An improper system is Choose another system with
——
than 32°C. selected. larger power.
3.2 The outdoor

ambient temperature Measure the outdoor ambient
—— —— It is a normal phenomenon.
in the cooling mode is temperature.
3. The ambient
higher than 40°C.
temperature
——
exceeds the
3.3 The ambient 3.3.1 The system has worked
required range. —— It is a normal phenomenon.
A. When the IDU is working temperature of the for less than 2 hours.
MAINTENANCE
Measure the outdoor ambient
in the cooling mode and the IDU that works in the
temperature.
electronic expansion valve is heating mode is lower 3.3.2 An improper system is Choose another system with
——
opened to 2000PLS, the than 12°C. selected. larger power.
exhaust temperature of
the IDU's coil is more than 5° 3.4 The outdoor
C higher than the inlet ambient temperature Measure the outdoor ambient
Poor —— —— It is a normal phenomenon.
temperature; B. when the IDU in the heating mode is temperature.
heating/ lower than -7°C.
is working in the heating mode
cooling
and the electronic expansion
4.1 The air suction and
valve is opened to 2PLS, the
exhaust of two ODU's
inlet temperature of the IDU's
are too close to each Re-design the airflow
coil is more than 12°C lower Check the distance. —— ——
other, affecting the heat distribution.
than the saturation
exchange performance
temperature corresponding to 4. Poor airflow
of the unit.
the high pressure; distribution ——
design 4.2 The air outlet and
inlet of the IDU's
Re-design the airflow
are too close to each Check the distance. —— ——
distribution.
other, causing poor heat
exchange of the unit.
Check the necessary amount

of refrigerant and inject
7. Not enough Incorrect quantity of
Other reasons —— —— —— refrigerant slowly via the
refrigerant refrigerant is injected.
stop valve of the low-
pressure gas pipe.
125
(2). Flowchart analyzing

1). High exhaust temperature
protection (E4)
When the system shows
high exhaust temperature
protection for compressor, the
IDU will show high exhaust
temperature fault E4, while
the IDU will show the specific
faulty compressor.
For example, when high
exhaust temperature
protection is enabled on
compressor 2# of module
3# of the ODU, IDUs will
show E4 and the module
will show E6, indicating that
high exhaust temperature
protection is enabled on
compressor 2#.
MAINTENANCE
126
2). Low exhaust temperature protection (E2)
MAINTENANCE
127
3). System high pressure protection (E1)

MAINTENANCE
128
4). System low pressure protection (E3)
MAINTENANCE
129
5). System refrigerant lacking protection (U4)

MAINTENANCE
130
6). System high pressure ratio protection (J8)
MAINTENANCE
131
7). System low pressure ratio protection (J9)

MAINTENANCE
132
8). Indoor unit anti-freezing protection (L5)
MAINTENANCE
133
9). Indoor unit water overflow protection (L3)

MAINTENANCE
134
10). Temperature sensor fault
11). Pressure sensor fault
MAINTENANCE
135
12). Analyzing of drive control system faults

When the unit fails and halts, first check the two-digit nixie tube of the control board and fault
table to find out the specific fault. Then check and solve the fault according to the following
methods.
a. Communication failure between the compressor’s drive board and control board (outdoor
fault C2)
MAINTENANCE
136
b. Faults in the IPM temperature sensor of the variable-frequency compressor’s drive board
(IDU fault P7), current detection circuit (ODU fault PC), drive module reset protection (ODU
fault P3) and out-of-step protection (ODU fault P9)
MAINTENANCE
137
3). Variable-frequency compressor over-current protection (ODU fault P5) and IPM module
protection faults (ODU fault P6)
MAINTENANCE
138
Attachment: How to check whether the IPM module is damaged

1). Preparation: Find a digital multi-meter and switch it to the diode. Remove U, V and W
cables of the compressor from the drive board two minutes after the system is powered off.
Make sure that it is tested at least two minutes after the system is powered off.
b). Method: Use the black probe of the multi-meter to touch the place marked by P in the
follow picture and the red probe to touch places marked by U, V and W respectively and
record readings of the multi-meter. Use the red probe to touch the place marked by N and
black probe to touch places marked by U, V and W respectively and record readings of the
multi-meter.
c). Analyzing: If the reading ranges between 0.3 V and 0.7 V in the above-mentioned six
scenarios, the IPM module is normal. If the reading is 0 in one or multiple scenarios, the
IPM module is damaged.
MAINTENANCE
139
d. Variable-frequency compressor drive board IPM over-temperature fault (ODU fault P8)
e. Recharging circuit faulty of the variable-frequency compressor drive board (ODU fault PF)
MAINTENANCE
140
f. High voltage protection for the DC bus of the variable-frequency compressor’s drive board (ODU fault PH)
g. Low voltage protection for the DC bus of the variable-frequency compressor’s drive board (ODU fault PL)
MAINTENANCE
141
h. Variable-frequency compressor starting failure (ODU fault PJ)

MAINTENANCE
142
13). Analyzing of faults in the variable-frequency fan drive’s control system

a. Communication failure between the fan’s drive board and control board (outdoor
fault C3)
MAINTENANCE
143
b. Faults in the IPM temperature sensor of the fan’s drive board (ODU fault H7),
current detection circuit (ODU fault HC) and out-of-step protection (ODU fault H9)
MAINTENANCE
144
c. Variable-frequency fan over-current protection and IPM module protection faults

(ODU fault H5 and H6)
MAINTENANCE
145
Attachment: How to check whether the IPM module is damaged

a). Preparation: Find a digital multi-meter and switch it to the diode. Remove U,
V and W cables of the fan from the drive board two minutes after the system is
powered off. Make sure that it is tested two minutes after the system is powered
off.
b). Method: Use the black probe of the multi-meter to touch the place marked by
P in the follow picture and the red probe to touch places marked by U, V and W
respectively and record readings of the multi-meter. Use the red probe to touch
the place marked by N and black probe to touch places marked by U, V and W
respectively and record readings of the multi-meter.
c). Analyzing: If the reading ranges between 0.3 V and 0.7 V in the above-
mentioned six scenarios, the IPM module is normal. If the reading is 0 in one or
multiple scenarios, the IPM module is damaged.
MAINTENANCE
146
d). (4) Variable-frequency fan drive board IPM over-temperature fault (outdoor
fault H8)
e). High voltage protection for the DC bus of the variable-frequency fan’s drive
board (ODU fault HH)
MAINTENANCE
147
f. Low voltage protection for the DC bus of the variable-frequency fan’s drive board (ODU fault HL)
MAINTENANCE
148
g. Variable-frequency fan starting failure (ODU fault HJ)
MAINTENANCE
149
Part 3 Key Parts Maintenance If the LEDs flash, the ODU and IDUs normally communicate;
I. Cautions on Controller AP1 Replacement if the LEDs are steadily on, communication is faulty. Check
communication lines connecting the ODU and IDUs.
1. Cautions on ODU AP1 Replacement
Note: After AP1 is replaced, you should power on the ODU and
1.1 Distinguishing Master Module from Slave Module IDUs at the same time or power on the ODU first; otherwise,
Before replacing ODU AP1, determine the module is a master “CC does not have module” will be prompted and a “C0 fault”
ODU or a slave ODU. They can be distinguished based on: alarm will be reported by the IDUs.
(1). “Master module DIP state (SA8_MASTER-S)” (3). Master ODU engineering debug setting
Every cooling system has only one master module (set in Debug the entire system after master module AP1
power-off state). When a DIP is “ON”, the corresponding replacement.
position is “0”; when the DIP is “OFF”, the corresponding (4). System parameter setting
position is “1”. If SA8_MASTER-S is set to “00”, it indicates a
master module; if it is set to “10”, it indicates a slave module After system debug, reset system parameters. For details,
(as shown in the figure below). refer to section 1 “ODU Function Setting”, in part II, chapter III.
1.3 Cautions on Replacement of Slave ODU AP1
Before replacing slave module AP1, set DIP identical to that of
the faulty AP1, check wiring, and then power on the AP1.
2. Cautions on IDU AP1 Replacement
Before replacing IDU AP1, determine the module is a master
IDU or a slave IDU.
2.1 AP1 DIP Setting and Jumper Cap Confirmation
(2). AP1 LED
Whatever the AP1 you replace is a master IDU AP1 or a slave
When a master module is powered on, LED1 is displayed as IDU AP1, after it is replaced, check original DIP setting and
“01”. For a slave module, LED1 is displayed as “02”, “03” or model.
“04” (as shown in the figure below).
Configure capacity DIP for the new AP1 and confirm its jumper
cap, fan overload detect terminal, and overflow detect terminal.
They should be kept identical to those of the faulty AP1.
Their positions and corresponding silkscreen are as follows:
Capacity DIP: S1 (Capacity)
Jumper cap: U22 (Jump)
Overflow detect terminal: CN35(WATER-DTCT)
Fan overload detect terminal: CN36(OVC-FAN)
1.2 Cautions on Replacement of Master ODU AP1
MAINTENANCE
Before replacing master module AP1, make the following

preparations:
(1). Master module DIP setting
Set the new AP1 identical to the faulty AP1. Note that settings
must be performed when the master ODU is powered off and
they will take effect after the ODU is powered on. Settings that
are performed in power-on state are invalid.
(2). Communication state check
After AP1 DIP setting and all wiring, power on the master ODU
AP1 and check whether D3 and D4 LEDs are flashing. See the
2.2. Restoring AP1 Engineering Parameters to Factory
figure below:
Settings (This Step Is Not Required for Original Packaged
IDU and ODU Inter-system Parts)
Power Running Main system Reserved
communication communication After wiring, whatever the AP1 is a master IDU AP1 or a slave
ODU ODU System1 System1 IDU AP1, the new AP1 must be restored to factory settings.
Power Run → ← → ← Main-system / There are three methods to restore engineering parameter
IDU IDU System2 System2 settings:
If the IDU is configured with wired control, set P35 and P36 to
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 default values.
(1). If the IDU is configured with wireless control, use the
special control VERCL1B to set P35 and P36 to default values.
150
(2). If the IDU is configured with wireless control and special (2). Troubleshoot for “project number conflict (C5)”
control, you can restore engineering settings through the
AP1 SW1 button. After AP1 is powered on, press and hold
SW1 for 5 seconds. If a tick sound is heard, release the
button.
Number
Auto
If this fault occurs, the number of the new AP1 is identical to

that of a unit within the network. Manually change it to the
original number of the faulty AP1 or a unique number. There
are three methods to change project number:
2.3 Cautions on Replacement of Master IDU AP1 Method 1: If the IDU is configured with wired control, set P42
If the AP1 of the master IDU needs to be replaced, after the to a new project number.
IDU is powered on, “No master IDU (L7)” or “Project number Method 2: If the IDU is confi gured with lamp board, use the
conflict (C5)” alarm may be reported. special control VERCL1B to set P42 to a new project number.
(1). Troubleshoot for “no master IDU (L7)” fault Method 3: If the IDU is confi gured with the Debugger,
confi gure a new project number through this software.
Tip:
If there are N units within the network, the units should be
Number numbered from N+1.
Special situation:
Auto
In some cases, the created project number is identical to that

of a unit within the network. In this case, you can use the “one-
key IDU project number reset” function. However, this function
will cause the project number of the entire system to be re-
distributed; thus, original number will be changed. If you do not
expect this result, forbid the use of this function and replace
Method 1: If the IDU is configured with wired control, stop the the AP1 again.
IDU (except for lock mode) and press and hold the “MODE” Methods to use the “one-key IDU project number reset”
button for 5 seconds to enter setting mode. After setting, the function:
MAINTENANCE
“Master” icon will be highlighted and the wired control buzzer
Method 1: If the IDU is configured with wired control, set P45
will beep once.
to reset IDU project number through one key function.
Method 2: If the IDU is configured with lamp board or wired
Method 2: If the IDU is confi gured with lamp board, use the
control, set to fan mode, 30°C/86°F, and press and hold “-” and
special control VERCL1B to set P45 and reset IDU project
“+” consecutively three times within 5 seconds. The IDU and number through one key function.
wired control will identify it as a master IDU setting command,
and show “set master IDU success (UC)” (5 seconds) and Method 3: On the AP1 of the master ODU, press and hold
highlight the “Master” icon respectively. SW5 for 10 seconds at least to clear all project numbers of the
IDUs and then redistribute project numbers. Other parameters
Method 3: If the IDU is configured with the Commissioning are kept unchanged.
Software, set the IDU to master IDU through this software.
2.4 Cautions on Replacement of Slave IDU AP1
If the AP1 of a slave IDU needs to be replaced, after it is
powered on, “Project number conflict (C5)” alarm may be
reported. Refer to section 2.3 “Cautions on Replacement of
Master IDU AP1” to address the issue.
151
3. Cautions on Wired Control Replacement Note: All wired controls are set to master wired controls by
default.
3.1. Cautions on Wired Control VEWCL1B Replacement
(4). If the AP1 of the master IDU is replaced,
(1). If the wired control to be replaced controls only one IDU,
directly replace the control. Reset the master IDU through the wired control; otherwise, the
LCD displays L7 (no master IDU). There are two methods to
(2). If the wired control to be replaced controls multiple IDUs,
set the IDU:
perform the steps below first:
1). In shut mode, press and hold the “MODE” button for
Set the wired control parameter “P14” to change the number
5 seconds and set the IDU corresponding to this wired
of managed IDUs to the actual quantity the control manages.
control to a master IDU. After setting, the “Main” icon is
For example, if the wired control manages 3 IDUs, set this
highlighted.
parameter to 3. If you keep the default value 1, the LCD
displays L9 (as shown in the figure below). 2). Set the wired control parameter “P10” to 1.
3.2. Cautions on Wired Control VEKCH2B Replacement
To replace the wired control VEKCH2B, in addition to the
preceding handling steps specific for VEWCL1B, you should
also configure access control.
Auto
(1). If the wired control does not need an access control
system, set switch “1” for DIP S1 at the bottom of the wired
control to digital end (neglect switch “2”).
(2). If the wired control needs an access control system, set
switch “1” for DIP S1 at the bottom of the wired control to
ON (neglect switch “2”) and connect the access control card
interface to ports N and L or ports VCC and GND of the
(3). If there are two wired controls controlling one or multiple wiring terminal. The following should be noted:
IDUs, perform the steps below first: 1). Ports N and L are power interfaces of
Set the wired control parameter “P13” to change the address 100-240V~50/60Hz access control.
of one control to 01 (master) and that of the other control to 02 2). Ports VCC and GND are power interfaces of DC 5-24V
(slave); otherwise, a CP (multiple master wired controls) fault access control.
alarm will be reported (as shown in the figure below).
3). Either of them can be selected at one time.
Auto
MAINTENANCE
After setting, the LCD displays the icon, as shown in the

figure below.
Auto
152
II. Compressor Replacement and Cautions

1. Determining Compressor Fault
1.1 Precondition: Units can be normally started.
• Step 1:
If units can be normally started, start the units so as to measure line current of the faulty compressor. Use a pressure
gauge to measure pressure of various valves and connect the gauge to a PC for viewing test data. Verify the current data
in the figures below against the current recommended. For inverter compressors, current will be deviated 10% while rate of
turn and operating condition vary.
(1). For inverter compressors E656DHD-65A2YG:
The figure below shows current curves that change with evaporating temperature and condensing temperature while the
compressors work at 30 Hz.
MAINTENANCE
153
Note: You can infer from the preceding figures the current of the compressors operating at other frequency bands.
(2). For inverter compressor E706DHD-72A2YG:

compressor works at 30Hz.
MAINTENANCE
compressor works at 60 Hz.
154
Note: You can infer from the preceding figures the current of the compressor operating at other frequency bands.
MAINTENANCE
(3). For inverter compressor E405DHD-38A2YG:
155
MAINTENANCE
Note: You can infer from the preceding figures the current of the compressor operating at other frequency bands.
• Step 2:
Check whether the compressor sounds sharp or rubs. Compare the sound of the faulty compressor with that of normal ones.
• Step 3:
Check whether the electric expansion valves of ODUs and the 4-way valves act, and whether the oil return pipes and
oil balance valves 1 and 2 are normal. Touch the pipelines next to the return capillary tubes to check whether there is oil
flowing.
156
Check method for each part: (2). Four-way valve: While this valve is normally running,
the four copper pipes connected to it will suffer different
(1). Electric expansion valve: This valve will reset for each
temperature. When a unit switches to act the valve, you will
power-on or power-off action. Touch the valve and you will
feel obvious vibration and hear sound.
feel its vibration during the reset action. A crack sound will
be heard as well.
Here is the position of a
4-way valve within a unit.
Electric expansion DO NOT touch it. The
valve of heater exhaust pipe it connects with
transmits high-temperature
refrigerant which may
scald you
Electric expansion
valve of subcooler
Description of electric expansion valve:
D – Connects to
exhaust. Watch
Touch the upper part of out for scald!
an electric expansion
valve and you will feel its
vibration while units are
being powered on Make sure the coil
is fixed and firm
Labels on the 4-way valve and their meanings:

MAINTENANCE
D – connects to exhaust;
E – connects to IDU evaporator;
S – connects to intake of gas separator;
C – connects to condenser.
When the system is cooling, the pipe at side C works at high
pressure high temperature, the pipes at sides E and S work
at low pressure low temperature; when the system is heating,
the pipe at side E works at high pressure high temperature, the
pipes at sides C and S work at low pressure low temperature.
The pipe at side D connects to exhaust and it is always
working at high pressure high temperature. When units are
starting, defrosting, or returning oil, the valve will vibrate
obviously. DO NOT touch the pipe; or, you may be scalded.
157
(3). Oil balance solenoid valve: This valve can be operated (3). As shown in the figure below, put the black test probe to
based on its state that is shown through the monitoring pad P and the red test probe to pad V (YE) (make sure
software and actual situation. When this valve is opened, the moisture proof tape is removed). In normal cases, the
the coil will be heated and lubricant at both sides of the multimeter should read 0.39±0.3 V. If it is “0” or infinitely
valve flows. great, the IPM module is faulty.
Oil balance
valve 2
Solenoid valve
(4). As shown in the figure below, put the black test probe to
pad P and the red test probe to pad W (RD) (make sure
the moisture proof tape is removed). In normal cases, the
Oil balance multimeter should read 0.39±0.3 V. If it is “0” or infinitely
valve 1 great, the IPM module is faulty.
• Step 4:
Test the compressor drive, namely the IPM module, to see
whether it is normal.
(1). Disconnect the power supply. Five minutes later, remove
the line of the faulty compressor.
(2). Set a multimeter to gear diode. As shown in the figure
MAINTENANCE
below, put the black test probe to pad P (on the left of pad (5). As shown in the figure below, put the black test probe to
U (BL)) and the red test probe to pad U (BL) (make sure pad U (BL) and the red test probe to pad NU (make sure
the moisture proof tape is removed). In normal cases, the the moisture proof tape is removed). In normal cases, the
multimeter should read 0.39±0.3 V. If it is “0” or infinitely multimeter should read 0.39±0.3 V. If it is “0” or infinitely
great, the IPM module is faulty. great, the IPM module is faulty.
158
(6). As shown in the figure below, put the black test probe to 1.2 Precondition: Units cannot be normally started.
pad V (YE) and the red test probe to pad NV (make sure
• Step 1:
the moisture proof tape is removed). In normal cases, the
multimeter should read 0.39±0.3 V. If it is “0” or infinitely Disconnect the power supply of the units and open the electric
great, the IPM module is faulty. junction box of the compressor to see whether wiring of the
compressor is intact.
• Step 2:
Measure resistance between two wiring terminals (U, V, W).
The resistance value range should be 0.5~2.0 Ω.
Measure resistance
between two wiring
terminals using a
multimeter
(7). As shown in the figure below, put the black test probe to
pad W (RD) and the red test probe to pad NW (make sure Measure the resistance
to ground of each wiring
the moisture proof tape is removed). In normal cases, the terminal one after another
multimeter should read 0.39±0.3 V. If it is “0” or infinitely
great, the IPM module is faulty.
Measure the resistance to ground of each wiring terminal.

The value should be 10 MΩ. If not, the compressor has an
internal fault.
• Step 3:
Check the solenoid valves of the system, include electric
expansion valves, oil return valves, and oil balance valves.
Refer to the preceding section for the test method.
MAINTENANCE
• Step 4:
Check the IPM module. Refer to the preceding section for the
test method.
159
2. Compressor Replacement Before releasing the refrigerant, get some freezing oil through
• Step 1: Disconnect power supply. the oil checking valve. Connect a rubber hose to the oil
checking valve at one end and a glass container at the other
Turn off the power switch of the ODUs and disconnect the end. Open the oil checking valve. Control oil flow speed. Since
line of the power supply and the power line of the ODUs. the oil is a mixture of volatile refrigerant and lubricant, DO NOT
Meanwhile, cover the power line with tape for insulation and cover the container; or it may explode.
put a warning sign beside the power switch to prevent electric
shock. After the lubricant is fully gasified, record the volume of oil.
• Step 2: Clear electric parts (do not need to disassemble • Step 4: Release refrigerant.
the electric box). Refrigerant should be released from the high pressure side
Before removing compressors’ lines, temperature sensors, and and low pressure side at the same time. If it is released from
electric heaters, mark them so that you will reconnect them in one side only, the scroll is sealed, causing the refrigerant to
a correct manner after clearing. The removed electric box must fail to be released completely. Control the release speed (it is
be covered and protected from wind and sun. expected to release for 12 hours or more). If too fast, massive
lubricant will be discharged with the refrigerant. Make sure to
mark the valves.
1. Unscrew the
electric box.
At the high pressure
side, refrigerant is
released through
Oil checking
the high pressure
valve
sensor.
4. The method
of removing the 2. Make sure to
box at the left support the
side is similar to electric box.
that of removing
this electric box.
Refrigerant should
be released from the
high pressure side and
3. Take the low pressure side at
electric box out. the same time.
Control the release
speed. At the low
pressure side,
refrigerant is released
through the low
pressure check valve. Gas pipe
For VRF Lennox series, only VEP132N432K and Liquid pipe
VEP150N432K units are configured with the left electric box, Low pressure
which contains mainly the drive of the compressor check valv Balance pipe
E405DHD-38D2YG. After the box is removed, take care with
the removal of electric parts’ lines. DO NOT pull the lines with • Step 5: Remove faulty compressors.
excessive force; or they may be broken. The removed electric Confirm faulty compressors, including number of faulty ones,
MAINTENANCE
box must be protected for dust proof and waterproof purposes. compressor position, and model.
Handling procedure varies with compressor model.
• Step 3: Check oil quality.
(1). Inverter compressors and oil quality
If the inverter compressor is damaged, or the oil of the fixed
speed compresor is contaminated, remove the inverter
compressor. The procedure is as follows:
Oil checking
valve
160
For VEP132N432N (K,G) and VEP150N432N (K,G) variable (2). Check oil balancer.
frequency units, their compressors are both inverter
compressors, differing in models. The one close to the
2. Weld the inlet
condenser is compressor 1 “E655DHD-65D2YG” and the and outlet pipes of
other close to the liquid separator head is compressor 2 the oil separator
“E405DHD-38D2YG”. The removal procedure is basically the
same.
1. Weld the oil

return pipe and oil
balance pipe of the
separator
3. Unscrew
the oil
separator
(3). Check gas/liquid separator.

1. Weld the inlet
and outlet pipes
of the gas
separator
After the compressor and oil separator are removed, check

oil quality. If oils are contaminated, replace the compressor,
oil separator, and gas/liquid separator. If oil changes to black,
check oils of other modular units. The check procedure is
similar to the preceding.
Note: Before replacing the faulty compressors, make sure to
2. Unscrew
block their openings with tapes. They should be kept intact for the gas
3. Remove the
further analysis. gas/liquid
separator
separator
• Step 5: Check system parts.
If system oil is contaminated, check unit parts, including oil
separator, gas/liquid separator, and storage tank.
Check oil separator.
Remove the oil separator. For the removal procedure, refer to
MAINTENANCE
step 4. Tilt the separator to draw oil out into a container. Block
the container for further factory inspection. After the gas separator is taken out, check whether it contains
impurities. The check procedure is as follows:
2. Weld the inlet Note: While drawing liquid

and outlet pipes out from the gas
of the oil separator separator, make sure to
keep the outlet
downward.
1. Weld the oil return

pipe and oil balance
oil pipe of the
separator
This angle should not exceed 20°
Use a glass container to hold the liquid. Check liquid impurities

3. Unscrew and colours and block the container for further factory
the oil separator inspection.
Note: If the compressor needs replacement, the gas/liquid
separator needs replacement as well, regardless whether the
separator contains impurities or has faults or not.
161
(4). Check oil return pipes. • Step 6: Clear pipeline system.

Remove oil return pipes and balance pipes, and check oil Check pipelines for abnormalities. Charge nitrogen into the
volume and impurity. main pipeline and clear the pipeline system.
(1). Clear the balance pipes.
Components of oil balance valve 1:
3. Remove the
large filter to see
whether it is 2. Remove the oil
blocked. If yes, balance filter to see
replace the filter whether it is blocked. If
yes, replace the filter
Remove oil
return pipes
4. Blow nitrogen
into the balance
pipes, capillary 1. Disconnect the pipes
tubes, and filters to at both sides of the oil
clean them balance valve
Components of oil balance valve 2:
1. Disconnect the
pipes at both sides
of the oil balance
valve
2. Remove the oil

balance filter to see
whether it is
MAINTENANCE
blocked. If yes,
Remove replace the filter
balance
pipes
3. Blow nitrogen
into the balance
pipes and capillary
tubes to clean them
Note: Before replacing the faulty parts, make sure to block

their openings with tapes. They should be kept intact for further
analysis.
Note: Volumes of oils drawn out from the oil separator, gas
separator, and oil balancer should be recorded. After faulty
compressors and parts are replaced, you should fill new oils of
equivalent amount into the compressors and parts.
162
(2). Clear oil return pipes. • Step 7: Preparations.

(1). Prepare new parts.
In the course of moving compressors, do not lay them down or
put them upside down. The tilt angle should be less than 30°.
Make sure oil will not overflow from the oil balance opening.
The inlet and outlet should be blocked. If the sealing rubber is
not available, cover them with tape to prevent direct contact of
oil and air.
2. Blow nitrogen
into the oil return
pipes and capillary
tubes to clean them
The rubbers used

for blocking the
inlet and outlet of
compressors must
1. Remove the oil be intact
return filter to see
whether it is
blocked. If yes,
replace the filter
The cover of the

electric box should
be intact
(3). Clear liquid pipe filters.
2. Replace the
Note: The new compressor must be consistent with the faulty
drying filter
one in model.
MAINTENANCE
1. Remove the
liquid pipe filter to
see whether it is
blocked. If yes,
replace the filter
For other pipeline parts, clear them based on actual situation.

If you do not replace the parts immediately, make sure to block
the pipes with tapes, preventing air moistures and impurities
from contaminating them.
163
Check the rubbers for oil separator, gas separator, oil balancer, • Step 8: Install a new gas/liquid separator.
and drying filter. If they are lost during transportation, cover the Note: If a faulty compressor needs replacement, the gas/
parts with tape to keep the compressor dry and airtight inside. liquid separator needs replacement as well. This is to avoid
abnormality from happening inside the gas separator, and
The sealing rubbers affecting system safety and reliability.
for various parts
must be intact
Put the gas/liquid separator on a chassis and connect the inlet
pipe of the gas separator with the outlet pipe. Then, connect
the pipe to a nitrogen source. The nitrogen source can be
connected based on actual situation, for example, you can
add a bypass interface or directly connect the nitrogen source
to the inlet/outlet pipe. If the pipe is big, cover it with tape as
well. Make sure nitrogen can smoothly flow through the gas
separator.
2. Connect the inlet
pipe of the separator
with the outlet pipe
3. Weld the pipes

together
1. Put the gas/liquid

Note: Compressor lubricant must be kept completely airtight. separator on a
Hitachi compressors use special lubricant FVC68D whose proper position
moisture absorption capability is high. Requirements on air-
tightness of these compressors are higher. 4. Screw the
separator onto the
(2). Prepare other materials. chassis
1). Prepare nitrogen. Prepare enough nitrogen. They will
be used during welding. Nitrogen pressure should be
2.0 MPa (290 psig) at least.
2). Prepare welding rods. In addition to ordinary welding
rods, you should also prepare special welding rods
(containing 5% or more silver). Compressors’ inlets and
• Step 9: Install a new oil balancer.
outlets are made of copper plated steels, which require
special welding rods and materials. The original oil balancer, if is found to have no impurities or
MAINTENANCE
other objects, can be used further more. This part serves as a

3). Prepare gases for welding. Oxygen and acetylene of
container and it does not have complex structure. However, if it
proper amount should be determined with consideration
contains impurities or other objects, replace it. This is because
of actual welding positions. Try to finish the welding task
a dirty oil balancer cannot be thoroughly cleaned.
once. Avoid repeated welding.
4). Prepare tools, including hexagon, diagonal pliers, 2. Weld the
connecting pipes of
combination pliers, needle nose pliers, multimeter, the oil balancer
pressure gauge, Phillips screwdriver, flathead
screwdriver, wrenches (at least two), PVC insulation tape,
and tielines (multiple).
1. Put the oil
balancer on
a proper position
4. Weld the oil

balancer
components
3. Screw the oil

balancer
164
• Step 10: Install a new oil separator. For compressors of VEP132N432N (K,G) and VEP150N432N
(K,G) units, make sure the new compressors are consistent
If the original oil separator contains impurities inside, replace it.
with the faulty ones in model. If both compressors need
replacement, make sure corresponding position and wiring
are correct. You are advised to replace them one after
another.
4. Weld the oil 4. Weld the inlet of 1. Weld the inlet

return inverter compressor of inverter
2 compressor 1
components
5. Weld the outlet 2. Weld the outlet

1. Put the oil of inverter of inverter
separator on a compressor 2 compressor 1
proper position
Compressor–
frequency
Name- variable
plate
6. Screw the 3. Screw the

4. Weld the oil compressor compressor
return
components
3. Screw the oil

separator Note: Keep wiring identical to factory installation. Control varies
with compressors. Wrong wiring or inverse connection of the
compressors may cause damage to units.
Cautions on replacement of compressors:
• Step 11: Install a new compressor.
1). Before installing new compressors, remove the sealing
If it is a inverter compressor that needs replacement, rubbers and weld the compressors with corresponding
pipes. During welding, charge nitrogen into the
pipes. Since compressors’ suction and discharge
pipes are made of copper plated steels, you need to
1. Weld the inlet of prepare special welding rods (containing 5% or more
the inverter silver). Welding clearance should be controlled within
compressor 0.1~0.3mm, avoiding blockage or loose welding. During
welding, control pipe openings from being over-heated.
2). After the pipeline system is welded, use special supports
2. Weld the outlet
of the inverter and bolts to fix the compressors, ensuring stability of the
MAINTENANCE
compressor compressors during running.
3). Power lines of the compressors should be wired
following the factory installation. You can refer to the
3. Screw the wiring diagram. Phase sequence error and inverse
compressor connection of compressors are not allowed. In particular,
if there are two inverter compressors VEP132N432N
(K,G) and VEP150N432N (K,G) that need replacement,
pay attention to wiring. Control varies with compressors.
Inverse connection of the compressors may cause
damage to units.
165
• Step 12: System check.
2). Keep on extracting air and open the oil checking valve.
(1). Check welding joints for abnormalities. The lubricant will be pressed into the low pressure side of
(2). Charge nitrogen into the system for leakage detection. If units.
you are maintaining ODUs and the IDU system is normal, 3). If the lubricant is added portion by portion, close the oil
you can charge nitrogen into the ODU system only. Note checking valve first and then measure another portion
that nitrogen should be charged from both the high pressure of lubricant. In the course of repeated measuring and
side and low pressure side. You are advised to charge adding, keep the extraction action.
through all valves. Nitrogen pressure should be larger than
20 kgf (280 psig). Then, charge soapsuds into the system 4). After a required amount of lubricant is added, close the
and check specially the weld joints for leakage. oil checking valve to ensure tightness.
(3). Finally, charge nitrogen into the system again for pressure Extract air through all
check. Close all valves and keep system pressure up to valves. In the course
25 kgf (350 psig) for more than 12 hours. If the pressure of oil fill, keep on the
remains unchanged, you can extract all air. Otherwise, Oil checking extraction action
you should find the leakage points first. valve
While determining system pressure change, take temperature

into consideration. For 1°C temperature change, pressure will
change by 0.01 MPa (1.5 psig) accordingly. Suppose that Connect the
rubber hose to
nitrogen pressure reaches 2.5 MPa (360 psig) at 30°C, 12 the oil checking
hours later, temperature decreases to 25°C and pressure valve at one end
decreases to 2.43 MPa (350 psig) accordingly. The system is and put the other
regarded qualifi ed despite the pressure decrease. end of the hose
into the glass for
• Step 13: Fill lubricant. drawing lubricant
Gas pipe
Quantity of lubricant that is needed is subject to the total draw
amount from compressors and parts. The fi ll amount should be
equivalent to the draw amount. If the draw amount is too little or
too much, clear all lubricant fi rst and determine fi ll amount by
referring to Appendix 1 (accessory list). Low pressure
Liquid pipe Balance pipe
check valv
Fill amount is determined by two factors: the number of
compressors replaced and the draw amount from each part. For
replacement of one compressor, 1.5 L lubricant should be Note: Lubricant is of great importance to the normal running
added. The fi llamounts hould be equal to or a little larger than of compressors. You should follow VRF's requirement to add
the draw amount. qualifiedlu bricant of the specifi ed trademark and ensure
properness of fi ll amount.
(1). Examples:
• Step 14: Vacuum-pump.
1). For VEP150N432N (K,G) units, one compressor is replaced;
After lubricant is added, keep on extracting air through a
lubricant that is drawn from the gas separator is 1 L and
MAINTENANCE
vacuum pump till the internal pressure reaches the absolute

lubricant that is drawn from the oil separator is 0.7 L.
pressure 0 kgf/cm2 (0 psig) and the pressure gauge reads -1
Then, the total required amount is 1.5 L + 1 L + 0.7 L =
kgf/cm2. This is to ensure that moistures inside the pipeline
3.2 L. You should add 3.2 L lubricant into the system.
system are completely vaporized.
2). For VEP096N432N (K,G)units, one compressor is replaced;
Vacuum pumps of the specifications below are recommended:
gas separator and other filters are replaced as well; pipes
have been charged with nitrogen for cleaning. Since the
Purpose
maintenance work involves most of the parts, there is Type Max. Discharge Rate
little residual lubricant inside the system. You are advised For air discharge For vacuum drying
to clear the residual lubricant and add 3.5 L new lubricant Lubricant driven pump 100 L/min Applicable Applicable
into the system (determined by referring to the accessory
list). Lubricant free pump 50 L/min Applicable Applicable
(2). Specific procedure is as follows:

Open all valves in order that the vacuum pump extracts air
GMV5 series units use FVC68D lubricant. Make sure to
through all the valves, during which, connect the units to a
confirm the trademark of the lubricant first. Lubricant of other
pressure gauge. When the internal pressure reaches 0 kgf/
trademarks is not allowed.
cm2 and the pressure gauge reads -1 kgf/cm2, keep on the
Open all valves and extract air for 30 minutes or longer. extraction action for 0.5~1.0 hour more. Finally, turn off the
1). Connect a rubber hose to the oil checking valve at one rotary switch of the gauge and close the pump. One hour later,
end. Open the container that holds lubricant and pour if the pressure remains the same, fill refrigerant. If the pressure
lubricant into a measuring glass. If the glass is too small increases to 0.1 kgf/cm2 or higher, conduct leakage check
to hold the lubricant of a required amount, measure again.
the lubricant portion by portion. Record volume of each
portion and then put the other end of the rubber hose into
the glass.
166
Extract air through all III. Cautions on Compressor Drive Replacement

valves. In the course
of oil fill, keep on the (1). Disconnect the power supply of the system. Set a
extraction action multimeter to the AC voltage gear and measure voltage
Oil checking
valve
between two of the lines (L1, L2, L3, and N). The measuring
result should be 0 V (sometimes, multimeters may be faulty
and read false values). Set a mark beside the power supply
for warning.
(2) Measure compressor drive DC bus voltage between two
wire terminals of P, U, V, W and N. Set the multimeter to the
DC voltage gear and measure the voltage between P and
If the maintenance
work involves multiple N. The voltage should be lower than 36 V. If no multimeter
parts, extract air of the is available, wait for 20 minutes before performing the steps
balance pipe below.
independently
Low pressure
check valv
Liquid pipe Balance pipe Gas pipe
• Step 15: Fill refrigerant.

Before filling refrigerant, check its manufacturer, package,
and print information. Besides, check refrigerant pressure and
quality against the saturation pressure / temperature list.
(1). Measure and check the pressure of the entire refrigerant
product against the saturation pressure / temperature list.
Verify temperature parameter. If the difference between the
actual temperature and the parameter value is 3°C or more,
the refrigerant quality is unsatisfactory.
(2). If the refrigerant is proved satisfactory, fill refrigerant of
the combined amount of the rated amount (specified on the
nameplate) and the calculated refrigerant loss amount.
For a multi-modular unit system, if only the refrigerant of an
ODU is drawn out, add 80% refrigerant of the rated fill amount
MAINTENANCE
(specified on the nameplate of the ODU) and start the system
for a debugging test.
• Step 16: Install electric parts.
Install the electric box and connect various parts to the electric
box by referring to the marks made beforehand and the wiring
diagram on the back of the box. Wire the compressors and
corresponding electric heating belts.
Note: Wires should be checked against the wiring diagram
beforehand so that they can be connected correctly.
• Step 17: Start for debugging.
Start the units and set them to run in refrigerating full-start,
refrigerating single-start, heating full-start, and heating single-
start modes respectively. Duration for each running mode
should be 30 minutes at least. After the debug, analyze data
and adjust the unit system, to ensure indexes of the entire
system. For details about each index, please consult after-sale
persons and technicians.
167
(3). Disconnect all lines of the compressor drive, including: (5). Replace the compressor drive. Before the replacement,
compressor line; communication line between the master apply some silicone tape onto the IPM module.
unit and the drive; communication line between the
compressor drive and fan drive; compressor drive output
Apply some silicone
18 VDC; bridge rectifier output P; bridge rectifier output N;
tape on it evenly
compressor drive output 540 VDC; reactor’s wiring terminal;
bridge rectifier input AC inlead; compressor drive’s mains
terminal. See the figure below:
Notes:
1. CN502: Connected to the AC input power. (6). Install a new compressor drive, screw and wire it.
2. CN503: Connected to the loop of the AC contactor .
3. L1_1, L1_2, L2_1, L2_2: Connected to the reactor .
4. KM1_1, KM1_2, KM2_1, KM2_2: Connected the main
contacts of the AC contactor .
(4). Loosen the screws on the compressor drive, as shown in
the figure below:
MAINTENANCE
168
Remote Control
CONTENTS
Engineering Commissioning Software....................................................170
REMOTE CONTROL
169
Part 1 Engineering Commissioning

1. Overview
With quick increase of comprehensive constructions and large buildings, central air conditioning systems of the buildings are
not only increased in number and diversifie d in model but also sparsely distributed, which makes centralized management
and maintenance diffi cult to realize. Lennox Commissioning, integrated with electronic communication technology and PC
software technology, helps monitor, control, and debug central air conditioning units all round, making sparse distribution not an
issue and realizing centralized control and management. Managers, needless to go to the site to set and manage all units, can
perform running state query, unit start/stop, temperature adjustment, and other operations using a PC, improving working effi
ciency and reducing manpower, material, and management input.
At present, Lennox Commissioning Software can be used to comprehensively monitor and control Lennox multi units. So long
as users have a PC, they can monitor and control air conditioning units through the software. Lennox Commissioning Software
is an effective intelligent management tool for air conditioning systems and also a tool for engineering setup and after-sale
debugging. With Lennox Commissioning Software, users can debug air conditioners on site, understand units' running state,
and conveniently analyze units' health conditions, not only improving users' working effic iency and reducing maintenance diffi
culty and cost but also improving customers' service quality and speed.
2. System Networking
Lennox Commissioning Software is applicable to both single-system network and multi-system network. In a single-system
network, the software can control both IDUs and ODUs. In a multi-system network, however, the software can control the master
ODU only.
2.1 Composition of System Network
From the network topology, it can be seen that Lennox debugging network is composed of three parts:
Control PC part in the monitor room, including Lennox Commissioning Software and USB Converter Driver installed in the PCs.
USB data conversion part, mainly converts air conditioning units’ communication mode into PC recognizable mode. Devices
include USB data converters and USB data lines.
Air conditioning unit part, mainly composed of air conditioning units, including ODUs, IDUs, and lines. If the lines are not long
REMOTE CONTROL
enough, the transfer board accompanied with Lennox Commissioning Software can help connect the lines together. In a single-
system network, the converter can be connected to an IDU or an ODU. In a multi-system network, however, the converter can be
connected to a master ODU only.
170
3. Hardware
3.2.3 LEDs and Interfaces
3.1 List of Parts
Power LED: a red LED. When it is on, it indicates that the
converter is normally supplied with power; when it is off, it
Name Type BOM Remark indicates that the converter's power supply is abnormal.
USB data Converts unit communication mode (CAN) Communication LEDs: two yellow LEDs. When a PC is
Included 30118000001 delivering data, the data transmitting LED will flash; when
converter into PC communication mode (USB)
an air conditioning unit is uploading data to the PC, the data
Commissioning The box contains the Lennox receiving LED will flash.
Software suite VECS1E 36400000003 Commissioning software disk, USB data
Function LEDs: three green LEDs:
(disk) converter, and USB wire
If the RS485 to USB LED is steady on, it indicates that the
A line connecting a PC with the converter converter is working in RS485 mode.
USB data line \ 40020082
over the USB interface
If the CAN to USB LED is steady on, it indicates that the
This board serves to connect units with converter is working in CAN mode.
COM interface
\ 30118015 control PCs when they are too distant to
board If the HBS to USB LED is steady on, it indicates that the
communicate
converter is working in HBS mode.
Connecting A 4-core line connecting units USB interface: connects to a USB data line.
\ 4001023229
line (1 m) with the converter
CAN interface: When air conditioners work in CAN2 mode, they
Connecting A 4-core line connecting units are connected to the converter over this CAN interface. This
\ 4001023214
line (5.5 m) with the converter
interface is not distinguished by polarity. Thus, the two contacts
User manual \ 64134100023 Instructions C1 and C2 can be used interchangeably.
HBS interface: When air conditioners work in HBS mode,
3.2 USB Data Converter they are connected to the converter over this HBS interface.
3.2.1 Function This interface is not distinguished by polarity. At present,
Lennox Commissioning Software and monitor software do not
The USB data converter converts communication mode of the support this interface.
air conditioning units, for example, RS485, HBS, and CAN into
a mode that is recognizable through PC’s USB interface. RS485 interface: When air conditioners work in RS485 mode,
they are connected to the converter over this RS485 interface.
3.2.2 Appearance This interface is distinguished by polarity. Thus, the two
contacts A and B cannot be used interchangeably.
3.2.4 Precautions
The converter should be installed indoors and prevented from
being hit. It is recommended that the converter is installed in
the monitor room with PCs.
The converter does not need to be connected to a power
supply. It is powered by the PC via the USB interface.
3.3 COM Interface Board
This board mainly transfers data. Providing a transfer function,
the board serves to connect units with control PCs when they
are too distant to communicate.
3.4 Lines
3.4.1 USB Data Line
A USB data line is connecting to a USB interface of a PC at
one end and to another USB interface of a converter at the
other end. See the following fi gure:
REMOTE CONTROL
171
3.4.2 Connecting Line 4.2 Installation Flowchart

Lennox Commissioning Software is accompanied with two
lines: 1 m and 5.5 m. They are completely the same except the
length. The line is connecting to the COM interface of an air Start
conditioning unit at one end and to the CAN interface of a
converter at the other end, as shown in the following fi gure.
The air conditioning unit can be either an IDU or an ODU. No
Yes
CAN
Interfaces
Install Access
Connecting line Driver
4. Software Setup
4.1 Prerequisites
No
4.1.1 PC Configuration
Yes
Min: 1 GB
Memory
Recommended: 2 GB or larger
Hardware 10 GB available
Install .Net
Core 2 or later versions
Framework 4.0
CPU Min: 1 GHz
Recommended: 2 GHz or higher
Windows Server 2003 SP3 or later versions
Windows XP SP3 or later versions
OS
Windows Vista
Windows 7
Install Lennox
4.1.2 Running the Disk
Commissioning
Make sure you have the administrator permission and the PC
has been configured with a driver. Put the disk into the driver. If
Software
it is running automatically, the following page will appear. If not, No
double click the “Launcher.exe” file to display the page.
Yes
Install USB
Converter Driver
No
Yes
If it is the fi rst time to use Lennox Commissioning Software,
the following software needs to be installed: .Net
Install Lennox USB
Framework 4.0, USB Converter Driver, Access Driver data converter
(required for versions earlier than Offi ce 2007), and Lennox configuration software
REMOTE CONTROL
Commissioning Software.
End
This is a simplifi ed software setup procedure. For details,

read the following section.
172
4.3 Installation Procedure Installing.

4.3.1 Installing .Net Framework 4.0
If your PC has been installed with .Net Framework 4.0 or later
version, skip this step. Otherwise, click “Install .Net Framework
4.0”.
Loading file.
Click “Finish”.
Check “I have read and accept the license terms” and click
“Install”.
REMOTE CONTROL
173
4.3.2 Installing Access Driver Click “Browse” to select a path. If you want to use the default
Before the Lennox Commissioning Software can run, install path, click “Install”.
the Access Driver (required for versions earlier than Offi ce
2007). Click “Install Access Driver”.
Click “Next”.
Installing.
Check “I accept the terms in the License Agreement” and click

“Next”.
Click “OK”.
REMOTE CONTROL
174
4.3.3 Installing Lennox Commissioning Software Click “Next”.

Before installing Lennox Commissioning Software,
make sure your PC has been installed with .Net
Framework 4.0 or later version. Click “Install Lennox
Commissioning Software”.
Click “Next”.
Installing.
Click “Browse” to select a path. If you want to use the

default path, click “Next”.
Click “Close”.
REMOTE CONTROL
175
5. Using Commissioning Software

5.1 Major Functions Select a language.
5.1.1 One-Click Engineering Debug

Engineering debug personnel can use this software to debug
units based on engineering debug logic by one-click operation.
The minute you deliver a debug command through the
software, units begin automatic debug step by step. When the
units pass debug of a step, the step is automatically checked
green. If they fail this step, it will be checked red.
5.1.2 All-Round Monitor and Health Analysis
All-round monitor on the air conditioning systems, including
functions, devices, and parts is supported. Intuitive and clear
display facilitates users to understand running of the entire
systems and units. Select a unit.
5.1.3 Real-Time Control and Running Mode Adjustment
Air conditioner operation time and requirement on the air
conditioners vary with geographical locations. Users can adjust
parameters of air conditioning units through a PC based on the
actual situation of an area, including start/stop, temperature,
airfl ow speed, and mode. Lennox Commissioning Software
also enables users to set and query parameters for ODUs and
gateways.
5.1.4 Other Functions
Lennox Commissioning Software also instructs users to
connect units, and allows users to capture screens, open
database fi les, rebuild database, and modify database fi le
saving path.
5.2 How to Use Lennox Commissioning Software If units you want to monitor have been connected and normally
5.2.1 Viewing Unit Parameters communicating, and COM interface and protocol are set, click
Run Lennox Commissioning Software. “Connect” to access the parameter page. If not, follow the
figure below to connect the units.
On the initial page, select a language and unit. If you want to

use default settings, click “OK” to enable Lennox
Commissioning Software.
REMOTE CONTROL
176
Set COM interface. Lennox Commissioning Software will Click “Connect”. If units can be in normal communication with
automatically detect available serial ports of your PC. You can the PC, Lennox Commissioning Software will switch over to
select one of them. the parameter page. Otherwise, Lennox Commissioning
Software shows it is being connecting.
Set protocol. This is to choose a communication mode of your

air conditioning units. At present, CAN is the proper
communication mode.
REMOTE CONTROL
177
The following figure shows the compositions of the parameter 5.2.2 Engineering Debug
page. You can click and to hide the unit information area
and system information area. Within the IDU information area and
fault information area, you can drag. Within the outdoor module Click Debug in the menu bar to switch over to the engineering
information area, you can choose to show one module only (by debug page. Units will automatically execute debug steps one
default, two modules are displayed at the same time in the after another based on the order of steps on the page. Note that
proportion of 3:1). The menu bar can also be hidden by clicking the debug function can be used for single-system network only.
and total sampling time are shown.
Click “Start” to enable Lennox Commissioning Software and units

automatically debug. indicates a currently debugging step
In the unit information area, you can choose to view any unit to be and indicates a successfully debugged step.
monitored.
REMOTE CONTROL
178
Steps that have the “OK” button available enable users to The icon indicates that corresponding step failed and a
continue further debug. Click and corresponding debug fault exists. In this case, users need to rectify the fault fi rst.
information will be shown, enabling you to determine whether After the issue is addressed, Lennox Commissioning
to continue debug. Click “Close” to close the information. For Software automatically continues the debug procedure if there
step 3 “Confirm ODU Basic Module NO.” and step 4 “Confirm is not an “OK” button available; otherwise, users should click
IDU NO.”, quantity of units debugged will be shown; for step 8 “OK” to confi rm. Click and corresponding debug information
“Compr. Preheat Confirmation”, preheating time will be shown. will be shown, helping you analyze the fault. Click “Close” to
See the following figures. close the information.
During debugging, if you click “Stop”, the debug is interrupted.
Click “Start” to continue debug. When debug goes on to step
10 “ODU Valves Check Before Startup”, “Back” and “Skip” are
available. If this step fails, you can go back to step 9. Click
“OK” of step 9 to continue step 10. If the failure is U6 fault
(valve exception alarm), click “Skip” to skip this step. For other
fault causes, this button is greyed out.
REMOTE CONTROL
179
Steps 11, 13, and 14 are reserved. Steps 13 to 16 are If you select “IDU Settings”, the following dialog box will
concurrent steps. That is, only one of them will be executed at appear.
one time.
When “Project Debug Completion” is checked green, the
engineering debug is finished.
Check desired IDUs from the IDU Selection area. You can also
click “Select All” or “Select Inverted” to check the IDUs.
5.2.3 Controlling Units Parameter information of selected IDUs will be shown in the
Settings area. Click “Set…” and click in the displayed dialog
box to select. After you click “Set”, the page will be updated to
In the menu bar, click “Setting” -> “Parameter Settings”. show the selected value.
Shortcut menus “Gateway Settings”, “IDU Settings”, “System
Settings”, “Project Number Conflict”, and “System Historical
Info” are available. Select one of them to set. Note that if
project number of an IDU conflicts, other options will be greyed
out. In this case, you need to set the “Project Number Conflict”
parameter to solve the conflict.
REMOTE CONTROL
180
5.2.4 Other Functions

• Capturing screen
To capture a screen, click “Capture Screen” in the menu bar. If
you want to open the screen, click “Open”.
• Changing pressure value

Choose “Others” -> “Display Settings”. In the displayed dialog
box, you can set “High Low Pressure Value” and “Refrigerant
Type”. If you set “High Low Pressure Value” to “Temperature”,
the pressure parameter is changed to temperature; if you set
“High Low Pressure Value” to “Pressure”, the pressure value
is shown. The value of “Refrigerant Type” affects the pressure
value.
• Searching for database files

To search for database files, click “Open Data Folder” to open
the default folder that is saving database files.
REMOTE CONTROL
181
• Saving multi-system data • Changing database saving path and rebuilding database
“Change Database Saving Path” and “Rebuild Database” must
Choose “Others” -> “Database Save Settings”. For a multi- be confi gured before Lennox Commissioning Software runs.
system network, you need to specify a system to save unit Choose “Others” -> “Change Database Saving Path”. In the
data. Since data volume of a multi-system network is large, displayed dialog box, click “Browse” to select a path. Choose
you can select only a suite of system data to save. “Others” -> “Rebuild Database” to rebuild database. If Lennox
Commissioning Software has run, you can stop the software
and return to the connection page to operate.
REMOTE CONTROL
182
MAINTENANCE
183
Visit us at www.lennoxglobal.com or contact us at +1-305-718-2901
C
2019 Lennox Industries Inc.
For a complete list of the registered and common law trademarks owned by
Lennox Industries Inc., please visit www.lennox.com

Lennox-VRF EHB VRF Three-Phase

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lennox-VRF EHB VRF Three-Phase

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lennox-VRF EHB VRF Three-Phase

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

INSTALLATION / OPERATION

Model Number Identification

Nominal Cooling Capacity - Tons Internal Use Only

I. Introduction to Basic Features of Units.........................................1

III. Commissioning Operation..........................................................67

V. Engineering Commissioning Software.......................................170

I. Basic Principles of Operation

3. Names and Main Functions of Components

No. Name Main Function

Model VEP075N432K VEP096N432K VEP120N432K VEP132N432K VEP150N432K VEP171N432K VEP192N432K VEP216N432K

Rated Cooling kW 22.4 28 33.5 40 45 50.4 56 61.5

Model VEP228N432K VEP246N432K VEP270N432K VEP282N432K VEP300N432K VEP324N432K VEP342N432K VEP366N432K

VEP096N432K VEP096N432K VEP096N432K

Power Supply 208/230V 3~ 60Hz

Rated Cooling kW 68 73 78.5 85 90 96 101 106.5

930 × 765 × 1605 930 × 765 × 1605 930 × 765 × 1605

Weight kg 225+360 225+360 285+360 360+360 360+360 225+225+360 225+225+360 225+285+360

Name R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A

1. Basic Parameters of ODU

Model VEP378N432K VEP396N432K VEP420N432K VEP432N432K VEP450N432K VEP474N432K VEP492N432K

Model VEP516N432K VEP528N432K VEP546N432K VEP570N432K VEP582N432K VEP600N432K

Refrigeration Capacity HP 1 1 1 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2 2

Power Supply 220-240V~50Hz/208-230V~60Hz

Model VELD021N432U VELD024N432U VELD027N432U VELD031N432U VELD034N432U VELD038N432U VELD042N432U VELD048N432U

Power Supply 220-240V~ 50Hz/208-230V~60Hz

2.2 4-way Cassette Type IDU

Model VE4C009N432U VE4C012N432U VE4C015N432U VE4C017N432U VE4C019N432U VE4C021N432U VE4C024N432U

Refrigeration Capacity HP 1 1.5 2 2 2 3 3

Cooling Capacity kW 2.8 3.6 4.5 5.0 5.6 6.3 7.1

Heating Capacity kW 3.2 4.0 5.0 5.6 6.3 7.1 8.0

Circulating Air Quantity 3

Power Supply 220-240V~50Hz/208-230V~60Hz

Model VE4C027N432U VE4C030N432U VE4C034N432U VE4C038N432U VE4C042N432U VE4C048N432U VE4C055N432U

Model VE1C007N432U VE1C009N432U VE1C012N432U VE1C015N432U VE1C017N432U

Refrigeration Capacity HP 1 1 1.5 2 2

Tubing Liquid Pipe mm Φ6.35 Φ6.35 Φ6.35 Φ6.35 Φ6.35

2.4 Floor Ceiling Type IDU

Refrigeration Capacity HP 1 1.5 2 3 3 4 4 5 5

Circulating Air Quantity 3

Power Supply 220-240V~ 50Hz/208-230V~ 60Hz

2.5 High Static Pressure Duct Type IDU

Model VEHD019N432U VEHD021N432U VEHD024N432U VEHD027N432U VEHD031N432U VEHD034N432U

Cooling Capacity kW 5.6 6.3 7.1 8.0 9.0 10.0

Heating Capacity kW 6.3 7.1 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.2

Circulating Air Quantity 3

Power Supply 220-240V~ 50Hz/208-230V~ 60Hz

Liquid Pipe mm Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52

Model VEHD038N432U VEHD043N432U VEHD048N432U VEGD076N432U VEGD095N432U

Cooling Capacity kW 11.0 12.5 14.0 22.4 28.0

Heating Capacity kW 12.5 14.0 16.0 25.0 4800

Circulating Air Quantity 3

Power Supply 220-240V~50Hz/208-230V~60Hz

Liquid Pipe mm Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52 Φ9.52

Net Weight kg 47 47 47 80 115

2.6 Wall mounted type IDU

Model VEHW007N432P VEHW009N432P VEHW012N432P VEHW015N432P VEHW017N432P VEHW019N432P VEHW021N432P VEHW024N432P

Refrigeration Capacity HP 1 1 1.5 2 2 2 3 3

Model VESD007N432U VESD008N432U VESD009N432U VESD011N432U VESD012N432U VESD013N432U

Model VESD015N432U VESD017N432U VESD019N432U VESD021N432U VESD024N432U